# MuseScore Studio Handbook Learn everything you need to know about using the world’s most popular music notation program, MuseScore Studio, which is available for free for Windows, macOS, and Linux-based operating systems. Get the latest version of MuseScore Studio ## Getting started {% content-ref url="/pages/zbPAfB1zzUMiNDbXARNQ" %} [Create your first score](/introduction/create-your-first-score) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/RpUFf08D9WqsLSnnJRNK" %} [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/KCuvToBmjdIdhSB3SQn6" %} [Playback controls](/sound-and-playback/playback-controls) {% endcontent-ref %} # About the handbook ## MuseScore versions covered This handbook is valid for **MuseScore Studio version 4.0 and above**. If you're using a different version of the program, please consult the appropriate handbook for your version: * [MuseScore 3 Handbook](https://handbook.musescore.org/3/) * [MuseScore 2 Handbook](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/2) * [MuseScore 1 Handbook](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/1) ## Exploring the handbook ### Browsing chapters Use the chapter links on the [main page](/) to explore content in each chapter of the handbook. There is also a [single-page view of the entire handbook](https://musescore.org/en/print/book/export/html/329209?toc=1), which can be used with your browser's find-in-page facility (shortcut: Ctrl+F, or Cmd+F on macOS). ### Searching the handbook To search the handbook, use the dedicated search field in the top right of each handbook page.

If you're not sure what to search for, try browsing the [Glossary](/appendix/glossary). It has pictures to help you to find things that you are unable to name. You can also try a web search using this special syntax to only include results from [MuseScore.org](https://musescore.org/): ``` site:musescore.org your topic here ``` This works with most search engines. For example, [perform a Google search for "`site:musescore.org tempo markings`"](https://www.google.com/search?q=site%3Amusescore.org+tempo+markings). If you still can't find the information you need, please ask for help in the [Support Forum](https://musescore.org/en/forum/6). ### Reading in a different language The handbook is translated into several languages, although translations are not always up-to-date with the English version. Pages are translated individually, so not every page is available in every language. To read the handbook in a different language, use the languages dropdown displayed in the top right of each handbook page, directly below the [Search field](#Searching-the-handbook). If a particular language isn't available in the dropdown this means the page hasn't been translated into that language yet.

In case of doubt, please consult the [English version of the handbook](/), or ask for help in one of the [forums](https://musescore.org/forum). Use the [Support and bug reports forum](https://musescore.org/en/forum/6) if posting in English, otherwise use the appropriate forum for your language. ### Downloading the handbook To save a copy of the handbook to your computer for offline viewing: 1. Visit the [single-page view of the entire handbook](https://musescore.org/en/print/book/export/html/329209?toc=1). 2. Open your browser's **Print** facility (shortcut: Ctrl+P, or Cmd+P on macOS). 3. Choose the option labelled *Print to PDF*, *Save to PDF*, or similar. * Make sure you are saving a file rather than printing a physical copy. If you require a physical copy, it's best to follow the above steps to create a PDF, then check the PDF is formatted correctly before you proceed to print it with a real printer. The handbook is quite long, so please don't print a physical copy unless you really need to. ## Contributing to the handbook The handbook is maintained and translated by the MuseScore community. If you'd like to help write content, please read [Editing the handbook](/about-the-handbook/editing-the-handbook). If you want to translate pages, please read [How to translate the handbook](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/administrative-guidelines/translation-instructions#How_to_translate_the_handbook). # Editing the handbook ## Guidelines for writing articles So you'd like to contribute to the MuseScore 4 handbook – great! We're so happy you're here. This page contains brief guidelines to get you started with writing articles. Please read this page carefully before editing anything in our handbook. This information is intended to help, but if you're in doubt about anything or have any questions, please join the discussion on the [Documentation](https://musescore.org/en/forum/8) forum. ## Structure - General principles Each page should explain a single topic more or less completely. If a page feels like it is getting too long, try splitting it into separate pages. Not every page is identical, but keeping the following in mind can help you structure your page content in a way that's easy to understand for the reader: ### Start with an overview Starting your page with an overview can help introduce a topic before launching into details. Overviews don't usually need a section heading. ### Establish a hierarchy Think about what most users will be trying to achieve, and why they might be coming to the handbook to look for information. Put solutions for the most common tasks towards the top of the page; less commonly needed information can go towards the bottom. ### Group information logically Related concepts should be discussed together. This may sometimes require less-commonly-used features to be discussed alongside more-commonly used ones, but that's okay. ### Focus on user tasks, not just UI components For instance, a section about "Creating custom key signatures" is better than a section called "Using the master palette". ## Headings Headings are used to give a structure and hierarchy to the information on the page. The first section heading you enter will always be a Heading 1. Please also don’t skip heading levels (for example, by adding a Heading 3 after a Heading 1). | Heading level | Usage | | ------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Heading 1 | Use for the start of every section. | | Heading 2 | Use for the start of every sub-section, and to introduce single-step instructions (i.e. where a list is not necessary). | | Heading 3 | Use sparingly if additional sub-sections are required. | Try to start your headings with a **verb**, e.g. "Adding time signatures", rather than "Time signatures". ## Content The MuseScore handbook broadly contains two main types of information: **descriptive material**, and **goal-oriented instructions**. ### Descriptive material This is used to explain different areas of the program. For example: > A Palette is a folder containing musical symbols which can be applied to the score. MuseScore's default palettes contain collections of related symbols, but you can customize palettes to display almost any kind of symbol, line or text. Descriptive material tends to be longer and more “fleshed out” than goal-oriented instructions, but we still ask that you use [simple, plain language](https://www.archives.gov/open/plain-writing/10-principles.html) wherever you can. ### Goal-oriented instructions These explain how to perform a specific task. The instructions should be as short and direct as possible, generally taking the form of a numbered list. For example, > To create a new palette: > > 1. Open the **Palettes** tab > 2. Click **Add palettes** > 3. Click **Create custom palette** > 4. Name your new palette and click **Create** Notice that we use **bold** text for named components of the user interface, including menus. Keyboard shortcuts, such as Ctrl+S, are rendered with GitBook's 'Keyboard' style. When writing goal-oriented instructions, please: * Use only numbered lists (no dot points) * Begin each numbered instruction with a verb * Write only one task/direction per numbered item For example, instead of writing this: 1. Open the **Palettes** tab and click **Add palettes** Please write this: 1. Open the **Palettes** tab 2. Click **Add palettes** Please be sure to include keyboard options for goal-oriented instructions, where such options exist. This is especially important for improving the program's accessibility. ## Use of non-written media The use of non-written media is encouraged as a supplement to written descriptions. This includes: * Animated GIFs * Screenshots of relevant parts of the user interface ### Creating animated GIFs Animated GIFs offer many advantages over screenshots and videos in that they expose in the shortest amount of time the sequence of actions required to achieve a particular task. There are lots of tools available for creating GIFs, however we recommend the following workflow to ensure crisp and clear image quality while maintaining as small as possible file size (ideally <2MB per GIF). * Use only the MuseScore Studio 4 interface, and set its appearance to dark mode with blue highlights (to achieve consistency across the entire handbook) * Plan and rehearse the mouse clicks and keyboard shortcuts you will use, aiming to demonstrate the required steps in as short as possible time (ideally <10s) * Use a free tool like [gifcap](https://gifcap.dev/) to record the contents of your screen * Use a free tool like [KeyCastr](https://github.com/keycastr/keycastr) to record keystrokes (where required) * Only show the amount of UI required demonstrate a particular task # Style guide ## General ### Case All text is to be written in **sentence case**. This includes all paragraphs, headings, and page titles. {% hint style="info" %} GitBook renders some text in ALL CAPS, such as group (aka chapter) titles in the **table of contents** on the left of the screen. However, you should use sentence case when editing this text. {% endhint %} Proper nouns and abbreviations should be capitalized according to the prevailing form used on the Wikipedia page of the topic in question. > Import the MusicXML file. :white\_check\_mark: **MusicXML** is capitalized > > Customize the user interface (UI). :white\_check\_mark: **UI** is capitalized and **user interface** is not > > Available in braille and Modified Stave Notation. :white\_check\_mark: **MSN** is capitalized and **braille** is not Contractions of everyday speech should not be capitalized. > A quarter note (aka crotchet) is a musical duration. :white\_check\_mark: **aka** is not capitalized ### UI labels When writing instructions for the user, text that appears in MuseScore's user interface should be copied verbatim, including any capitalization, and highlighted in **bold** without enclosing quotation marks. > Press the **Not now** button. :white\_check\_mark: **Not now** is bold and capitalized like in the application #### Arrows in UI paths Type `->` to describe the path through submenus or through the hierarchy of a dialog. GitBook will format `->` as a single arrow character, though in editing mode it appears as separate characters. Since the text on either side will be styled in bold (as all text from the UI should be), keep the arrows bold too. Use a space on either side of each arrow. > Choose **File -> Save other -> Save a copy...** :white\_check\_mark: > > Uncheck **Style -> Notes -> Shorten stems**. :white\_check\_mark: ### Bullet points Bullet points (aka unordered lists) are used for listed content that is not an ordered process. If the contents of a group of bullet points are not complete sentences, there's no need to use periods. > * Dynamics > * Accidentals > * Articulations :white\_check\_mark: No periods When bullet points *are* complete sentences, use periods at the end of each sentence, even if there is only one. > * This is a one-sentence bullet point, with a period at the end. > * This is a bullet with two sentences. Periods are included after every sentence. :white\_check\_mark: Full sentences require periods It's a common pattern to have some bolded text at the beginning of a bullet followed by a colon. In this case, the colon should be bolded too and the first character after the colon should be capitalized. > * **Bullet:** This is a good example. :white\_check\_mark: The colon is bold and 'This' is capitalized > * **Bullet**: this is a bad example. :x: The colon is not bold and 'this' is not capitalized ### Numbered lists Numbered lists (aka ordered lists) are used for listed content that must be done in sequence. For explanations of how to execute a task, try to keep it to one sentence per number, and use periods at the end of each one. > 1. Think of what to say. > 2. Express each step a short sentence with a period at the end. > 3. Finish the list. :white\_check\_mark: ### Hyperlinks Where appropriate, hyperlinks may be added to key words or phrases in ordinary text, which should be written to make sense without the link. In general, the full URL should not be displayed. > Watch the [tutorial video](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=z4Ecaaqwg8U). :white\_check\_mark: Text makes sense without the link > > Watch the tutorial [here](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=z4Ecaaqwg8U). :x: Text wouldn't make sense if the link was removed > > Watch it at . :x: Don't show the URL Plain domain names should be captalized like the brand name. The top-level domain (TLD, e.g. `.com`, `.org`, `.co.uk`, etc.) should be omitted unless there's a good reason to include it. > Find us on [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/musescore) and [YouTube](https://www.youtube.com/musescore). :white\_check\_mark: Omit .com TLDs for these popular sites > > Listen on [Audio.com](https://audio.com/). :white\_check\_mark: TLD is part of the website's branding > > Visit [MuseScore.org](https://musescore.org/en). :white\_check\_mark: TLD is necessary to distinguish from MuseScore.com > > Download the installer from [MuseHub.com](https://www.musehub.com/). :white\_check\_mark: Referring specifically to the website > > Get the sounds in [MuseHub](https://www.musehub.com/). :white\_check\_mark: Referring to the app (but linking to the website) ### Keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts should be formatted as follows: > Press Shift+1—9. :white\_check\_mark: **en-dash** indicates range > > Press Ctrl+Shift++/- (Mac: Cmd+Shift++/-). :white\_check\_mark: **slash** indicates alternatives Modifiers should be written in this form and in this order for each platform: > Windows/Linux: Win+Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Fn+... :white\_check\_mark: > > Mac: Ctrl+Cmd+Option+Shift+Fn +... :white\_check\_mark: In Linux-specific instructions, the Win key should be written as Super. Keys that type printable characters should be represented by that character. > . , ; ' \[ ] / \\ - = \` etc. :white\_check\_mark: All non-printing keys should be referenced by their (possibly abbreviated) name rather than by a symbol. This includes the cursor keys. > Space Backspace Del Ins Esc Return Up Down Left Right PgUp PgDn Home End Menu Caps Lock :white\_check\_mark: ### Typed characters Typed sequences should usually be formatted as `inline code`, even if it's just a single character. > To enter a double flat, type `bb`. :white\_check\_mark: **Inline code** (single element) Occasionally, it may be preferable to show the actual keys pressed, formatted as keyboard shortcuts rather than as inline code. > To enter a double flat, type B B. :white\_check\_mark: **Keyboard keys** (space between each key) ## Structure ### Pages {% hint style="info" %} You're currently viewing the [Style guide](/about-the-handbook/style-guide) page, which is a subpage of [About the handbook](/about-the-handbook). {% endhint %} #### Page titles Page titles should be relatively short. Ideally the title should fit on one line in the Summary on the left of the screen, although this may not always be possible. Bear in mind that page titles may be significantly longer when translated to other languages besides English. Tips to keep page titles short: * Avoid saying "score" (e.g. "Selecting elements", not "Selecting elements in the score") * Avoid saying "MuseScore" (e.g. "Upgrading", not "Upgrading MuseScore Studio") #### Subpages When subpages are used, only one level of subpages may be used. Never create a subsubpage. Parent pages should have very short titles because its title appears in the URLs of all its subpages. In general, we prefer to use [groups](#groups) rather than subpages, to avoid nesting in the Summary. ### Groups {% hint style="info" %} Groups are like chapters. They are displayed in ALL CAPS in the table of contents on the left of the screen (e.g. 'INTRODUCTION' and 'NAVIGATION'). The current group name is also shown, hyperlinked, above each page title in the main content area. {% endhint %} Group names should be written in sentence case – the ALL CAPS styling is handled by GitBook automatically. Groups should have very short names. This is because the group name appears in the URLs of all pages within the group. It is possible to edit the group slug to make it shorter than the actual group name. However, in general, this should not be done. Instead, the group name should be made as short as possible. # Using GitBook ## Overview ### Organization User content on GitBook is always owned by an [Organization](https://docs.gitbook.com/account-management/organization-management). In our case, that's [MuseScore](https://app.gitbook.com/o/ZDAbKoO7AzkLkkLRGvQP). ### Space Within an organization, you can create [Spaces](https://docs.gitbook.com/content-editor/editor/content-structure/what-is-a-space) for different content. We currently have one space called [English (US)](https://handbook.musescore.org/), which is for the handbook's English source text. We'll add more spaces later; one for each translation, including English (GB) if we want (or we could rename the main one "English"). ### Site / Docs site To make a space viewable to the public, it must be added to a [Docs site](https://docs.gitbook.com/published-documentation/publish-a-docs-site) (aka 'site'). We currently have one site called [MuseScore Studio Handbook](https://app.gitbook.com/o/ZDAbKoO7AzkLkkLRGvQP/sites/site_Jnu8t). This site will be used for the source space and all translations. Now that the handbook site is published, it is available at: * (canonical site URL) * [https://musescore.gitbook.io/](https://musescore.gitbook.io/musescore-studio-handbook) (alias because it's set as the default site for this organization) * (because we set up a [custom domain](https://docs.gitbook.com/publishing-documentation/custom-domain)) {% hint style="warning" %} While a site is published, [**live edits**](#live-edits) on its spaces are disabled, so all changes must be made through [**change requests**](#change-request) (or on GitHub if GitHub sync is enabled). {% endhint %} ### GitHub sync The content within a space can be [synced](https://docs.gitbook.com/integrations/git-sync/enabling-github-sync) with a GitHub repository. In the repository, content is stored as Markdown files, with subfolders for each parent **page** or **group**. The sync is two-way, so edits made in either place will be reflected in the other. This will enable us to: 1. Edit the source text on GitBook or GitHub. 2. Upload strings from GitHub to Transifex. 3. Download translations from Transifex to GitHub. 4. Sync translations back to GitBook. {% hint style="warning" %} While GitHub sync is enabled, [**live edits**](#live-edits) are disabled, so all changes must be made through [**change requests**](#change-request), or on GitHub via pull requests or direct commits to the repository. {% endhint %} ## Navigation ### Summary / Table of contents On the left side of the screen is a list of **groups**, **pages** and **subpages** in the current space. This list is the **summary** or **table of contents**. If GitHub sync is enabled, the summary appears in a file called `SUMMARY.md` at the root of the space. {% hint style="info" %} To prevent a specific page appearing in the **summary**, go to **Page actions (⋮) > Hide page**. The page will still appear in search results and be accessible to anyone with the URL. {% endhint %} ### Page outine / On this page On the right side of the screen, under the label "ON THIS PAGE", is a list of headings on the current page. This is the **page outline**. Only Heading 1 and Heading 2 headings are shown in the outline. #### Heading 3 (not shown in page outline) {% hint style="info" %} To hide the sidebar for the **summary** or **page outline**, go to **Page actions (⋮) > Options**. The summary and page outline will remain visible on other pages. {% endhint %} ### Pages You're viewing a page now. This page is actually a *subpage* of the [main page](https://github.com/shoogle/Handbook/blob/main/docs/about-the-handbook/broken-reference/README.md). It's also possible to have *subsubpages*, and so on. {% hint style="info" %} By default, parent pages are *collapsed* in the **summary**, so you can't see their subpages. Subpages become visible when you view the parent page or click the expansion arrow next to it in the summary. {% endhint %} ### Groups Pages can also be nested under groups. Group names appear in BLOCK CAPITALS in the summary. Unlike parent pages, groups are always *expanded* in the summary and cannot be collapsed. Also, groups cannot be nested under other groups or pages. {% hint style="info" %} Groups are not pages and so cannot contain content of their own. If you try to visit a group URL, GitBook will redirect you to the first page in the group. {% endhint %} ## Editing ### Live edits GitBook has a [live edit](https://docs.gitbook.com/content-editor/editing-content/live-edits) mode where you can edit content directly without creating a "branch" first. In this mode, you can add, move, rename, and delete pages, as well as edit content on existing pages. {% hint style="warning" %} Live edits are *disabled* while a site is published, or while GitHub sync is enabled. If editing is disabled, many of the **menus (⋮)**, **options (⠿)**, and **buttons (+)** mentioned on this page will not be available until you start making a **change request**. {% endhint %} ### Change request (CR) While live edits are disabled, the only way to make changes is via a [change request](https://docs.gitbook.com/collaboration/change-requests), or ‘CR’. This creates a personal ‘branch’ on which editing is enabled. Your CR branch covers the entire space, so it’s possible to edit multiple files in a single CR if necessary, but this should only be done if the changes are related. When you’re done editing, you can submit your CR for review, like a GitHub pull request (PR). Like PRs, change requests should always be given a meaningful title that describes the change made. Ideally, the title should be written in the imperative mood, which means it should complete the sentence *“This change request will...”*.

Example CR name	Rating	Comment
"shoogle's Nov 21 changes"	1	Default CR name. It's not descriptive enough.
"Metric modulations"	2	Bare minimum.
"Added images of metric modulations"	3	Better, but not in imperative mood.
"Add images of metric modulations"	4	This is in the imperative mode.
"Tempos: Add images of metric modulations"	5	In imperative mood and identifies the topic being edited.

{% hint style="info" %} In general, each change request should only do one thing. That thing might be: * *"Add page: Rhythm"* * *"Rename 'Meters' page to 'Time signatures'"* * *"Installation on Linux: Remove unnecessary detail"* * *"Replace 'MuseScore 4' with 'MuseScore Studio' on all pages"* In naming your CR, if you can't avoid using the word "and" (as in *"Do this* **and** *do that"*), that's a clue you should consider splitting your edits across multiple CRs instead. {% endhint %} ### Resolving conflicts While you’re waiting for your change request (CR) to be merged, the content it’s based on could change in the primary space (e.g. if someone else’s CR gets merged before yours). If this happens, GitBook will prompt you to **update your change request** to reflect the new primary content. When you click the **Update** button in your CR, GitBook will alert you to any conflicts that it is not able to resolve automatically. This happens if you changed a **block** (i.e. a paragraph) that was also changed in the primary space. In this case, GitBook displays the two versions of the block side-by-side and asks you to pick one to keep: the primary version, or your changed version. If necessary, you can edit the block manually to incorporate elements of both versions. Some types of conflict are not identified by GitBook. For example, if your edit refers to other content, such as an existing image or definition higher up the page, you should check that this content still exists after you update your CR. Also, if a page you edited was renamed in the primary space, when you update the CR you might find that you are left with two copies of the page, each with a different name and different content. If this happens, you’ll have to delete one copy of the page and potentially transfer some of its contents to the other copy. {% hint style="info" %} Each change request should focus on a single topic. This makes it easier to review and merge quickly, which reduces the likelihood of conflicts occuring, and makes it easier to resolve conflicts if they do occur. {% endhint %} ### Creating new pages and groups If you hover the cursor over an existing page or group in the **summary**, a **More actions (⋮)** button appears, which reveals a menu with the option to **Insert subpage**. This creates a new empty page nested under the parent page or group. Similarly, if you hover *between* pages in the summary, an **Add (+)** button appears, which enables you to insert a new page between neighboring pages. To create a group, use the **Add new** option at the bottom of the summary. This button can also be used to create top-level pages (i.e. pages that are not subpages of another page or group). Once created, you can then drag the new page or group to the correct position in the summary. {% hint style="info" %} If GitHub sync is enabled and you create a new subfolder or Markdown file in the repository, you must manually add it to `SUMMARY.md` for GitBook to become aware of it. {% endhint %} ### Importing pages from the old handbook When you hover the cursor over an existing page or group in the summary, the **More actions (⋮)** menu button that appears also contains an option to **Import subpages**. Using this option, you can choose a Markdown or HTML file on your computer to upload and turn into a new subpage. To create the Markdown or HTML file: 1. Visit a page of the [old handbook](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/4) and use the option to Edit. 2. Copy the title and source text and paste them at . 3. Click "Convert" and save the resulting file somewhere on your machine. Once on GitBook, the page will likely have problems, such as: * Links to other handbook pages are broken. * Images are "hotlinked" from MuseScore.org rather than uploaded to GitBook. * If importing HTML rather than Markdown: * \

elements are incorrectly imported as Heading 2. (\

and \

are imported correctly.) These issues must be fixed manually, but we don't need to do it yet because we'll do another import later, after the old handbook has been frozen. Before then, we need to get used to GitBook ourselves and then inform the community about the migration. ### Editing a page GitBook uses a block-based editor somewhat similar to Squarespace and recent versions of Wordpress. #### Content blocks A new block is created for each: * [Paragraph](https://docs.gitbook.com/content-editor/blocks/paragraph) * [Heading](https://docs.gitbook.com/content-editor/blocks/heading) * [List item](https://docs.gitbook.com/content-editor/blocks/unordered-list) * [Table row](https://docs.gitbook.com/content-editor/blocks/table) * Etc.

Expand me
Some blocks can be nested within other blocks, such as this paragraph, which is nested inside an expandable section.
If you hover the cursor over an existing block, this reveals a plus (+) button to add a new block, as well as an options (⠿) button with options for the current block. The options button can also be dragged to reposition the block on the page. Another way to create a block is to edit an existing block and press Enter or Return. This usually creates a new paragraph block below the first one, but it might create something else, such as a new list item or table row. If it's a list item, you can press Tab and Shift+Tab to change the level of nesting, and Enter or Return to convert it to a normal paragraph (this only work while the block is empty). While editing an empty block, you can type a forward slash (/) to quickly convert it to a different type of block. If the block is not empty, typing slash (/) instead reveals options for inserting inline content. # License [MuseScore Studio Handbook](/) © MuseScore Limited and contributors ([CC BY-SA 4.0](https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/)) Except where otherwise noted, all text and images in the Handbook are copyright MuseScore Limited and contributors, and licensed [CC BY-SA 4.0](https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/). Linked or embedded content is subject to its own licensing terms. [Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License](https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/)
# Download and installation To download MuseScore Studio for free (no account or subscription required), please follow the instructions for your specific operating system below. ## Windows 1. Go to [musescore.org](https://musescore.org/) 2. Click the button marked Free Download \[This section needs completing] ## macOS 1. Go to [musescore.org](https://musescore.org/) 2. Click the button marked Free Download An application called MuseHub will be installed in your default download directory (usually the Downloads folder). This application makes it easy to install MuseScore Studio, as well as a range of sound libraries and effects plugins that can greatly enhance your music writing experience. To install and open MuseHub: 1. Open the Finder and go to the Downloads folder 2. Double-click the application Muse\_Hub.dmg 3. In the dialog that appears, drag the MuseHub application icon into your Applications folder 4. Double-click the Applications folder icon to look inside the folder 5. Double-click the MuseHub application to open it During this process, you may need to grant MuseHub various permissions and access to folders. These permissions are required to ensure MuseHub installs correctly. Now that you have MuseHub open in front of you, it's time to install MuseScore Studio: 1. Click on the Apps tab in the left panel 2. Locate MuseScore Studio and click the Free button beneath it to start the download and installation process 3. Once the app has been downloaded, click the Open button beneath the MuseScore Studio icon. Now get writing some music! ## Linux Also see [Troubleshooting](/support/troubleshooting) ### AppImage #### Install The easiest way to install the program is by using an AppImage: 1. Go to the [Download→Software](https://musescore.org/en/download) page at musescore.org 2. Under Linux→AppImage (recommended), click on the Download (64 bit) link 3. When the download is complete, right-click on the AppImage and select Properties 4. Switch to the Permissions tab 5. The next step varies depending on your file manager: * Nautilus-based (Nemo, Files, Caja) : Check the “Allow executing file as program” box. * Dolphin: Check the "Is executable" box. * Thunar: Check the “Allow this file to run as a program” box. * PCManFM: Change the “Execute” option in the drop down list to “Anyone”. 6. Exit the dialog. 7. Right-click inside the directory in which the AppImage is installed and select Open in Terminal 8. In the Terminal type, ./\[file name] install (the dot and slash at the beginning are important!) Steps 7 and 8 ensure that a MuseScore entry appears in the system’s menu and is linked to the new location of the AppImage (/home/\[user name]/.local/bin). The correct file associations are also automatically made. Note: Instead of steps 7 and 8 (above) you can, of course, install using the absolute file path instead. That is: 7. Open the Terminal 8. Type \[file path] install Tip: if you apply copy to the AppImage and press `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`V` in the terminal this will enter the absolute file path of the file that has just been “copied”. #### Uninstall No formal uninstall procedure is needed to remove the installed AppImage. Just delete menu entries and any shortcuts manually, then delete the App itself, and its links (which will be in \~/.local/bin). # Create your first score We’ll start by creating a new score from a template (Alternatively, you can learn about creating a score from scratch in [Adding and removing instruments](/basics/setting-up-your-score)). To create a score from a template: 1. Click New score in the Scores screen 2. In the New score dialog that appears, browse templates by Category, or use the search bar to look up a template directly 3. Click Next to enter additional score information (or skip this step and let MuseScore pre-fill your score with default information, which you can always change later) 4. Click Done to create your new score
## Entering score information In the Additional score information screen, you can set: * The initial key signature (the default key signature contains no sharps or flats) * The initial time signature (the default time signature is 4/4) * The initial tempo (Click Tempo, then Show tempo marking on my score for this to appear) * A [pickup measure](/appendix/glossary#pickup-measure) (anacrusis or upbeat measure), and its duration * The initial number of measures in the score (the default is 32, but you can [add/remove measures](/basics/adding-and-removing-measures) from the score edit window) ## Entering notes The simplest way to enter notes in MuseScore is to: 1. Hit `N` on your keyboard to enter the note entry mode 2. Start typing note names (`A`, `B`, `C`, `D`, `E`, `F`, `G`)
You’re now engraving in MuseScore! You’ll notice the blue note input highlight, which indicates that you are in note input mode. It shows you where in the measure your next note will be entered. You can specify the duration of each note you enter in the Note input toolbar. To change note duration: 1. Ensure you are in note input mode (See above) 2. Click on the desired note duration, or 3. Use shortcut keys `1` through `7` to select different note values
Learn more about this topic in [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#entering-notes-and-rests). ## Adding items from the palettes The Palettes panel contains almost every notational object you might need to add detail to your score. The simplest way to add palette items to your notation is to: 1. Select an existing object (or range of objects) in your score (e.g. a notehead, clef, measure, etc.) 2. In the Palettes panel, open a palette by clicking the triangular arrow button 3. Click once on a palette object
Learn more about this topic in [Palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes#palettes) ## Making adjustments in Properties The Properties panel can be revealed by clicking on the Properties tab on the left side of the screen:
(Users of MuseScore prior to version 4 will know this as the Inspector). The properties panel will show settings that are specific to the object being selected. These settings usually affect the visual appearance of the selected object. Most of the time, changes you make in Properties will apply only to the object you have selected (e.g. you’ll change the selected hairpin, and not every hairpin in your score). As you add details to your score, click on any object to see what settings are available.
Learn more about this topic in [Properties](/basics/properties-panel#properties). ## Inserting and deleting measures To insert a single measure: 1. Click on a measure to select it 2. In the Measure section of Properties, click Insert measures 3. Click the + button This Measure section contains controls that allow you to insert multiple measures at once. Simply set the number of measures you wish to insert in the text field. You can also use the dropdown menu to change the point where new measures will be inserted. To delete a measure or group of measures: 1. Select the measure(s) you wish to delete 2. In the Measures popup, click the trash can icon
More information on this topic can be found in [Measures](/basics/adding-and-removing-measures#measures). ## Saving your score To save your score locally to your computer's harddrive: 1. Select File→Save 2. In the dialog that appears, select folder and fill in the required info such as file name, click Save or OK To save your score to the cloud on musescore.com: 1. Select File→Save to Cloud. 2. You may be asked to sign in to your account on musescore.com. 3. Fill in the Name of your score. 4. Set a Visibility. Private means only you may see your score. Unlisted means anyone with the correct link may see your score. Public means anyone may see your score. 5. Press Save. You can find all your cloud scores by going to Home > Scores > My online scores (look for the files marked with a small blue cloud symbol). Read more about this in [Opening and saving scores](/file-management/opening-and-saving-scores). ## Exporting your score Export allows you to create non-MuseScore files, such as PDF, MusicXML, MIDI, and [various audio and image formats](/file-management/file-export). To export your score: 1. Select the Publish tab 2. Click Export 3. Select the parts you wish to export 4. Choose the file format for your exported file(s) 5. If exporting multiple parts, choose whether you want each part combined into one file or exported to as separate files 6. Click Export You can also [share scores online](/file-management/publish-to-musescore.com#share-scores-online) on [musescore.com](https://musescore.com/upload). # Upgrading from earlier versions If you’re coming to MuseScore Studio 4 from MuseScore 3 or earlier, you’ll notice changes not only to the user interface, but also to many familiar features and ways of doing things. These changes have been designed to improve the user experience while providing much greater functionality. Here's a very quick overview of some of the major changes. ## User interface MuseScore Studio 4 comes with a sleek new interface. Nearly every part of the application has been completely redesigned to be cleaner and easier to read. You can choose between light, dark and high contrast themes, as well as pick your preferred accent color. Changes to the appearance of the app can be made in [Preferences](/customization/preferences). ## Instruments and parts The new[ Layout panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings) allows you to hide, rearrange and customize your instruments without having to leave the score view. The panel integrates tightly with the process of creating [parts](/basics/parts), making it much easier to produce custom parts with any combination of available instruments. There’s now also a convenient button in the toolbar that allows you to quickly open any available part. ## Inspector The Inspector from earlier versions of MuseScore is now known as the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel). Every option in this panel has been re-organized and the entire experience has been streamlined. By default, the Properties panel displays multiple useful options, like the ability to show or hide empty staves and various other types of score markings. Whereas previously you needed to select single element types before you could make changes to them, MuseScore Studio 4 always displays relevant settings, regardless of how many different elements you have selected. ## New playback and VSTi support Playback improvements are the single largest change to MuseScore Studio 4. Apart from new sample libraries (Muse Sounds, available as a separate download), there’s now support for VSTi plugins, which can be applied to instruments using the new [mixer](/sound-and-playback/mixer) panel. The mixer also lets you easily switch between VSTi, [SoundFonts](/sound-and-playback/soundfonts) and the Muse Sounds libraries, while also supporting VST effects. Sounds will now always be saved on a per-score basis, so there is no longer any need for the Synthesizer panel found in MuseScore 3 (this has been removed in MuseScore Studio 4). If you previously used SFZ files for playback in MuseScore 3, we now recommend that you use a free VST sampler, like [Sfizz](https://sfz.tools/sfizz/) or [Sforzando](https://www.plogue.com/products/sforzando.html), both of which support SFZ playback. ## Engraving improvements MuseScore Studio 4 features many engraving improvements, some of which will have an effect on the appearance and layout of scores created in earlier versions. The most significant changes affect the placement of beams, slurs and ties, horizontal spacing, and page layout. There are far too many changes to list here, so those interested in learning more about the particularities may wish to read [this dedicated document](/introduction/upgrading-from-earlier-versions) (link forthcoming) that explains and illustrates everything in detail. An unavoidable consequence of having made such significant engraving improvements is that it will not be possible to open a score in MuseScore Studio 4 from an earlier version of MuseScore and have it look identical. ## Cloud storage When you save a document for the first time, you’ll now be asked whether you want to save your file locally to your computer, or to the cloud. This new option is part of an exciting expansion we are making to services on musescore.com. Learn more about this in [Open/Save/Export/Print](/file-management/opening-and-saving-scores) and [Share Scores Online](/file-management/publish-to-musescore.com). ## Other changes As you use the program, you’ll find lots of other small but significant changes that have been designed to make the process of composing and notating music just that bit easier. These include: * An expanded note input toolbar, with one-click access to frequently used elements like tuplets and articulation marks. There’s also a convenient “+” menu where you can quickly add everything from notes and intervals, to frames and text elements. * Easy-access features in the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel) that let you quickly add and remove measures, and show and hide empty staves * A beautiful new [mixer](/sound-and-playback/mixer) * Improvements to the [time signature properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures) dialog * A streamlined experience for setting the language of the app * A new Learn center for instructional videos on how to get the most from the app More changes are listed in [Upgrading from MuseScore 3.x](/appendix/upgrade-from-musescore-3.x), including some keyboard shortcuts that are different or entirely new. # Accessibility ## Screen readers MuseScore Studio supports NVDA on Windows and VoiceOver on macOS. JAWS is not currently supported. Support for other screen readers varies. ### Speech on Windows If speech isn't working in MuseScore, try pressing `Alt`+`F` to focus the File menu, then press `Esc` twice to return to where you were in the app, at which point the screen reader should start working again. This tends to be needed if you start the screen reader after MuseScore is already running. As mentioned above, MuseScore's speech output with JAWS is not currently as complete as it is with Narrator or NVDA. | Screen Reader | Modifier key | On/off shortcut | Settings shortcut | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- | | Narrator (built in) |
`Narrator` =
`Caps Lock`
| `Win`+`Ctrl`+`Enter` | `Win`+`Ctrl`+`N` | | NVDA ([free](https://www.nvaccess.org/download/)) |
`NVDA` =
`Ins` / `Caps Lock`
|
Off: `NVDA`+`Q`
Toggle: `NVDA`+`S`
| `NVDA`+`N` | | JAWS ([paid](https://support.freedomscientific.com/Downloads/JAWS)) |
`JAWS` =
`Ins` / `Caps Lock`
| Off: `JAWS`+`F4` | `JAWS`+`J` | ### Speech on macOS To properly navigate using VoiceOver on macOS, you must configure it as follows: 1. Turn off [Quick Nav mode](https://support.apple.com/guide/voiceover/with-quick-nav-vo27943/mac) by pressing the `Left` and `Right` arrow keys simultaneously while VoiceOver is running, or via VoiceOver Utility -> Commanders. 2. In VoiceOver Utility -> Navigation, set Mouse Pointer to Ignores VoiceOver cursor. MuseScore's interface is navigable with the tab cursor as well as with VoiceOver's own cursor. In general it's best to use the tab cursor because this matches the interface on other platforms, hence is what you will find described in most documentation and tutorials. When using the tab cursor, remember to use the arrow keys as well as `Tab` as described in [Navigating the UI](#navigating-the-ui). VoiceOver's cursor can be used to reach areas of the application that are not yet accessible to the tab cursor. | Screen Reader | Modifier key | On/off shortcut | Settings shortcut | | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | --------------------------- | | VoiceOver (built in) |
`VO` = `Ctrl`+`Option`
/ `Caps Lock`
| `Cmd`+`F5` | `VO`+`F8` | ### Speech on Linux On Linux it's necessary to start the screen reader running before you launch MuseScore, otherwise accessibility features will be disabled to save system resources (the same is true for all Qt applications on Linux). If you forget to do this, simply exit MuseScore and launch it again, this time with the screen reader running. Orca is the most feature-complete screen reader available for Linux. Orca is built into the GNOME desktop environment, so it's recommended that Linux users with accessibility needs use a distribution based on GNOME or one of its derivatives. | Screen Reader | Modifier key | On/off shortcut | Settings shortcut | | ----------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | Orca (built into GNOME) |
`Orca` =
`Ins` / `Caps Lock`
| `Super`+`Alt`+`S` | `Orca`+`Space` or run `orca --setup` | ## Keyboard access ### Navigating the UI MuseScore's UI (user interface) has a hierarchical system of keyboard navigation, which is different to what you may be used to in other applications. In MuseScore's system, the `Tab` key skips some controls to save time. If you want to reach these controls, you need to use the arrow keys as well as `Tab`. | Shortcut | Action | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | `F6` / \` / `Shift`+`F6` / `Shift`+\` | Move between UI sections (\` is the backtick or grave accent key, found near the `Tab` key or left `Shift` on most QWERTY keyboards). | | `Tab` / `Shift`+`Tab` | Move between control groups. | | `Up` / `Down` / `Left` / `Right` | Move between controls within a group. | | `Esc` | Stop interacting with an editable text control (so you can move away from it with the arrow keys). | | `Enter` / `Return` | Activate the current control. | | `Space` | Activate the current control or select an item in a list. | Please note that UI navigation shortcuts are fixed and cannot be changed, unlike the shortcuts for score navigation, which can be [customized in Preferences](/customization/keyboard-shortcuts). ### Navigating the score The following shortcuts are of particular value to accessibility users: | Shortcut | Action | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | `Right` / `Left` | Move to next or previous note, chord, or rest. | | `Alt`+`Right` / `Alt`+`Left` | Move to next or previous element. These shortcuts enable you to visit all kinds of notation elements, not just notes and rests. | | `Alt`+`Up` / `Alt`+`Down` | Move to note above or below. These shortcuts enable you to move between individual notes in a chord, and also to reach notes and rests in other voices and in other staves. | | `F2` / `Alt`+`Shift`+`E` | Edit selected element. Equivalent to double-clicking with the mouse. Use it to edit text objects or adjust the length of hairpins, slurs, and voltas (use the `Tab` key to change which end of the line you are adjusting). When you have finished editing, press `Esc` to return to Normal mode. | | `Menu` / `Shift`+`F10` | Open context menu for selected element(s). Equivalent to right-clicking with the mouse. It provides access to various options that depend on the element selected. Use this shortcut on a [range selection](/basics/selecting-elements#Selecting_a_range_using_the_keyboard) to provide access to [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties), and [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). | Other aspects of keyboard navigation are described on pages throughout this handbook. All score navigation and manipulation shortcuts can be [customized in Preferences](/customization/keyboard-shortcuts). ## Video tutorials The following accessibility tutorials are designed to get you up and running with MuseScore, using your keyboard and screen reader. They don't cover every aspect of the program, but they should give you a solid foundation that will enable you can take full advantage of the rest of this Handbook. | Video | Topics covered | | ---------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | [Installing MuseScore](https://youtu.be/TFdhtLIXLPc) | Installation of MuseScore on Windows, including Muse Hub and Muse Sounds. The process is similar on macOS and Linux, although on Linux you need to install Muse Hub and MuseScore separately. | | [Score setup](https://youtu.be/Fh45A6V3410) | Initial score setup, including choosing instruments, key signature, time signature, and other settings. | | [Entering music](https://youtu.be/mkZPsGYZ3QQ) | Basic note input. | | [Adding markings](https://youtu.be/oRrT4WpE0PY) | Using the palettes to add markings (e.g. dynamics) to your score. | | [The user interface](https://youtu.be/zxZ4OCBj00w) | Main window of the program, so you can understand where all the different panels, toolbars, and controls are, and how to reach them by keyboard. | # The user interface ## Overview MuseScore Studio's UI (user interface) consists of the main application window, as well as all associated dialogs, panels, and menus. ## Main window In the top left of MuseScore's main window are three tabs, labelled Home, Score and Publish. ### Home tab
The Home tab contains the following pages: #### My account Create a new MuseScore account, or login to your existing account. With an active account, you can get technical assistance and report bugs in the forums at [musescore.org](https://musescore.org/en). You can also save your files to the cloud on [musescore.com](https://musescore.com/dashboard). #### Scores This section allows you to set up a new score, or to open an existing one. Learn about creating new scores in [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score). #### Plugins This window displays a list of available plugins. See the chapter on [Plugins](/customization/plugins) to learn about managing these useful add-ons. #### Learn This is where video tutorials are hosted. Clicking on any video tutorial opens it on the [official MuseScore YouTube channel](https://www.youtube.com/c/musescore). ### Score tab
This area is where you do most of your work in MuseScore, including adding music notation and listening to playback of your score. The workspace consists of several regions (numbered according to the diagram below):
Default arrangement of toolbars and panels in the Score tab
1. [Parts button](/basics/parts): Located near the top center of the main window, this button opens the Parts dialog, where you can create, edit and delete instrumental part scores. 2. [Mixer button](/sound-and-playback/mixer): The button to the right of Parts opens and closes the Mixer panel, where you can control the sound and volume of each instrument individually. 3. [Playback toolbar](/sound-and-playback/playback-controls): Located in the top right, this toolbar enables you to play, pause, rewind and loop playback. Using the mouse, you can drag the six dots grip area (⠿) to undock this toolbar and expose additional options to seek and control playback tempo. 4. [Note input toolbar](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests): Extending across the top of the program window, just below the Parts and Mixer buttons, the note input toolbar includes essential notation elements used in score writing. Use it to set note duration, toggle accidentals, apply common articulations, enter tuplets, and switch between voices. 5. Left sidebar: The area on the left side of the program window contains various panels such as [Palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes), [Properties](/basics/properties-panel), and [Instruments](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings). These can be shown or hidden as desired, or undocked and dragged to the right sidebar; an equivalent area on the other side of the window. 6. Score view / notation view: This is the main central region that displays the current score or instrumental part as sheet music. This is where notation elements are added, edited, and deleted. 7. Status bar: This runs along the bottom of the window. The left side displays useful information about whatever elements are selected in the score. The right side contains controls for switching between workspaces, selecting concert or transposed pitch views, and specifying the page display and zoom factor (magnification). Keyboard users can press `Tab` or `F6` to navigate between these UI regions. Within each region, navigation is performed with the arrow keys and `Tab`. Almost all panels and toolbars can be un-docked and repositioned according to your project requirements and workflow preferences. Learn more about this in [Workspaces](/customization/workspaces). ### Publish tab
This tab allows you to view your score without the clutter of the note input toolbar or sidebar panels. There are options to print the score, and to export it in a variety of image, audio and document formats. When your score is finished, you can also publish it to [musescore.com](https://musescore.com/dashboard). ## Menu bar
{% hint style="info" %} Throughout this handbook, you will come across instructions in the form Menu > Item. For example, File > Save is an instruction to open the File menu and select the Save item within that menu. {% endhint %} On macOS, MuseScore's menus are part of the system-wide menu bar located at the top of the screen. Keyboard users can press `Ctrl`+`F2` to reach this area, and then navigate with the arrow keys or letter keys (e.g. press `F` for File). On Windows and Linux, the menu bar is located at the top of each application window. Keyboard users can reach the menus by pressing the `Alt` key, optionally followed by a letter or number key (e.g. press `Alt`+`F` for File, followed by `A` for Save as). The relevant letter or number is known as the mnemonic access key; it's underlined in the menu while `Alt` is held. Arrow keys also work for navigation in the menus. MuseScore's menu bar contains the following menus: ### File The File menu is used to create a new file, open and save files, import and export various formats, create and edit instrument parts, and print. ### Edit The Edit menu provides undo and redo options, copy/cut/paste options, and Find / Go to functionality. ### View The View menu is used to show or hide various palettes, dialogs, and other workspace elements. Items under the Show submenu adjusts display of non-printing elements: * Show invisible: Show/hide elements depending on their [Properties panel: Invisible](/basics/properties-panel#visibility) setting. If this option is ticked, invisible elements are shown in the score window as light gray. * Show formatting: Show/hide [Systems and horizontal spacing: System Breaks](/formatting/systems-and-horizontal-spacing) or [Pages and vertical spacing: Page Breaks](/formatting/pages-and-vertical-spacing) symbols. * Show frames: Show/hide the dotted outlines of [Frames](/formatting/using-frames-for-additional-content). * Show page margins: Show/hide [Score size and spacing: Page margins](/formatting/score-size-and-spacing). * Show irregular measures: A plus sign or minus sign at the top right of a measure indicates that its duration differs from that set by the time signature.
### Add The Add menu is used to add different kinds of elements to the score, such as notes, text, measures, etc. ### Format The Format menu is used to adjust global and local formatting of the score. It also allows you to stretch or contract the score, load and save score styles, and much more. ### Tools The Tools menu offers commands to manipulate the score or selected regions of it, including transpose, exchange voices, toggle slash notation, etc. ### Plugins The Plugins menu is used to run plugins. Plugins must be enabled before they will appear in this menu. Use the Manage plugins option to enable MuseScore's built-in plugins and any new plugins you have installed. ### Help The Help menu provides access to this handbook, as well as options to check for updates or [restore factory settings](/support/revert-to-factory-settings). There's also an Ask for help option, which leads to a forum where you can ask questions or report bugs. When posting on the forums, it's important to say which version of MuseScore Studio you are using. This can be found via Help > About MuseScore Studio on Windows and Linux, or via MuseScore Studio > About on macOS. ## Context menus In certain parts of the application, primarily in the [Score tab](#score-tab), context menus are available with additional functionality, such as options to copy, edit, customise, delete, or view the properties of whichever item(s) were selected at the time you opened the menu. To open the context menu for a particular item: * Right-click on the item with the mouse, or * Select the item with the keyboard and press `Shift`+`F10`. * Some PC keyboards also have a dedicated `Menu` or `Copilot` key near to the right `Alt` key (`AltGr`). In Windows 11, you may need to press and release this key quickly to avoid activating Microsoft Copilot. Outside the score, the presence of a context menu is often indicated by a small button with three dots (⋮) or a settings cog (⛭). Press the button to open the menu. If the button is associated with a nearby item (e.g. in the [Palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes)), you can also right-click on that item or use `Shift`+`F10`. ### Staff/Part/Measure properties If you right-click on an empty region within a measure, the resulting context menu contains options for [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties) (used to rename a staff or replace its instrument) and [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties) (used to change measure numbering or create incomplete measures). To access these options via the keyboard: 1. Select a note or rest in the relevant staff or measure. 2. Hold down the `Shift` key and press `Left` or `Right` to create a [range selection](/basics/selecting-elements#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves). 3. Press `Shift`+`F10` (or the dedicated `Menu` key if your keyboard has one) to open the menu. # Navigating your score ## Scrolling ### Mouse wheel * Use the scroll wheel to move the view up and down. * Use `Shift` plus the scroll wheel to move the view left and right. * Use `Ctrl` plus the scroll wheel to zoom in and out. ### Scrollbars Scrollbars appear at the right-hand and bottom edges of the score view. Click and drag them to quickly move the score view up and down, or left and right. Scrollbars are usually hidden from view, but can be revealed by hovering over the edge of the score view with your mouse.
### Keyboard You can also scroll the score using the `PgUp`, `PgDn`, `Home`, and `End` keys on your keyboard. If your keyboard lacks dedicated keys for these functions, most systems will also allow you to access these functions by holding `Fn` or a similar key, then pressing `Up`, `Down`, `Left`, or `Right` respectively. By themselves, `PgUp` and `PgDn` scroll one screenful at a time. This may be less than an actual page of your score. If you hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) while pressing `PgUp` or `PgDn`, it moves a full page at a time. ## Element navigation When a single element is selected in your score, it acts as a cursor. You can change the selection—and thus move the cursor—using common keyboard shortcuts. The `Left` and `Right` keys will move horizontally through your score one chord or rest at a time. If you hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) while pressing `Left` or `Right`, you can navigate a full measure at a time. To move the cursor vertically through the various notes, voices, and staves in your score, use the shortcuts `Alt`+`Up` and `Alt`+`Down` (Mac: `Option`+`Up` and `Option`+`Down`). You can also use the shortcuts `Alt`+`Left` and `Alt`+`Right` (Mac: `Option`+`Left` and `Option`+`Right`) to select elements other than notes or rests. These commands allow you select almost any elements—including articulations, barlines, hairpins, and more—using the keyboard alone. In addition, `Ctrl`+`Home` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Home`) will select the first element in your score, and `Ctrl`+`End` (Mac: `Cmd`+`End`) will select the last element. Again, for keyboards that lack dedicated `Home` and `End` keys, most systems provide the alternative of `Fn`+`Left` and `Fn`+`Right` respectively. See [Default keyboard shortcuts](/basics/default-keyboard-shortcuts) to learn more. ## Navigator The Navigator is a panel that displays thumbnails of score pages. To view or hide the Navigator, click View → Navigator.
The blue bounding box represents the area of the score currently in focus in the score view. Click on the box and drag it to move around your score. ## Timeline A navigation aid that shows instruments and score structure. For details, see [Timeline](/navigation/timeline). ## Views You can switch between different views of the score using the pop-up in the right-hand side of the status bar.
### Page view The score is shown as it will appear when printed or exported as a PDF or image file: that is, page by page, with margins. MuseScore applies system (line) and page breaks automatically, according to the settings made in Page settings and Style. In addition, you can apply your own system (line), page or section breaks. ### Continuous view (horizontal) The score is shown as one unbroken system. Even if the starting point is not in view, measure numbers, instrument names, clefs, time and key signatures will always be displayed on the left of the window. ### Continuous view (vertical) The score is shown as a single page with a header but no margins, and with an infinite page height. System (line) breaks are added automatically, according to the settings made in Page settings and Style. In addition, you can apply your own system (line) or section breaks. ## Zoom There are several ways to zoom the score in or out: ### Zoom in `Ctrl`+`+` (Mac: `Cmd`+`+`)\ or scroll up with the mouse scroll wheel while holding `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`). ### Zoom out `Ctrl`+`-` (Mac: `Cmd`+`-`)\ or scroll down with the mouse scroll wheel while holding `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`). ### Status bar zoom controls To zoom in and out of your score from the Status bar controls: * Click on the magnifying glass icons in the right-hand area of the status bar * Click the number field to the right of these icons, then type a custom zoom level * Choose from one of the preset zoom levels in the pop-up list on the extreme right
### Restoring 100% zoom This restores the zoom to the default (100%) level. `Ctrl`+`0` (Mac: `Cmd`+`0`) ## Find/Go to The Find/Go to panel allows you to speedily navigate to a specific measure, rehearsal mark or page number in the score. To show the panel: * Go to Edit → Find, or * Press `Ctrl`+`F` (Mac: `Cmd`+`F`). To hide the panel: * Click the X (close) button on the left side of the panel, or * Press `Esc` while the panel has focus. #### Navigating to a numbered measure Enter the measure number (counting every measure, starting with 1, irrespective of pickup measures, section breaks or manual changes to measure number offsets). #### Navigating to a numbered page Enter the page number using the format pXX (where XX is the page number). #### Navigating to a numerical rehearsal mark Enter the number using the format rXX (where XX is the number of the rehearsal mark). #### Navigating to an alphabetic rehearsal mark Enter the name of the rehearsal mark (the search is not case sensitive). Pro tip! It is best to avoid naming rehearsal marks with the single letters “R", “r", “P”, “p", or one of these letters with an integer (e.g. “R1” or “p3”), as this can confuse the search algorithm. # Timeline ## Overview Timeline is a navigation aid that displays at the bottom of the program window, giving you an overview of the instruments and main structural elements measure-by-measure. You can easily move about the score by clicking on a measure or a structural element. There are four parts to the timeline: ### Meta labels This is found in the top left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the meta rows. ### Instrument labels This is found in the bottom left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the rows in the main grid. ### Meta rows This is found in the top right corner of the timeline. These hold the meta values of the score. ### Main grid This is found in the bottom right corner of the timeline. This holds multiple 'cells' (a specific measure and staff in the score represented as a square) ## Meta elements Meta elements are those found in the score that are not notes, but are still important to the score—such as key signature, time signature, tempo, rehearsal marks, bar lines, and jumps and markers.
## Basic interactions ### Selecting a measure To select a measure in the timeline, press the mouse button on the cell. A blue box will appear around the selected cell and the respective measure in the score will be selected. The score view will place the selected measure in view. ### Selecting multiple measures #### Drag selection Holding `Shift` and holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse over the main grid will create a selection box. Upon releasing the mouse button, all the cells underneath the selection box will be selected, as well as all the measures in the score. #### Shift selection If a cell is already selected, holding `Shift` and selecting another cell in the timeline will stretch the selection to that new cell, similar to how the score does #### Ctrl selection If no cells are currently selected, holding `Ctrl` and selecting a cell will select the entire measure ### Clearing a selection To clear selection, holding `Ctrl` and clicking anywhere on the grid or the meta rows will clear any current selection. ### Meta values selection Selecting the meta values on the timeline will attempt to select the respective meta values in the score. ## Scrolling ### Standard scrolling Scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and instrument labels down or up respectively. The meta labels and rows do not move. ### Shift scrolling Holding `Shift` and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively. The meta labels and instrument labels do not move. ### Alt scrolling Holding `Alt` and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively, faster than `Shift` scrolling. The meta labels and instrument labels do not move. ### Dragging To drag the contents of the timeline, hold the left mouse button and move it around. ## Labels interaction ### Rearranging meta labels All meta labels besides the measures meta may be rearranged in any way. By moving the mouse cursor onto one of the meta labels, small up and down arrows will appear. Click the left mouse button on the up arrow to swap the meta label with the one above it. Click the left mouse button on the down arrow to swap the meta label with the one below it. ### Collapsing the meta labels In order to hide all the meta labels while keeping all the meta information on the timeline, click the left mouse button on the measures meta to collapse all the currently visible meta rows into one row, where the meta values are staggered in that row. Click the left mouse button again on the measures meta to expand the meta rows.
### Hiding instruments All instruments--hidden or not--will be displayed on the timeline. To start this interaction, the mouse cursor is moved over an instrument label. A small eye will appear on the right side of the label that is open if the instrument is visible on the score, and closed if the instrument is hidden. Click the left mouse button on the eye to toggle between the two options.
## Zooming To zoom in or out of the score, hold `Ctrl` and scroll the mouse wheel up or down respectively (Mac: `Cmd` + scroll). # Braille ## Overview MuseScore Studio's braille panel displays the current measure in [braille music notation](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Braille_music). It can also be used to enter notes and some musical symbols using Perkins-style 6-key braille input. The content of the braille panel is similar to what you get if you [export braille](/file-management/file-export#braille) via the File menu, but the braille panel updates live as you navigate through the score. {% embed url="" fullWidth="false" %} ### Terminology: braille vs. print On this page, we refer to braille music notation as "braille", and ordinary stave notation as "print". Print music is simply the traditional music notation that sighted musicians use on paper and electronic devices (i.e. sheet music). Braille can also be used on paper, but it's not printed with ink. Instead, it's embossed as raised dots that blind musicians read by touch. It's common in accessibility circles to use the word "print" to mean non-braille notation. ### Output to a physical braille display The contents of the braille panel can be displayed on a braille terminal connected to your computer (e.g. via Bluetooth or USB). The following limitations apply when using a physical braille display: * NVDA must be used as the screen reader. * MuseScore’s braille panel must have keyboard focus. * When the score has focus, the braille terminal will just show ordinary status text from the screen reader. * Braille navigation and 6-key input must be performed with the computer keyboard. * Physical buttons on the braille terminal are not used, except to scroll within a measure that is too long to fit on your display. Please let us know in the [Documentation forum](https://musescore.org/forum/8) if you discover a way to bypass any of these limitations. ## Viewing braille ### To open or close the braille panel 1. Go to Preferences > Braille. 2. Check (or uncheck) the Show braille panel box. The braille panel appears directly below the score in MuseScore’s main window. ### To focus the braille panel With the braille panel open, press the `Tab` key while the score has focus. A caret (text cursor) will appear in the braille at the position of whatever element was selected in the score. For example, if a note was selected in the score, the text caret will appear on that note in the braille. Press `Shift`+`Tab` at any time to leave the braille panel and return to the score. The braille panel will remain open so you can navigate to it again with `Tab`. ### Navigating the braille While the braille panel has focus, you can move the text caret around using the arrow keys. As the caret moves through the braille, the element to the right of the caret becomes selected in the score. If that element is a note, MuseScore will play the sound of the note. The braille panel only shows one measure at a time, but it shows that measure for all instruments in the score. Each line of braille corresponds to a staff in the print notation, so grand staff instruments like the piano get two lines of braille, and the organ gets three lines. If a staff has lyrics, these are written on another line of braille immediately below the line corresponding to that staff. If there are multiple lines of lyrics (e.g. for multiple verses), each line of lyrics is written on a separate line in the braille. ### Shortcuts for navigation The following keyboard shortcuts are available for navigating the braille. | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | -------------------------------- | -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | Go to next braille cell | `Right` | `Right` | | Go to previous braille cell | `Left` | `Left` | | Go to braille line above | `Up` | `Up` | | Go to braille line below | `Down` | `Down` | | Go to next measure | `Ctrl`+`Right` | `Cmd`+`Right` | | Go to previous measure | `Ctrl`+`Left` | `Cmd`+`Left` | | Go to beginning of score | `Ctrl`+`Home` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`Left` | | Go to end of score | `Ctrl`+`End` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`Right` | | Toggle braille input mode on/off | `N` | `N` | ## Writing braille Notes and certain musical symbols can be entered in the braille panel using a 6-key method of braille input similar to that of the [Perkins Brailler](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Perkins_Brailler). ### Turn braille input mode on or off While the braille panel has focus, press `N` to toggle braille input mode on or off. ### Constructing a braille cell While in braille input mode, six letter keys on the computer keyboard are used to represent the six braille dots that make up a single braille cell (⠿). The keys used are `F`, `D`, `S` for dots 1, 2, 3 down the first column of the cell, and `J`, `K`, `L` for dots 4, 5, 6 down the second column. The `Space` key is used to represent an empty braille cell (⠀), sometimes referred to as dot 0. Up to six of these keys can be pressed in combination to construct any pattern of raised dots. For example, to enter a quarter note C, which in braille is ⠹ (i.e. dots 1, 4, 5, 6), press and hold `F`+`J`+`K`+`L`, then release these keys to confirm the pattern. The keys can be pressed and released in any order, providing at least one key is held at all times, until you have completed the pattern. When the final key is released, MuseScore reads your braille pattern. If your pattern corresponds to a recognized note or musical symbol then this element is entered directly in the score, not in the braille panel, because print notation is the "ground truth" for MuseScore. Once the element is in the score, the braille panel automatically updates to reflect this change. Sometimes in music braille, the same information can be expressed in multiple ways. For the sake of consistency, MuseScore always picks the same way regardless of how you entered the notation. Therefore, the braille that appears in the braille panel may not exactly match the pattern(s) you entered with the six keys, though it will have the same meaning. ### Entering notes #### Basic notes In braille, eighth notes (quavers) and 128th notes are written as: | Note | Braille | Dots | Keys | | ---- | ------- | ---------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | C | ⠙ | 1, 4, 5 | `F`+`J`+`K` | | D | ⠑ | 1, 5 | `F`+`K` | | E | ⠋ | 1, 2, 4 | `F`+`D`+`J` | | F | ⠛ | 1, 2, 4, 5 | `F`+`D`+`J`+`K` | | G | ⠓ | 1, 2, 5 | `F`+`D`+`K` | | A | ⠊ | 2, 4 | `D`+`J` | | B | ⠚ | 2, 4, 5 | `D`+`J`+`K` | Additional dots are added to the above sequences to create other durations: | Duration | Braille | Dots added | Keys added | | --------------------------------- | ------- | ---------- | ------------------------- | | Quarter (crotchet) and 64th notes | ⠠ | 6 | `L` | | Half (minim) and 32nd notes | ⠄ | 3 | `S` | | Whole (semibreve) and 16th notes | ⠤ | 3, 6 | `S`+`L` | Hence a quarter note C is ⠹ (dots 1, 4, 5, 6) and is entered with `F`+`J`+`K`+`L`. This pattern is also used for a 64th note C. #### 16th notes and smaller As mentioned above, 16th notes and smaller use the same dot patterns as larger durations. When reading braille, you can work out whether the shorter or longer duration is being specified by looking at the time signature as well as other notes in the measure. However, when writing braille, you need to tell MuseScore which durations you want to use. | ⠤ | ⠄ | ⠠ | ⠀ | Dots to select | Keys to select | | | ------- | ----- | ---- | ------- | -------------- | -------------- | ----------------------------- | | Group 1 | whole | half | quarter | eighth | 0, 1 | `Space`+`F` | | Group 2 | 16th | 32nd | 64th | 128th | 0, 2 | `Space`+`D` | By default, MuseScore enters group 1 durations (whole, half, quarter, eighth). To switch to group 2, enter dots 0, 2 (i.e. press `Space`+`D`). Nothing will appear in the braille panel, but any notes or rests you write from now on will be in group 2 (16th, 32nd, 64th, 128th). To switch back to group 1 durations, enter dots 0, 1 (i.e. press `Space`+`F`). It's not currently possible to enter durations of 256th and smaller, or breve (double whole) and larger, via the braille panel. #### Dotted notes Braille uses ⠄(dot 3) to represent an augmentation dot, which is added in a new braille cell immediately following a note. No other cells are allowed to come between the note and its augmentation dot. To create a dotted note in the braille panel, first write the main note duration using the rules above, then follow it with dot 3 (i.e. press `S`). For example, a dotted quarter note C is ⠹⠄, which can be stated as dot pattern 1456-3, where the dash means to start a new cell. In terms of keys, this is `F`+`J`+`K`+`L`, `S`. It's not currently possible to enter multiple dot 3s to create double and triple dotted notes via the braille panel. #### Octave marks Octave marks in braille serve a similar purpose to clefs in print music. If you see a note in print, you don't know what pitch it is until you look at the preceding clef. In braille, if you see ⠙ (dots 1, 4, 5) then you know the note is a C, but it could be a C in any octave. To determine the octave, you need to look at the preceeding octave mark (and also at any notes between that octave mark and the current note). A standard 88-key piano has 7 complete octaves. Starting on the lowest C, which is called C1 in braille as well as in scientific pitch notation, the first complete octave of white notes is C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, A1 and B1. After B1 comes C2, which is the start of the second complete octave. This scheme continues up to the final complete octave, which starts with C7 and ends with B7. In this system, C4 is middle C, and A4 is "concert A" (i.e. the note that the orchestra tunes to at the start of a performance). Enharmonic spelling is important, so B♯3 sounds the same as C4 despite being notated in a different octave, and C♭4 sounds the same as B3. Even standard 88-key pianos have a few notes outside the range C1 to B7. Braille refers to the C0 octave as the "sub" octave, and the C8 octave as the "super" octave. These simply double the markings used for the first and seventh octaves. | Octave | Marks | Dots | Keys | | ---------- | ----- | ---- | -------------------------------------- | | 0 (sub) | ⠈⠈ | 4-4 | `J`, `J` | | 1 | ⠈ | 4 | `J` | | 2 | ⠘ | 45 | `J`+`K` | | 3 | ⠸ | 456 | `J`+`K`+`L` | | 4 (middle) | ⠐ | 5 | `K` | | 5 | ⠨ | 46 | `J`+`L` | | 6 | ⠰ | 56 | `K`+`L` | | 7 | ⠠ | 6 | `L` | | 8 (super) | ⠠⠠ | 6-6 | `L`, `L` | When specified, octave mark are placed immediately prior to a note. So a middle C quarter note is ⠐⠹, or dots 5-1456, which is entered as `K`, `F`+`J`+`K`+`L`. No other cells are allowed to go between the octave mark and the note it belongs to. Octave marks don't have to be given before every note. Octave marks are only required for the: * First note on each line of braille. * First note after a double bar line, number sign, word indicator, and certain other markings. * Second of two notes separated by a melodic interval of a sixth or more, regardless of their octaves. * Second of two notes separated by a melodic interval of a fourth or more, only if their octave numbers are different. # Setting up your score ## Overview To create a new score, use one of the following options: * In the [Home→Scores](/navigation/the-user-interface#home-tab) tab, select New score, or click New (bottom right) * From the menu, select File→New * Use the keyboard shortcut, `Ctrl`+`N` (Mac: `Cmd`+`N`)
This will open the New Score dialog (more instructions about this dialog are below). Once you've finished setting up your score, it will be visible in the Score tab. ## Instruments When creating a new score, you can either choose instruments yourself or use a template that comes pre-configured with appropriate instruments (these can always be changed later). ### Choose instruments In the New Score dialog, make sure the Choose instruments tab is selected.
MuseScore contains over 500 instruments. Instruments are grouped into categories, and categories are organized into families. If you know what you’re looking for, you can type an instrument's name into the search bar. Alternatively, you can browse instruments by group from the Family dropdown menu. #### Adding instruments To add an instrument to your score: * Double-click on an instrument name, or * Click on the instrument name to select it, then click the → button
Instruments are automatically arranged according to the order shown in the dropdown menu under Your Score. From this menu, you can choose from a range of standard score configurations. #### Changing order of instruments To manually change the order of instruments: 1. Select an instrument in the Your Score panel 2. Click on ↑ or ↓ to change its position
#### Removing instruments To delete an instrument from your score: 1. Select an instrument in the Your Score panel 2. Click the trash can button
You can also delete multiple instruments at once by first holding down `Shift` and selecting multiple instruments, then clicking the trash can button. ### Create from template Scores can also be created from pre-configured templates. Templates are organized into categories based on musical style or ensemble configuration. Each template contains the instruments most commonly required for a particular type of score. Instruments are ordered and styled according to conventional practice. To create a score from a template: 1. Click Create from template 2. Select a group of templates from the Category panel 3. Choose your desired template from the center panel 4. Click Done
You can also search across all available templates in the search bar. Visit [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles) to learn more templates, including how to create your own for future use. ## Additional score information Click Next in the New score dialog to specify additional information about your score.
### Key signature By default, new scores are created with a key signature containing no sharps or flats (C major). Specify a different key signature by clicking the button under Key signature. Major keys are shown first; minor keys can be displayed by selecting the Minor tab. ### Time signature New scores are created in 4/4 by default. Change this by clicking the button under Time signature. Change the number of beats per bar using the arrows in the spin box, and change the beat quality from the dropdown menu. You can also select common and cut-common (alla-breve) time signatures in this popup. ### Tempo By default, new scores will play at a tempo of quarter note (crotchet) = 120 beats per minute (bpm). Metronome markings are not automatically included in new scores. To customize the starting playback tempo, and to show a metronome marking above the uppermost stave: 1. Click the button under Tempo 2. Tick Show tempo marking on my score 3. Select the desired beat value 4. Enter the desired number of beats per minute in the text field (or use the up and down arrows to scroll through the tempo range) Learn more about tempo text indications, metronome markings, and playback speed in [tempo markings](/text/tempo-markings). ### Measures New scores are created with 32 measures and no pickup (anacrusis). To change the starting number of measures in your new score: 1. Click the button under Measures 2. Enter the desired number of measures in the Initial number of measures field Learn more about [Adding and removing measures](/basics/adding-and-removing-measures) at any time after score creation. To start your score with a pickup: 1. Click the button under Measures 2. Tick Create pickup measure 3. Enter the desired number of beats for the pickup in the text field 4. Select the metrical value of the pickup measure from the drop-down menu You can always create a pickup later. Learn how to do this in [Pickup and non-metered measures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/pickup-and-non-metered-measures). ### Title and other text Enter text in the fields at the bottom of the New score dialog, and MuseScore will automatically place it in an appropriate format in your new score. You can enter text labels for the score's: * Title * Composer * Subtitle * Lyricist * Copyright This information gets saved to the score's [project properties](/file-management/project-properties), which you can change at any time. Once you've finished specifying additional score information, click Done to confirm your selections and create your score. ## Changing instruments after score creation There are three ways to change existing score instruments: * Use the keyboard shortcut `I` while in the Score tab * Click Add from the [Layout panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#instruments-panel) (if this panel is not yet visible, press `F7`, or select View → Layout) * Click Replace instrument in the [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#overview) dialog # Entering notes and rests {% hint style="info" %} This page explains music creation on standard staves. See also the [tablature](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation) and [percussion](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/inputting-percussion-notation) pages. {% endhint %} MuseScore Studio supports inputting music via the computer keyboard, mouse, a MIDI keyboard, and the in-app virtual piano keyboard. The simplest way to start entering notes or rests is to first choose a duration in the toolbar, then either: * Click on the staff to enter a note * Type a pitch letter (`A`–`G`) to enter a note * Type `0` to enter a rest {% embed url="" fullWidth="false" %} ## Note input modes This page explains the default note input mode, Input by note name. In this mode, you choose a duration first, then select a pitch to place notes in the score. In [Input by duration mode](/basics/input-by-duration-mode), the steps are reversed: first, you choose a pitch, then select a duration to place notes in the score. For more entry modes, see [Alternative note input methods](/basics/alternative-note-input-methods). ## Entering notes ### Selecting a start point To add a note or rest to the score, start by selecting a location to begin entry. You can use the mouse or the [keyboard navigation commands](/navigation/navigating-your-score#element-navigation).
### Entering note input mode Next, enter note input mode by pressing `N` or clicking the pencil icon in the toolbar. The note input cursor appears, indicating where the next note will be added in the score.
If you don't select a starting location first, MuseScore places the cursor at the last input position, or in some other logical place, so be sure the cursor is where you intend. Enter notes left to right by first selecting a duration and then entering a pitch or rest. When you are done entering notes in this location and are ready to do something else—for example, entering notes at a different location, adding other markings, or performing other operations like copy and paste—you can exit note input mode by clicking the Input by note name button, pressing `N` again, or pressing `Esc`. {% hint style="info" %} MuseScore Studio has virtually unlimited undo history, so you don't have to worry about making mistakes. Just click the Undo button on the far right of the toolbar, or use the standard keyboard shortcut `Ctrl`+`Z` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Z`). {% endhint %} ### Selecting duration While in note input mode, select a note value for the next note to be entered by: * Clicking a corresponding note icon in the [Note input toolbar](/navigation/the-user-interface#score-tab) (directly above the score window), or * Entering the keyboard shortcut `1`–`9` corresponding to the desired duration
The keyboard shortcuts are designed to be efficient and easy to remember. The most common note values—eighth, quarter, and half—are assigned to the keys `4`, `5`, and `6` respectively (the middle row of a numeric keypad). Shorter note values are represented by smaller numbers, and longer values by larger numbers. The full list is as follows: Other durations, including double dots and 128th notes, can be selected by [customizing your toolbar](/customization/toolbars-and-windows#customizing-contents-of-toolbars) or [defining your own keyboard shortcuts](/customization/keyboard-shortcuts#defining-a-shortcut). ### Selecting pitch Once you've selected a duration, enter pitches using the computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, or virtual piano keyboard. Use `↑` or `↓` after entering a note to move it up or down by a half step. #### Selecting pitch using the computer keyboard This is generally the most efficient way to enter notes in MuseScore. Simply press the letter (`A`–`G`) on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the pitch you want to enter.
Notes entered this way will replace any rests or notes that were already present at the cursor location. To add a note to an existing note or chord, hold `Shift` while pressing the letter of the new note. See the section on [chords](#entering-chords) below for more information. {% hint style="info" %} When entering notes by letter name, MuseScore will choose the octave that is closest to the previous note on that staff. This works well for passages that move mostly by steps and small leaps. If you need to change the octave for a larger leap, use `Ctrl`+`↑` and `Ctrl`+`↓` (Mac: `Cmd`+`↑` and `Cmd`+`↓`) to raise or lower the pitch of the previously-entered note by an octave. {% endhint %} #### Selecting pitch using the mouse To enter a note using the mouse, position your mouse on the desired line or space in the staff, then click. The mouse cursor will show you a preview of the note you are about to enter to help you place it accurately.
If any notes already exist at the point where you are entering a new note, clicking will add notes to the chord. To replace existing notes instead, hold `Shift` while entering the new note. It can be difficult to enter notes very far above or below a staff with this method, because MuseScore may interpret clicks far from the intended staff as an attempt to add notes to the staff above or below. Instead, try entering the note an octave lower or higher, then raise or lower the pitch by an octave using `Ctrl`+`↑` and `Ctrl`+`↓` (Mac: `Cmd`+`↑` and `Cmd`+`↓`). Note: Although one would normally enter notes left to right, the mouse entry method allows you to enter a note at any location where there is an existing note or rest to replace. #### Selecting pitch using a MIDI keyboard If you have a [MIDI keyboard connected](/customization/preferences#audio-and-midi), enter notes while in note input mode by simply pressing the corresponding keys. When playing notes on a MIDI keyboard, they are entered consecutively so long as you release each key fully before pressing the next. Create chords by pressing multiple MIDI keys at the same time. Notes entered via MIDI keyboard that are outside of the current key signature will have accidentals applied automatically, but the spelling of the accidental may not be what you intend. To influence the enharmonic spelling of a note or chord: 1. Select the desired accidental in the note input toolbar. 2. Play the note or chord on the MIDI keyboard.

To change the enharmonic spelling of a selected note, press `J`. See [Respell pitches](/notation/pitch/respell-pitches) for more options. {% hint style="info" %} You can [select duration using a MIDI keyboard](/customization/preferences#midi-device-mapping) if you set up the keys you wish to use for this in advance in Preferences → MIDI mappings. {% endhint %} #### Selecting pitch using the virtual piano keyboard You can also input notes using the on-screen Piano keyboard panel. To display this, use View → Piano keyboard or press the shortcut `P`. The panel can be closed the same way.
To enter a note, simply click the appropriate piano key with your mouse. As with the computer keyboard, notes entered in this way replace any existing notes or rests. To create chords instead, press and hold `Shift` while entering notes. {% hint style="info" %} To resize the keyboard, position the mouse within the panel and hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) while scrolling up or down. {% endhint %} ## Entering chords For the purpose of this section, chords are any combination of multiple notes all starting at the same time, all sharing the same duration, and all sharing a single stem.
If you wish to enter notes that sound together but start at different times, have different durations, or have separate stems, see [Voices](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices). For chords represented as text, like Dm7, see [Chord symbols](/text/chord-symbols). Just as for individual notes, chords can be entered by computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, or virtual piano keyboard. Except for MIDI keyboard (where you can enter multiple notes at once), notes are entered one at a time, but in a way that tells MuseScore to combine them into a chord rather than add them sequentially. #### Adding by pitch name To add a note to a chord by pitch name: * Computer keyboard: Hold `Shift` while entering the note using `A`–`G` * The next note will be added above any notes already present at the cursor location, so when building a chord it's easiest to start by entering the lowest note first. * Mouse: Click the location where you wish to add the note * MIDI keyboard: Either play all the notes at the same time, or play them one at a time but do not release one key before pressing the next * Virtual piano keyboard: Hold `Shift` while clicking a key in the piano panel #### Adding by interval You can also specify the note to be added based on the [interval](/appendix/glossary#interval) above or below the currently-selected note. * To add an interval above the selected note, use one of the following: * Press `Alt`+`1`-`9` (Mac: `Opt` + `1`-`9`), or * In the Note input toolbar, select Add → Intervals and choose an interval from the list * For intervals below the selected note, you can apply a custom shortcut of your own in [Preferences](/customization/preferences#shortcuts) → Shortcuts (search "interval" to see the relevant actions) ## Entering rests Rests can be entered using the computer keyboard or mouse. First, select a duration (e.g., using the toolbar or by pressing `1`–`9`), then instead of entering a pitch as you would for a note, do one of the following options: * From the computer keyboard: Press `0` * From the note input toolbar: Click the rest icon, then click in the score * Using a mouse: Right-click in the score
## Applying accidentals
Standard accidentals (flat, natural, sharp, double flat, double sharp) can be entered either by selecting one in the toolbar before entering the pitch it applies to or by adding them to a note already entered. ### Selecting an accidental before entering a pitch To specify an accidental to be applied to the next note entered, you can use the buttons on the Note input toolbar above the score or the corresponding keyboard shortcuts. This can be done either before or after selecting the duration.
The default accidental shortcuts are: * Flat: `-` * Sharp: `+` * Natural: `=` By default, accidentals are applied to the next note entered. So for example, if you want to enter a B♭, first press `-` then press `B`. You can change this behavior in Preferences → Note input → Apply accidentals, augmentation dots, and articulations. The usual rules of music notation apply, so if you apply a flat to a note, any subsequent notes you enter of that same pitch within the same measure will be flatted as well, even though no explicit flat sign will be added in front of them. ### Adding an accidental after entering a pitch Appropriate accidentals are automatically added to a note when you increase or decrease its pitch: * Move pitch up a semitone (spells with sharps): `↑` * Move pitch down a semitone (spells with flats): `↓` You can also apply an accidental to a note by clicking the appropriate icon in the Accidentals [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). This palette also contains a large number of microtonal and other special accidentals. ### Adding courtesy/cautionary accidentals Although the rules of music notation say that a barline cancels an accidental, and that any note on the same staff line or space in the next measure returns to the pitch indicated by the key signature, it is considered good practice to add a courtesy (also called cautionary) accidental anyway. These do not change the pitch of the note, so they cannot be added with the `↑` and `↓` keys. However, any of the other methods described above work. While parentheses or brackets are not required for courtesy accidentals, some editors choose to use them. To add parentheses or brackets around an accidental, you will need to temporarily leave note input mode, select the accidental, then either use the Properties panel to select a bracket type, or click the parentheses or brackets in the More section of the Accidentals palette. {% hint style="info" %} You can also use the Courtesy Accidentals [plugin](/customization/plugins#pre-installed-plugins) that comes pre-installed with MuseScore Studio to automatically add courtesy accidentals where appropriate. {% endhint %} ## Entering ties A tie is a curved line between two notes of the same pitch which indicates that they are to be played as one combined duration. Though they look similar, ties are not to be confused with [slurs](/notation/expressive-markings/slurs-and-ties), which join any number of notes of any pitches and indicate legato articulation. Because ties are always between notes of the same pitch, you do not need to enter the pitch for the second note. After entering the first note: 1. Select the duration for the second note, (either by clicking the duration on the top toolbar or using the keyboard shortcuts `1`-`9`) 2. Click the tie button on the toolbar or type `T`.
The tie command creates the tie and adds the second note at the same time. If the first note you entered is part of a chord, the tie command creates an entire second chord with the same pitches as the first and ties all of the notes together.
{% hint style="info" %} Ties normally connect adjacent notes in the same [voice](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices), but MuseScore also supports ties between non-adjacent notes and between notes in different voices as described in [the section on editing](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests#adding-ties-in-normal-mode). Ties can also be entered [across repeats and jumps](/notation/repeats/items-across-repeats-and-jumps#ties). {% endhint %} *** ## See also * [Editing notes and rests](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests) * [Voices](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices) * [Tuplets](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/tuplets) * [Alternate note input modes](/basics/alternative-note-input-methods) * [Tablature](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation) * [Drum notation](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/inputting-percussion-notation) * [Slash notation](/alternative-notation/slash-notation) * [Noteheads](/notation/pitch/noteheads) # Working with multiple voices ## Overview In notation, a voice is a single line of music on a staff. It is possible to notate more than one voice, with independent rhythms, on a single staff. Two voices on the same staff are normally indicated using opposing stems – an upper voice with stems up and a lower voice with stems down:
In a four-part SATB arrangement on two staves, you would use voices 1 and 2 on the top staff for soprano and alto, and voices 1 and 2 on the bottom staff for tenor and bass:
The default voice when starting note entry is voice 1. When you need a second voice, normally this will be voice 2. Voices 3 and 4 are less frequently used, but are sometimes necessary in complex polyphonic music or for the inner parts in dense keyboard textures. ## Entering music in multiple voices The principles of entering notes and rests are the same regardless of which voice you are in (see [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests)). Each voice has its own color in the UI. The note entry cursor changes color to reflect the current voice, and notes and rests (and many other items) will be highlighted in the color of their respective voice when you select them. This is useful when inputting and editing as it gives you an immediate visual indicator of the voice the music belongs to. {% hint style="info" %} You can change each voice's color in Preferences -> Advanced. {% endhint %} While you are in note entry mode, you can switch to a different voice by clicking one of the voice selection buttons in the top toolbar:
You can also use the keyboard shortcuts `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`1`–`4`. {% hint style="info" %} By default, only the buttons for voices 1 and 2 are shown in the toolbar. To use the others, first reveal them by clicking the cog button in the toolbar and then clicking the eye button next to Voice 3 and Voice 4 in the menu. {% endhint %} If you select a note or rest before entering note entry mode, you will enter note entry mode in the same voice as that note or rest. ## Editing music in multiple voices ### Moving notes between voices To move notes or rests to another voice: 1. Select the notes you’d like to move (individually, or as a list or range). 2. Click the button for the voice in which you’d like them to be moved. You can also use the shortcuts `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`1`–`4` (Win) or `Cmd`+`Alt`+`1`–`4` (Mac). {% hint style="info" %} You can move any number of notes, even from multiple voices at once, into a voice. If there are notes at the same position with the same rhythm they will combine into chords. If there are differing rhythms, some notes may be left in their original voice as MuseScore Studio will not be able to know what you intend. {% endhint %} ### Exchanging voices You can swap the music of any pair of voices by selecting one of the options from Tools -> Voices (e.g. Exchange voice 1-2). This only works with range selections, and on whole measures (or ranges of measures). If only part of a measure is included in the range, the whole measure will be swapped. ### Adjusting rests It is often necessary to remove redundant rests in secondary voices. This can be done in two ways: * Hiding the rest, by selecting it and unchecking Visible in Properties (or using the shortcut `V`). * Deleting the rest, by selecting it and pressing `Del`. {% hint style="info" %} Voice 1 is the 'reference' voice and must remain rhythmically complete. As such, rests in voice 1 can be hidden, but not deleted. {% endhint %} In a single voice, rests appear in the middle of the staff, but in multiple voices, rests for voice 1 are moved up at least one space and rests for voice 2 are moved down at least one space. This offset helps to show which voice they belong to. In practice, they are usually displaced further out to avoid colliding with notation in the other voice. Where there are rests of the same duration in more than one voice simultaneously, MuseScore Studio can merge them together automatically:
Rests unmerged (left) and merged (right)
The behavior of rests in multiple voices can be controlled using these options in Format -> Style -> Rests:
* Default vertical offset: Choose between 1 space and 2 spaces for the initial displacement of rests when in multiple voices. * Merge matching rests: Merge rests of the same duration that occur simultaneously in more than one voice (see image above). These options affect all staves in the scores. If you want to turn rest merging on or off for specific staves, you can do this via [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties): 1. Right-click the staff and choose Staff/Part properties from the menu. 2. Change Merge matching rests to On or Off. The default, Auto, will follow the score-wide setting. {% hint style="info" %} 'Merged' rests are actually overlaid on top of each other, but they are all still there. If you want to see more than one rest in a specific place you can achieve this by moving them manually. {% endhint %} Rests can also be moved manually like other items. Just select a rest and press `Up` or `Down`, or change Properties -> Appearance -> Offset. ### Stem direction When music is in a single voice, the direction of stems varies according to the vertical positions of the notes (see [Stems and flags](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/stems-and-flags#default-stem-direction)). When there is more than one voice, all music in voices 1 and 3 will have stems up, and all music in voices 2 and 4 will have stems down. You can still change the stem direction of any notes by selecting them and pressing `X` (or pressing the Flip direction button in the note input toolbar). When there are simultaneous notes on one staff in different voices but which have the same stem direction, MuseScore will combine them together so that it looks like they form a single chord, with a shared stem:
This is achieved by offsetting certain notes and overlaying the stems, but it is still actually two chords. If you want a different arrangement, it can be difficult to undo this. Therefore you can turn this behavior off by unchecking Format -> Style -> Combine voices that share the same stem direction. This will, instead, simply overlay the two chords directly over each other:
This is not very beautiful, but it is a much simpler starting point from which you can manually offset the voices the way you need them, like this:
You can also control this for specific chords in the score via Properties (under Note -> Head -> Show more):
## Playback Note that it is not currently possible to assign different sounds or VSTs to different voices within the same instrument. If you need to do this, they must be separate instruments. # Input by duration mode {% hint style="info" %} This page explains music creation on standard staves. See also the [tablature](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation) and [percussion](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/inputting-percussion-notation) pages. {% endhint %} ## Quickstart To enter notes using Input by duration mode: 1. Type `M` to enter Input by duration mode 2. Type `A`, `B`, `C`, `D`, `E`, `F`, or `G` to select a pitch 3. Press a duration in the toolbar or type a duration shortcut (`1`–`9`) to enter a note ## Entering notes {% hint style="info" %} MuseScore Studio's default note entry method is [Input by note name](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#note-input-modes). If you'd prefer to choose the pitch first and then enter notes into your score by pressing the duration shortcuts or buttons in the toolbar, Input by duration mode is for you. {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} ### Selecting a start point To add a note or rest to the score, start by selecting a location to begin entry. You can use the mouse or the [keyboard navigation commands](/navigation/navigating-your-score#element-navigation). ### Entering Input by duration mode Press `M` to enter Input by duration mode or select the button in the toolbar.
### Selecting pitch A preview of the next pitch to be entered is shown on the score in the color of the currently selected [voice](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices). On most instruments, this pitch cursor will fall on the middle staff line. Enter pitches using the computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard, or virtual piano keyboard. #### Selecting pitch using the computer keyboard * Type `A`, `B`, `C`, `D`, `E`, `F`, or `G` to select a pitch by name. * Use `↑` or `↓` to move the pitch cursor up or down by one staff line or space. * Use `Ctrl` + `↑` or `Ctrl` + `↓` to move the pitch cursor up or down by one octave. #### Selecting pitch using the mouse Hovering over a staff and clicking enters a note at the cursor position. See the main [entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-pitch-using-the-mouse) page for more details. ### Selecting duration After selecting pitch using one of the methods above, press a duration in the toolbar or use a shortcut (`1`–`9`) to enter a note. See the list of duration shortcuts below: ## Entering chords For the purpose of this section, chords are any combination of multiple notes all starting at the same time, all sharing the same duration, and all sharing a single stem. #### To create chords as you enter notes * Computer keyboard: Hold `Shift` while entering the note using `A`–`G` * The next note will be added above the last note added, so when building a chord it's easiest to start by entering the lowest note first. * Mouse: Click the location where you wish to add the note * MIDI keyboard: Either play all the notes at the same time, or play them one at a time but do not release one key before pressing the next, then select a duration * Virtual piano keyboard: Hold `Shift` while clicking a key in the piano panel You can also add notes to chords by [interval](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#adding-by-interval). #### To create chords over a previously-entered line of notes Notes entered in Input by duration mode that match the duration at the cursor position will form a chord with the existing note rather than overwriting them. There's no need to hold `Shift`. So, use `←` or `→` to move the entry cursor to any location where a note already exists, select a pitch, then enter the corresponding duration to create or add to a chord. ## Preferences In Preferences → Note input, you can further customize Input by duration mode. * Default input mode: Choose whether Input by note name mode or Input by duration mode is entered when entering a note or double-clicking on a staff. * Input by duration mode cursor: Choose whether to show the above staff ruler or the classic note entry cursor when in Input by duration mode. # Alternative note input methods ## Accessing alternative note input methods In addition to the default [step-time](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) note entry method, there are several other methods by which notation can be entered in MuseScore. To enter these alternative note input methods: 1. Click and hold the Note input button in the Note input toolbar. 2. Select from one of the available note input methods. Keyboard users can get to the Note input button by pressing `Shift`+`Tab` or `Shift`+`F6` a few times from the score. Screen readers will say something like "Note input toolbar: Default (step-time)". Press `Space` on this button to open a menu that contains all the available note input methods.
Each note input mode can also be activated directly using an assigned keyboard shortcut (See [Keyboard shortcuts](/customization/keyboard-shortcuts) to learn how to assign these). Note that the selected note input method remains in effect even when you leave note input mode and will be enabled the next time you enter note input mode. So if you change to the Re-pitch method for a single passage, be sure to change back to the Step time method when you are done. ## Rhythm only The Rhythm note input method allows you to enter durations with a single keypress. This is especially useful for unpitched percussion instruments that use a single sound. In addition, you can combine Rhythm and [Re-pitch](#re-pitch) methods for an efficient workflow in certain circumstances. 1. Select your starting point in the score. 2. Select the Rhythm note input method as described above. 3. Select a duration from the note input toolbar, or use the keyboard shortcuts `1`-`9`, to add a note of the selected duration. 4. Add a dotted duration by pressing `.` and selecting/typing your desired duration. In this mode, the duration dot is toggled on/off for all subsequently entered durations. It's worth noting that the duration dot needs to be activated prior to entering the note value, rather than afterwards. 5. Enter rests by clicking the rest icon in the note input toolbar and select/type your desired duration. When the desired duration already has been selected (from the previous entered note), pressing `0` will enter the rest. Click the rest button to return to entering notes. 6. Continue pressing duration keys to enter notes with the chosen durations. By default, notes are entered onto the middle staff line. You can use the cursor keys to change the pitch of the note just entered, and subsequent notes will also be entered using that pitch. You can also use [Re-pitch mode](#re-pitch) to quickly enter pitches for a passage after entering the rhythm. ## Re-pitch The Re-pitch note input method allows you to change the pitches of a sequence of notes while leaving their durations unaltered. 1. Select your starting point in the score. 2. Select the Re-pitch note input method as described above, or use the keyboard shortcut `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`I` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`+`I`). 3. Enter pitches using the computer keyboard, MIDI keyboard or [virtual piano keyboard](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-pitch-using-the-virtual-piano-keyboard). Note: you cannot [use the mouse to input notes](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-pitch-using-the-mouse) in the Re-pitch method. The Re-pitch method can be an extremely efficient way of entering notes in music with repeated rhythmic patterns. Simply copy and paste an existing passage that uses the same rhythm as your new passage, then use re-pitch mode to alter the pitches. The same technique can be used to enter multiple instrumental or vocal parts that share the same rhythm but different pitches. ## Real-time The real-time note input methods basically allow you to perform the piece on a MIDI keyboard (or MuseScore's [virtual piano keyboard](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-pitch-using-the-virtual-piano-keyboard)) and have the notation added for you. However, you should be aware of the following limitations which currently apply: * You must pre-select the shortest duration you wish to use. * You cannot enter tuplets in Real-time note input. * You must enter notes onto a single staff and in a single voice, just as with other note input modes. * It is not possible to use a computer keyboard for Real-time note input. These restrictions mean that MuseScore has very little guessing to do when working out how your input should be notated, which helps to keep these methods accurate. ### Real-time (metronome) With the Real-time (metronome) note input method, you play at a fixed tempo indicated by a metronome click. You can adjust the tempo by changing the delay between clicks from the menu: Edit→Preferences...→Note Input (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...→Note Input). 1. Select your starting position in the score. 2. Select the Real-time (metronome) note input method as described above. 3. Select a duration from the note input toolbar to represent the metronome click. 4. Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key to enter a note of the selected duration. 5. Listen for the metronome clicks—with each click the note grows by the selected duration. 6. Release the key when the note has reached the desired length. The score stops advancing as soon as you release the key. If you want the score to continue advancing, which is necessary to enter rests, then you can use the [Real-time Advance shortcut](#real-time-advance-shortcut) to start the metronome. The same action will stop the metronome again. ### Real-time (foot pedal) With the Real-time (foot pedal) note input method, you indicate your input tempo by tapping on a key or pedal. You can play at any speed you like, and it doesn't have to be constant. The default key for setting the tempo (called "Real-time Advance") is `Enter` on the numeric keypad (Mac: `Fn`+`Return`), but it is highly recommended that you change this to a MIDI key or MIDI pedal (see [below](#real-time-advance-shortcut)). 1. Select your starting position in the score. 2. Select the Real-time (foot pedal) note input method as described above. 3. Select a duration from the note input toolbar to represent the metronome click. 4. Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key. 5. Press the "Real-time Advance" shortcut with each press, the note grows by the selected duration. 6. Release the note when it has reached the desired length. #### Real-time Advance shortcut The "Real-time Advance" shortcut is used to start the metronome with the Real-time (metronome) method or to tap beats with the Real-time (foot pedal) method. It is called "Real-time Advance" because it causes the input position to move forward, or "advance", through the score. The default key for Real-time Advance is `Enter` on the numeric keypad (Mac: `Fn`+`Return`), but it is highly recommended that you assign this to a MIDI key or MIDI pedal via MuseScore's MIDI remote control. The MIDI remote control is available from the menu: Edit→Preferences...→MIDI mappings (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...→MIDI mappings). Alternatively, if you have a USB footswitch or computer pedal which can simulate keyboard keys, you could set it to simulate Enter on the numeric keypad. ## Insert Insert note input method allows you to insert and delete notes and rests within measures, automatically shifting subsequent music forward and backward within the measure. The [measure duration](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties#measure-duration) is automatically updated as you go. To insert a note: 1. Select your starting position in the score. 2. Select the Insert note input method as described above. 3. Enter a note or rest as you would in Step time mode. Each note is inserted before the current cursor position, and the measure duration is increased to compensate. When the notes are entered they will be placed just before the selected starting element, which will be highlighted with a square blue marker. The start element and any subsequent notes or rests within the same measure will be shifted forward. You can move the insertion point forward and backward using the `Right` or `Left` arrow keys, and the new insertion point will then be highlighted. Alternatively, if you have only one or two notes to insert, you can do this directly with the default Step time note input method. Press `Ctrl`+`Shift` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`) while adding the note by mouse or keyboard shortcut (A-G). To insert a rest, first insert a note of the desired duration, then press `Backspace` or `Del`. To delete a note or rest, use the shortcut `Ctrl`+`Del` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Backspace`). The measure duration is decreased to compensate. The shortcut works with both the Step time and Insert note input methods. Because inserting and notes may cause the measure duration to increase or decrease beyond what is specified by the time signature, a small "+" or "-" sign will be shown above the measure when this happens. # Adding and removing measures ## Inserting measures MuseScore allows you to insert or delete measures in the score using a variety of methods. Measures can be inserted: * After a selection * Before a selection * At the start of the score * At the end of the score ### Measure context menu To insert one or more measures: 1. Right-click on a blank area of a measure 2. From the context menu, choose Insert measures 3. From the options presented, choose the location where you want the measure(s) inserted 4. Complete the dialog box and press OK. ### The Properties panel To insert one or more measures: 1. Click on a measure 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Click Insert measures in the Measure section 4. Type the number of measures you wish to insert (or leave it as “1” to insert a single measure) 5. Select where you want the measure(s) to be inserted from the dropdown menu (or leave it as is to insert the new measure(s) after the selection point) 6. Click the + button This popup remains open until you click another part of the user interface. As such, you can continue pressing the + button as many times as you need to insert further measures.
In addition, you can insert measures from one of two menus: ### Note input toolbar 1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects) 2. Click the + button in the Note input toolbar 3. Navigate to Measures 4. Choose where you want the new measure(s) to be inserted ### Menu bar 1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects) 2. Click the Add in the Menu bar 3. Navigate to Measures 4. Choose where you want the new measure(s) to be inserted ### Inserting measures with keyboard shortcuts To quickly insert one measure before the selection point: 1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects) 2. Press `Ins` Insert more measures before the selection point by repeatedly pressing `Ins`. To quickly insert multiple measures before the selection point: 1. Select something in your score (can be anything except line objects) 2. Press `Ctrl`+`Ins` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Ins`) 3. Type the number of required measures in the dialog that appears 4. Click OK To append to the end of your score, you can use the keyboard shortcut `Ctrl`+`B` (Mac: `Cmd`+`B`) for a single measure, or `Alt`+`Shift`+`B` (Mac: `Option`+`Shift`+`B`) for multiple measures. ## Deleting measures To delete one or more measures using keyboard shortcuts: 1. Select a measure (or hold `Shift` and select multiple measures) 2. Type `Ctrl`+`Backspace` or `Ctrl`+`Del` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Backspace` or `Cmd`+`Del`). Alternatively, 1. Select a measure (or hold `Shift` and select multiple measures) 2. Right-click on any measure within the selection 3. Select Delete measures You can also: 1. Select a measure (or hold `Shift` and select multiple measures) 2. Go to Tools 3. Select Remove selected range ### Remove empty trailing measures To remove any empty measures at the end of your score: 1. Go to Tools 2. Select Remove empty trailing measures ## See also Other measure-related pages: * [Measure numbering](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-numbering) * [Measure and multimeasure rests](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-and-multimeasure-rests) * [Pickup and non-metered measures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/pickup-and-non-metered-measures) * [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties) * [Mensural notation and Mensurstrich](/alternative-notation/mensural-notation-and-mensurstrich) # Selecting elements You can select elements in MuseScore using the keyboard or mouse. Selections can consist of a single element, a list of individual elements that may possibly be discontinuous, or a range of measures and staves that includes the elements within it. Certain commands work only on single elements or lists; some work only on ranges; others work on any type of selection. The documentation for any given command should explain which types of selection are allowed. When selected, elements display in blue (or whatever color is defined for the [voice](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices) the element belongs to).
For range selections, a blue rectangle appears around the entire range.
## Selecting a single element To select a single element with the mouse, simply click it. To select a single element with the keyboard, use the cursor keys to [navigate](/navigation/navigating-your-score) to the element. Note that there is no separate concept of a “cursor” in MuseScore that is separate from the selection, except while in Note Input mode. In Normal mode, the left and right cursor keys select elements one by one as you navigate, so even though there is technically not a cursor, the selection itself acts in a similar way. By themselves, the cursor keys navigate through notes and rests only. When combined with `Alt`, they navigate through all elements, including articulation, dynamics, and other markings. ### Notes A note normally consists of multiple elements: the notehead, stem, flag, dot, accidental, etc. Most commands that operate on a single note expect you to select the notehead itself. ### Chords The notes of a chord share a single stem and flag. Even a single note can be considered a “chord” in the sense that it consists of these multiple elements. To select a complete chord (all noteheads plus the stem and other elements), first make sure nothing is currently selected (you can press `Esc` to be sure) and then `Shift`+click the chord. This creates a [range selection](#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) that encompasses the chord.\\
Note that the selection may also include content in other voices if present, but see the section on [excluding elements](#excluding-elements-from-a-range-selection) from range selections for information on how to avoid that if necessary. ### Overlapping elements If multiple elements overlap, clicking selects the topmost element. To select the element underneath a currently-selected element, `Ctrl`+click it. This deselects the currently-selected element and selects the next element beneath it, if any. Thus, repeated `Ctrl`+click operations cycle through a set of overlapping elements. ## Selecting a list of individual elements You can select a list of elements manually by selecting each individually or automatically by using commands to select elements that are similar to a given element. ### Selecting multiple elements manually To add an element to the list of selected elements, `Ctrl`+click it. If an element is already selected, `Ctrl`+click removes it from the list of selected elements.
You can also use `Ctrl`+click to add or remove individual elements from a [range selection](#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves). In the process, this converts the selection into a list selection. If the elements you wish to select are outside of the staff and clear of other elements, you may be able to create a list selection by using `Shift`+drag to draw a selection box around the desired elements. If any notes or rests are included, however, a [range selection](#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) is performed instead. ### Selecting similar elements automatically To select all elements of a given type in the entire score or in a given staff: 1. Right-click one such element 2. In the resulting menu, click Select→Similar or Select→Similar on this staff as appropriate To select all elements of a given type within a range: 1. Click the first such element 2. `Shift`+click the last such element —OR— 1. Perform the [range selection](#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) using the techniques described below 2. Right-click one element within the range 3. In the resulting menu, click Select→Similar in this range To create more complex selections of similar elements: 1. (Optional) Perform a [range selection](#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) 2. Right-click an element 3. In the resulting menu, click Select→More 4. Check the desired boxes within the resulting dialog (see below) The options available in the select dialog will depend on the type of element you right-clicked.
The selection options specific to notes are: * Same notehead: notes with the same notehead group (normal, cross, slash, etc.) * Same pitch: notes with the same pitch name, accidental, and octave * Same string: notes with the on the same string (tablature only) * Same type: notes of the same type (normal, acciaccatura, appoggiatura) * Same note type: notes of the same duration, not considering presence of dots or tuplets * Same duration: notes of the same actual duration * Same note name: notes with the same pitch name and accidental, not considering octave * Same staff: notes in the same staff * Same voice: notes in the same voice * In selection: notes within the current selection * Same system: notes in the same system In addition to the type-specific selection options, there are action options at the bottom of the dialog that are common to all element types. These control what happens to the selected elements, and only one of these can be chosen at a time: * Replace selection: if checked, this action selection replaces an existing selection * Add to selection: if checked, this action adds elements to an existing selection * Subtract from selection: if checked, this action removes elements from an existing selection ## Selecting a range of measures and staves A range selection includes all elements from a given beginning and ending time position across a given set of staves. It is the usual starting point for operations such as copy and paste. ### Selecting a range by dragging To select a range of measures and staves with the mouse alone, use Shift+drag to draw a rectangle around it. Note that this is only feasible for relatively small selections that fit on screen at once. ### Selecting a range by clicking A more flexible method for making selections uses a combination of mouse and keyboard: 1. Click the first note or rest of the desired selection 2. `Shift`+click the last In between the click and `Shift`+click, you can use [navigation](/navigation/navigating-your-score) commands to position the score. This allows you make selections that span several pages. This method works just as well if you first click the last note/rest then `Shift`+click the first. ### Selecting a range using the keyboard You can also make range selections using the keyboard alone or primarily: 1. Select the first note or rest using keyboard navigation or by clicking 2. Hold `Shift` while using keyboard navigation to extend the selection as you navigate The available commands include: * `Shift`+`Left` and `Shift`+`Right` to extend the selection one note or rest at a time * `Shift`+`Ctrl`+`Left` and `Shift`+`Ctrl`+`Right` to extend the selection one measure at a time (Mac: use `Cmd` instead of `Ctrl`) * `Shift`+`Up` and `Shift`+`Down` to extend the selection one staff at a time * `Shift`+`Home` and `Shift`+`End` to extend to the beginning or end of the system * `Shift`+`Ctrl`+`Home` and `Shift`+`Ctrl`+`End` to extend to the beginning or end of the score (Mac: use `Cmd` instead of `Ctrl`) ### Special range selections MuseScore includes some special commands to make command selections: * Edit→Select all or `Ctrl`+`A` (Mac: `Cmd`+`A`) to select the entire score * Edit→Select section to select the current section of the score (everything between the previous and next [section breaks](/formatting/systems-and-horizontal-spacing)) ## Excluding elements from a range selection For certain operations involving range selections, you might want to exclude elements of a given type from the selection. For example, you may wish to copy the notes, rest, and most other markings in a phrase, but skip the lyrics. Or in a passage with multiple voices, you may wish to delete everything not in voice 1. To exclude elements of a given type from a range selection: 1. Perform the range selection normally 2. Open the Selection Filter with View→Selection filter 3. Remove the checkmarks next to any element types you want excluded from the selection
Note that if you exclude voice 1, you will not be able to select any measures that lack content in other voices. So be sure to restore voice 1 after performing the operation for which you are excluding voice 1. For example, if you wish to copy and paste only voice 2, make your range selection, use the Selection Filter to exclude voice 1, use Edit→Copy or `Ctrl`+`C`, then restore the checkbox next to voice 1 before attempting to select the destination to paste. # Editing notes and rests ## Overview After you have entered notes into your score, you may wish to change something about them - pitch, duration, time position, etc. MuseScore Studio provides a number of commands for this purpose. Many of the most powerful commands are only available after you leave note input mode and return to normal mode, but there are a number of quick edits possible while still in note input mode. ## Making changes in note input mode Immediately after entering a note or rest, it is selected, and there are a handful of commands that operate on the selected note or rest while in note input mode. These commands also work if you use the cursor keys to navigate to a previously-entered note or rest. ### Changing duration in note input mode There are two commands that alter the duration of an existing note or rest while in note input mode: * `Shift`+`W` increases the duration. * `Shift`+`Q` decreases the duration. Both commands will first add or remove a dot if appropriate, then will move to the next larger or smaller note value. So for instance, pressing `Shift`+`W` on a quarter note changes it into a dotted quarter, and pressing `Shift`+`W` again changes it to a half note. ### Changing pitch in note input mode The commands for changing the pitch of a selected note while in note input mode are: * `Up` - move pitch up a semitone (spells with sharps) * `Down` - move pitch down a semitone (spells with flats) * `Alt`+`Shift`+`Up` - move pitch up a step diatonically * `Alt`+`Shift`+`Down` - move pitch down a step diatonically * `Ctrl`+`Up` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Up`) - move pitch up an octave * `Ctrl`+`Down` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Down`) - move pitch down an octave. ### Replacing notes and rests in note input mode Most note input in MuseScore is in what a word processor might call "replace" or "overwrite" mode. This means that if you wish to replace a note with a different one, you don't need to delete the old note first—just enter the new one directly, and it automatically overwrites what was there before. {% hint style="info" %} Sometimes you may wish to add a new note and move some of the subsequent notes later to make room. You can move any range selection of notes directly using [cut and paste](/basics/copy-and-paste#moving-elements) or by clicking and dragging it. {% endhint %} ### Deleting notes in note input mode To delete a note and replace it with a rest, simply press `Del`. Note: if you instead wish to move subsequent notes earlier to take the place of the deleted note, there is no need to first delete the original note - simply move the subsequent notes directly using [cut and paste](/basics/copy-and-paste#moving-elements). ### Moving notes in note input mode Although for the most part, moving notes to a different time position is done in normal mode, there is one pair of commands that can be used to change the time position of a note or rest in certain cases while in note input. If you have two notes or rests of the same duration and you wish to exchange them while in note input mode, you can use `Shift`+`Left` or `Shift`+`Right` to exchange a note or rest with its neighbor of the same duration. ## Making changes in normal mode Most changes one might want to make to notes and rests already entered are more easily performed in normal mode—the mode you are in when you leave note input or any other mode. Except where noted, the methods described below work on either a single selected note or rest, a list selection consisting of multiple notes or rests, or entire range selections. See the page on [selections](/basics/selecting-elements) for more information. ### Changing duration in normal mode #### Changing selected notes to a specific note value To change the duration of one or more selected notes in normal mode to a specific note value, simply click the appropriate duration icon or use the keyboard shortcuts `1`–`9`. #### Increasing or decreasing the duration of a selected note To increase the duration of a selected note, you can use the `Shift`+`W` command [as described above](#changing-duration-in-note-input-mode). This adds an augmentation dot if one is not already present, or changes to the next longer note value if the note is already dotted. For example, an eighth note will be changed into a dotted eighth note, and a dotted quarter will be changed into a half note. You can also use `W` to double the duration, thus changing an eighth note into a quarter note directly, or a dotted eighth into a dotted quarter. The commands `Shift`+`Q` and `Q` perform the opposite operation, decreasing or halving the duration in the same way. All of these commands work on only a single selected note. #### Doubling or halving all note values in a range selection Say you have entered a passage using eighth notes but wish to halve or double the durations of all notes and rests—thus changing the duration of the passage itself. * `Q` halves the duration of a range selection. * `W` doubles the duration of a range selection. See also the section on [paste half/double duration commands](/basics/copy-and-paste#paste-halfdouble-duration). ### Changing pitch in normal mode The same commands that work to change pitch in note input also function in normal mode, including single, list, and range selections. These commands are: * `Up` - move pitch up a semitone (spells with sharps) * `Down` - move pitch down a semitone (spells with flats) * `Alt`+`Shift`+`Up` - move pitch up a step diatonically * `Alt`+`Shift`+`Down` - move pitch down a step diatonically * `Ctrl`+`Up` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Up`) - move pitch up an octave * `Ctrl`+`Down` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Down`) - move pitch down an octave In addition, when in normal mode, the accidental buttons on the Note input toolbar and corresponding keyboard shortcuts will toggle (add or remove) accidentals on any selected notes, thus potentially changing their pitch. The Accidentals palette can also be used to add accidentals to selected notes. ### Deleting notes and rests in normal mode To delete a note and replace it with a rest, simply press `Del`. If multiple notes are selected as a list, `Del` replaces them each by rests individually. If you select a range, `Del` replaces the entire passage with the correct rests according to the meter. Rests cannot normally be deleted completely, as removing them would leave a measure with fewer beats than it should have. However, see the [remove selected range command](#removing-notes-and-rests-and-their-associated-time) below for information on how to do this when required. Also, rests in [voices](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices) 2–4 can be deleted without removing time from a measure. ### Removing notes and rests and their associated time To completely remove selected notes or rests—thus leaving the piece with fewer measures if entire measures are selected, or fewer beats within the measure if a partial measure is selected—use Tools -> Remove selected range or the keyboard shortcut `Ctrl`+`Del` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Del`). ### Adding ties in normal mode Ties can be added in normal mode, but unlike in note input mode where the tie command automatically adds a note and creates a tie, in normal mode, both notes must already exist. To add a tie in normal mode: 1. Select a note that you wish to tie to the next note of the same pitch 2. Click the tie button or use the shortcut `T`. 3. This works even if the next note of the same pitch is in a different voice. If you select multiple notes, MuseScore will start a tie from each of them. You can use the technique to tie entire chords at once. To enter ties between notes which are not adjacent (such as to show an arpeggiate-and-hold pattern on a keyboard instrument), or which are on different staves, you must explicitly select both notes (click the first and `Ctrl`+click the second), and then press `T`. ### Changing voice in normal mode A note entered into a given voice may be moved into another voice if this is musically possible, or the contents of two voices may be exchanged. #### Moving selected notes into another voice To move a selection of one or more notes into another voice, either press one of the voice buttons on the toolbar or use the keyboard shortcuts `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`1`–`4` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Option`+`1`–`4`). Notes will be moved to the extent it is possible without compromising the current content of the destination voice. A note can be moved into another voice if there is currently silence (rests, or nothing at all) in the destination voice at that time position for the duration of the note to be moved. In that case, the note will simply be moved to the new voice. A note can also be moved into another voice if there is already a note or chord of the same duration starting at that time position. In that case, the note will be combined with the existing note or chord. #### Exchanging the contents of two voices MuseScore Studio can also exchange the contents of any pair of voices. These commands work only on full measures (or multiple measures), not on individual notes. To exchange the contents of any two voices, use the corresponding command in Tools -> Voices: (Exchange voice 1-2, Exchange voice 1-3, etc.) ## See also [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) # Copy and paste The cut, copy, and paste commands can be used to reproduce entire passages of music, to move music earlier or later, to copy text or other markings between staves, to exchange the content in different measures, and more. ## Accessing the commands In all cases, the first step is to [select what you want to cut or copy](/basics/selecting-elements). As with other programs that support cut, copy, and paste, you can access these commands from the Edit menu, from a context menu that appears upon right-click or related gesture (e.g., `Ctrl`+click, or two-finger tap), or via the standard keyboard shortcuts. | Command | Shortcut (Windows) | Shortcut (Mac) | Context menu | Main menu | | ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------- | --------------------------------- | | Cut | `Ctrl`+`X` | `Cmd`+`X` | Cut | Edit -> Cut | | Copy | `Ctrl`+`C` | `Cmd`+`C` | Copy | Edit -> Copy | | Paste | `Ctrl`+`V` | `Cmd`+`V` | Paste | Edit -> Paste | | Swap with clipboard | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`X` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`X` | Swap with Clipboard | Edit -> Swap with clipboard | | Paste half duration | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Q` | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Q` (as of 4.2) | N/A | Edit -> Paste half duration | | Paste double duration | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`W` | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`W` (as of 4.2) | N/A | Edit -> Paste double duration | Note: When using the context menu, take care to always right-click on a selected item; if you right-click on an empty space by mistake your selection will be lost! ## Copying a range selection To copy a range\—whether a single chord, a single measure, several measures on one staff, or multiple measures across multiple staves—do the following: 1. [Select the range](/basics/selecting-elements#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) you want to copy 2. Use the Copy command from the menu or press `Ctrl`+`C` (Mac: `Cmd`+`C`) 3. Select the first note or rest of the destination 4. Use the Paste command from the menu or press `Ctrl`+`V` (Mac: `Cmd`+`V`)
Copied music will replace the existing content of the destination. All elements in the selected range will be copied, with the exception of system-wide elements such as tempo text, key and time signature changes, and repeats. You can use the Selection Filter to [exclude other elements of a given type](/basics/selecting-elements#excluding-elements-from-a-range-selection) from the operation. ## Copying a single element or a list selection MuseScore also allows copying a single element, or a list selection of multiple lyrics, chord symbols, dynamics, articulation, or other markings from one place to another, while keeping the content such as notes in the destination intact. Multiple notes list selection cannot be copied. MuseScore preserves the relative time positions of the markings based on literal note value distance if possible, measure rhythm is not taken into account. This includes case of copying chord symbols and dynamics. Valid note or rest anchors are required at the destination music when pasting lyrics and articulations. 1. [Select the elements](/basics/selecting-elements#selecting-a-list-of-individual-elements) you want to copy 2. Use the Copy command from the menu or press `Ctrl`+`C` (Mac: `Cmd`+`C`) 3. Select the first note or rest of the destination 4. Use the Paste command from the menu or press `Ctrl`+`V` (Mac: `Cmd`+`V`) ## Moving elements Cut and paste commands can be used to * move a passage to another staff, such as music on flute to clarinet, or * shift a passage earlier or later. This method is especially useful as a way to insert or delete a note or rest and also shifts existing notes and rests to create or trim silence. Measures (their rhythmic structure) cannot be moved, but see [Adding and removing measures](/basics/adding-and-removing-measures) and [Time signatures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures) chapters. When moving list selection, its elements' relative positions are preserved if possible, see ["Copying a list selection"](#copying-a-single-element-or-a-list-selection) section. To move a selection: 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) what you want to move 2. Use the Cut command from the menu or press `Ctrl`+`X` (Mac: `Cmd`+`X`) 3. Select the first note or rest of the destination 4. Use the Paste command from the menu or press `Ctrl`+`V` (Mac: `Cmd`+`V`) ## Swapping a selection with the clipboard The swap with clipboard command combines two operations into one: (1) First it overwrites a selected part of the score with the contents of the clipboard, just like the paste command; (2) Second, it transfers the overwritten part of the score back to the clipboard, just like the copy command. It can be used, for example, to swap two equal-length sections of a score, A and B: 1. Select section A 2. Apply the [cut](#accessing-the-commands) command 3. Select section B 4. Apply the [swap with clipboard](#accessing-the-commands) command to paste A over the contents of B while moving the contents of B to the clipboard 5. Select section A again (or just the first note, rest, or measure) 6. Apply the [paste](#accessing-the-commands) command Like the other commands discussed here, you can access the swap with clipboard command from the menu or via a keyboard shortcut—in this case, it is `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`X` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`+`X`). ## Repeating a selection A common use for copy and paste is to duplicate a given passage (including notes, chords etc) immediately after the original. Use the special repeat selection command to simplify this process. 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) a single element or range to be repeated 2. Press `R` This does not work on list selection. It works on a single chord, either on a range selection of it, and when exactly one note of that chord is selected. See [Selecting elements](/basics/selecting-elements) chapter. In note input mode, this command repeats the entire chord that contains the current note. This is useful for creating a series of repeated chords. ## Copying a range selection to multiple staves If you wish to copy a passage to multiple staves—for instance, to double music of flute with oboes and clarinets—you can use the [explode](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/implode-and-explode#explode) command: 1. Select the passage you wish to copy 2. Extend the selection to include the staves below (e.g., by pressing `Shift`+`Down`) 3. Use Tools→Explode This copies the original selection, assuming it contains only single notes—no chords and no multiple voices. If there are chords or multiple voices, then these are distributed among the remaining staves as described in the [section on the explode command](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/implode-and-explode#explode). ## Paste half/double duration If you have entered a passage using mostly eighth notes but wish to halve the entire passage to using mostly sixteenth notes, or double it to quarter notes, MuseScore provides a pair of special commands to accomplish this. You can either modify the durations of a selection in place or create a separate copy of the passage with the modified durations. To halve or double the duration of a passage: 1. Select a range to modify 2. Use the [copy](#accessing-the-commands) command 3. If you wish to create a separate copy of the passage with the modified durations, select the destination 4. Use the [paste half duration](#accessing-the-commands) or [paste double duration](#accessing-the-commands) command `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Q`/`W` ## Duplicating individual elements Individual elements—even those that are not selected automatically in a range selection, like time signatures or voltas—can be selected and then duplicated using the mouse. 1. While pressing `Ctrl`+`Shift` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`), and click and hold on an element 2. Drag it anywhere in the score 3. When you release the mouse button, the selected element is copied to the new location
## See also * [Selecting elements](/basics/selecting-elements) * [Implode and explode](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/implode-and-explode) # Using the palettes ## Overview The Palettes panel contains musical symbols that you can add to your score. Symbols are organized into different palettes such as Key Signatures and Articulations. A basic set of palettes is shown by default, but you can add and customize additional palettes easily. See [Palettes (Customization)](/customization/palettes) to learn how to add, delete, edit and rearrange items inside any palette, as well as create and customize your own palettes. ## Accessing the palettes panel There are three tabs displayed by default at the top of the left sidebar of the main window: Palettes, Instruments, and Properties. If one of the other tabs is currently being displayed in the sidebar, click the Palettes tab to display the palettes instead.
You can open and close the Palettes panel using View→Palettes or the keyboard shortcut `F9`. If all of the panels in the sidebar are closed, the sidebar itself closes as well, allowing more room for the score display. Like most other panels within MuseScore, Palettes can also be [undocked](/customization/toolbars-and-windows#docking-and-undocking-panels) to function as a separate window. ## Adding palette items to your score To add a palette item to your score, open the appropriate palette (if it's not already open) by clicking its title or the arrow icon to the left. The items in that palette will be displayed in a grid.
In general, to apply palette items to your score, you can either select the target elements in the score and then click the palette item, or drag the item from the palette to a target element. See the section on [searching and navigating](#search-navigate-palettes) below for information on applying palette items via the keyboard. ### Items applied to individual score elements Many palette items—for example, articulations, dynamics, and most other text—can be applied to individual notes, rests, or other score elements. When using drag and drop, a dotted line will appear indicating which score element the palette element will attach to when the click is released. It is usually more efficient, however, to select the target elements in your score first and then click the palette item. This is especially true if you wish to apply the same palette item to multiple score elements, since this method allows you can apply the palette item to multiple score elements at once. To apply a palette to one or more score elements: 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) the elements you wish to apply the palette item to (single, list, or range selection) 2. Click the palette item The palette item will normally be added to each of the selected elements. Note that with a range selected, when clicking a palette item representing text (including dynamics and tempo markings), the item will be added to the first element in the range only. System text (including tempo markings) will be applied to the top staff only; other text will be applied to the first selected element of each selected staff. ### Items applied to ranges Palette items such as hairpins, slurs, ottavas, and pedal markings are applied to a range rather than a single note or rest. The process for adding them is the same: 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) the range of elements you wish to apply the palette item to 2. Click the palette item ### Items applied to full measures Certain palette items such as barlines, time signatures, voltas, and layout breaks are normally applied to a measure as a whole—or a range of measures—instead of a specific note or rest. The process for adding these to the score is the same as for other palette items: 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) the measure or range of measures you wish to apply the palette item to 2. Click the palette item ## Expanding and collapsing palettes A palette can be opened (expanded) or closed (collapsed) individually by clicking on the title bars or the arrow icon to the left of the title. In addition, you can expand or collapse all palettes at once, or let MuseScore close palettes automatically. To access these options, click the `...` button at the top of the palette window to popup the palettes menu.
* Single-click to open a palette: controls whether palettes are opened by single or double click * Open only one palette at a time: if checked, then whenever you open a palette, any already-open palettes are automatically closed * Collapse all palettes: immediately close all open palettes * Expand all palettes: immediately open all palettes ## Searching and navigating the palettes You can also search and navigate the palettes using your keyboard instead of a mouse. ### Search To search for palette elements by name, use the keyboard shortcut `Ctrl`+`F9` (Mac: `Cmd`+`F9`), or click the magnifying glass icon at the top of the Palettes panel.
This will display a search box. As you type characters into the box, MuseScore will display any matching palette items.
To close the search box, click the "X" icon. ### Navigation The palettes are completely accessible by keyboard. The search facility described [above](#search) is one method you can use to start the process, but you can also focus the keyboard on the Palettes panel by using `Shift`+`F6` to move focus to the sidebar. Once focus is on the palette panel, the `Up` and `Down` keys will move through the various individual palettes. You can then open and close a palette by pressing `Enter`. To access the elements with a palette, press `Right` to access the palette, then `Up` and `Down` to move through the elements on the palette. Pressing `Enter` will apply element in the same way as clicking it. ## Accessing more palette items Some palettes also contain additional elements that are not displayed by default. To access those, click the `More` button at the bottom right of the palette.
Add any of these additional items to the main palette by dragging them in. For more information, see [Palettes](/customization/palettes) under [Customization](https://github.com/shoogle/Handbook/blob/main/docs/customization/README.md). ## Adding more palettes The palettes that are shown by default are the ones most users will need often. But MuseScore provides additional palettes that you may also find useful. To access these extra palettes: * Click the `Add Palettes` button at the top of the Palettes panel.
This will display a list of palettes you can add to your Palettes panel. To add any palette, click the `+` button next to the palette name.
Added palettes appear at the top of the panel. To reorder them simply drag them into position. You can also create an empty custom palette that can be filled later with your own choice of elements. * Clicking the `Create custom palette` button, see [Palettes (Customization)](/customization/palettes). ## The Master palette The Master palette is MuseScore’s repository of all musical symbols; it also provide an alternative pathway for creating [custom key signatures](/notation/pitch/key-signatures#creating-a-custom-key-signature) and [custom time signatures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures#creating-a-custom-time-signature). To display the Master palette, use the keyboard shortcut `Shift`+`F9`, or from the menu select View→Master palette.
The Master palette window is divided into categories matching the names of the default palettes (whether displayed or hidden) in the Palettes panel; in fact, the contents of each small palette are drawn from the corresponding section of the Master. The exception is the [Symbols](/notation/expressive-markings/other-symbols) category of the Master palette which contains items not found in the Palettes panel. Items can be applied to the score from the Master palette in the same way as from the small palettes; however, aside from applying items from the Symbols section, it is usually better to do so from the Palettes panel. Items found in all sections of the Master palette window, except "Symbols", are functional in that they have an effect on the score: Key and Time signatures, for example. However, items from the Symbols palette are non-functional—that is, they are for display only. See also, the chapter on [Other symbols](/notation/expressive-markings/other-symbols). ## See also * [Palettes (Customization)](/customization/palettes) for information about customizing the palettes panel. * [Other symbols](/notation/expressive-markings/other-symbols) for information about the Symbols palette. * [Working with images](/formatting/working-with-images) for information about how to add images to your score. # Properties panel The Properties panel shows settings for objects you select in the score. It was known as the “Inspector” in MuseScore 2 and 3. You can select one object (say, a dynamic mark) or multiple objects at a time (say, a dynamic mark, a notehead, and a hairpin). If any of the objects you have selected contains editable settings, Properties is the place to find them. An important thing about Properties is that by default it affects only the object(s) you have selected, so changing how one hairpin looks won’t change all of the hairpins in your score—only those you have selected. However, for most settings, you can [save as the default style for the score](#saving-and-restoring-default-settings). ## Accessing the Properties panel 1. Open the Score tab 2. Press the [default keyboard shortcut](/basics/default-keyboard-shortcuts) `F8`, or click on the Properties tab on the left side of the screen.
## Global settings This is what the Properties panel looks like when you have nothing selected in your score. All these settings affect your entire score (not just individual elements):
### Show * Invisible hides/shows all invisible objects in your score * Frames hides/shows [Frames](/formatting/pages-and-vertical-spacing#Frames) * Formatting hides/shows formatting elements added from the [layout palette](/basics/using-the-palettes#layout-palette) * Page margins hides/shows the page margin * Sound flags hides/shows sound flag buttons on staff text ### Score appearance * Empty staves hides/shows staves that contain no notated music within a system. This setting mirrors the Hide empty staves within systems settings in the Style dialog. * Page settings opens the [Page settings](/formatting/score-size-and-spacing#page-settings) dialog. Same as Format→Page Settings. See [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). * Style settings opens the Style dialog. Same as Format→Style. See [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). ## General settings These settings are visible whenever something is selected in your score.
### Visible Click this box to hide/unhide selected elements, or use the keyboard shortcut `V`. Use this feature to hide elements so they don't appear in your exported or printed score. This can be useful when, for example, applying tempo marks or dynamics solely to affect playback in MuseScore. Use the Invisible toggle in Properties (when nothing is selected) to show or hide these hidden elements in the score view (hidden elements will be rendered in a lighter shade). ### Auto-place Usually checked by default, this feature positions the selected object according to MuseScore's vertical and horizontal collision avoidance algorithms. Uncheck Auto-place to have more control over the positioning of certain elements. Learn more about this feature in [Positioning elements](/formatting/positioning-of-elements). ### Cue size This feature is used to create small cue notes: i.e. notes provided to assist the performer by indicating what another ensemble/orchestra member is playing at the same time. Checking the box makes any selected notes smaller, including their stems and any attached beams. ### Play When checked, this property allows playback of the selected element. Uncheck Play to silence the element. ## Playback settings The Playback button displays the editable playback properties of the selected elements.
Under the Playback button, playback properties are shown if the selected elements have any. ### Velocity Only notes have the Velocity property. The valid range is 1 to 127. This property is usable for instruments using Soundfonts. This property has no effect on instruments using Muse Sounds. See [Dynamics](/notation/expressive-markings/dynamics-and-hairpins) for changing loudness of playback on instruments using Muse Sounds. ### Tuning Used to adjust the tuning of notes in cents. Only notes have the Tuning property. ## Appearance settings
### Leading space This changes the leading space of selected elements: i.e. the space in front of the element. The leading space adjustment is applied across all staves, so that notes at the same time position remain aligned. ### Measure width This changes the width of the measure as a proportion of the original width: e.g. 1.5 = one-and-a-half times the default width. ### Minimum distance This is used by the auto-place collision avoidance algorithm and applies only to elements that are applied above/below the staff by default, such as staff text, dynamics, fingerings, lines etc. It sets the minimum distance (in [sp.](/appendix/glossary#spatium)) of the selected objects from other elements that are closer to the staff, or the staff itself. ### Offset When newly applied, elements assume a default position. The horizontal/vertical offsets give you a more precise way of positioning an element than dragging it or moving with the keyboard arrows. ### Snap to grid This feature allows you to constrain drag operations to increments of a desired distance. First you need to check the Snap to grid box, then press Configure grid and set the desired horizontal/vertical step distances. You can switch Snap to grid on/off as required by checking/unchecking the box. ### Arrange The four buttons in this section control how overlapping elements are drawn.They work as follows: * Forwards moves the selected element in front of the next element * Backwards moves the selected element behind the next element * To front moves the selected element in front of all other elements. * To back moves the selected element behind all other elements, including the staff lines. ### Color Click on this button to change the color of selected element(s). Choose a preset or custom color, or create your own by clicking the + button. This is stored for future reference in the list of custom colors to the right. ## Properties for characters inside text objects When [Text object(s)](https://github.com/shoogle/Handbook/blob/main/docs/text/README.md) are selected (the object, not the characters), the Properties panel shows the formatting settings of the Text object. Editing these properties may affect all of the characters inside. When character(s) inside a [Text object](https://github.com/shoogle/Handbook/blob/main/docs/text/README.md) are selected, the Properties panel shows the formatting settings of the characters. Editing these properties only changes the selected characters. See [Formatting text](/text/formatting-text). ## Saving and restoring default settings After changing any given setting, you can click the "three dots" menu button adjacent to the setting to reveal a menu that allows you to either Reset the setting to the default for the score, or Save as default style for this score. The latter option is only available for properties that correspond to style settings, but this includes many of the properties in this panel. # Adjusting elements directly This chapter explains methods to fine tune the literal positioning of elements on a score for layout purpose. The more common musical editing methods are explained in [Entering and editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text), and [Editing notes and rests](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests) chapters. ## Changing the position of elements To fine tune the literal positioning of elements on a score, either * Drag it, see also [Snap to grid](/basics/properties-panel#appearance-settings) chapter, or * Select element(s) on a score, adjust their Offset property, see [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel) chapter. or * Use Edit mode. To enter Edit mode, either * Right-click → Edit element on an element on a score, or * Select an element on a score, use the keyboard shortcut `F2`, or * Select an element on a score, use the keyboard shortcut `Alt`+`Shift`+`E` (Mac: `Option`+`Shift`+`E`) Then, in Edit mode, press the keyboard arrows `Left` `Right` `Up` `Down` to move the object in step of 0.5 sp, or * Edit it directly, this method does not work on notes, rests, and elements added from "Master palette : Symbols" (see [Other symbols](/notation/expressive-markings/other-symbols) chapter). Select element(s) on a score, press the keyboard arrow keys `Left` `Right` `Up` `Down` to move in small steps (0.1 sp). In combination with `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`), they are moved in large steps (1 sp). Read more about spatium (sp.) in [Page layout concepts](/formatting/page-layout-concepts) chapter. ## Changing the shape of elements To change the shape of elements such as [slurs](/notation/expressive-markings/slurs-and-ties) and [ties](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#ties) after adding them to the score: 1. Click on the slur or tie to be adjusted 2. Click and drag the adjustment handles that appear around the element (N.b. red letters in the below diagram are for reference only)\\
Note that: * Handles B, C, and D change the shape of the curve at that point * Handles A end E adjust the element's length (This can also be achieved by pressing `Shift`+`Left`/`Right` to move the ends one chord/rest at a time) * Handle F repositions the whole line without changing its shape or length If you wish to change the note to which a slur or tie is connected, the recommended method is to use the keyboard shortcuts described above (`Shift`+`Left`/`Right`). This is the most efficient way of changing both the visual and playback range of notes encompassed by a slur or tie. ## Anchors Some types of item – dynamics, hairpins, tempo text, pedal marks – do not have to be attached directly to notes or rests, but can also be attached to rhythmic positions within a duration. We call these anchors. In general, items cannot be added directly to an anchor point within a duration, but must be added to a note or rest and then moved into the required position. The keyboard shortcuts to move between anchor points are `Shift`+`Left`/`Right` (the same shortcuts that move other types of item between notes). The anchor positions are stored in the file as real rhythmic positions, so items will stay in the correct place when the score reformats. If you select an 'anchorable' item and press `Shift`, you will see a visualization of the available anchors in that measure as alternating dark and light rectangles. The color is determined by the voice to which the item is assigned (purple for all voices, blue for voice 1, green for voice 2, etc.) Each slice represents a rhythmic subdivision to which you can anchor the item.
### Moving between anchors To move an item between anchors, hold `Shift` and press `Left` or `Right`:
With lines (hairpins, pedal markings), both ends can be moved independently. By default, the subdivisions shown are half of the beat as determined by the time signature (so, in this example, half of the quarter beat, i.e. eighth notes). However, anchors will also be shown for notes on other staves which are at rhythmic positions that fall outside of these subdivisions, which means you can align an item to notes on other staves, whatever their position:
### Moving dynamics to the 'end of duration' position By using `Shift`+`Alt`+`Left`/`Right`, you can step not just between rhythmic subdivisions but also the end of each of those subdivisions. This is a special position; for a dynamic, the end of one duration is not the same as the start of the following one (which may have its own dynamic – or may be a rest.) This is most commonly encountered in something like this form:
To input the dynamics in this example: 1. Add a f dynamic to the note 2. Add a hairpin to the note; it will end on the rest 3. Add a p dynamic to the hairpin (which will put it at the endpoint of the hairpin, i.e. on the rest), or directly onto the rest 4. Select the dynamic and press `Shift`+`Alt`+`Left`, which will move the dynamic to the end of the last subdivision of the previous note Note that hairpins cannot be moved to an 'end of duration' position; if there is no dynamic, then the distinction is meaningless. Therefore, the dynamic should be moved, and any hairpins will follow. For clarity, when moving hairpins or other lines, the subdivisions that the item spans are shaded darker so you can see the range it spans:
## Working with lines See also the main chapter [Other lines](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines). ### Changing the range of a line To change the start and end points of a line: 1. Select the line to reveal its adjustment handles\\
2. Press `Shift`+`Left`/`Right` to move the end of the line one step at a time (a step = one note/rest, or one measure—depending on the line type). * Note: You can click or use `Tab` to move the focus between handles when adjusting. Focus on the left handle to move the beginning of the line. 3. Fine-tune the position of handles using the `Left` or `Right` arrow keys if required. Note that this does not affect the playback range of the line. As with slurs and ties, it is recommended to use `Shift` when adjusting line length with the arrow keys to ensure that the playback range also adjusts accordingly. ### Creating diagonal lines Although lines are horizontal by default, they can be set at any angle simply by dragging the start or end adjustment handles; or by selecting a start/end handle and using the `Up` or `Down` arrow keys. ### Editing text of Text line objects To edit the displayed text of Text line objects ( such as "system text line", "staff text line", and "barré line", see [Entering and editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text)): 1. Select a text line element 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Open the Text tab in the Text line section 4. Edit these fields * Beginning text * Text when continuing to a new system: the text to display if the object spans more than one system (page layout concept), see [Page layout concepts](/formatting/page-layout-concepts) chapter. ## See also * [Other lines: Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-properties) * [Positioning of elements](/formatting/positioning-of-elements) # Parts {% embed url="" fullWidth="false" %} ## Opening a part MuseScore 4 automatically creates a separate (default) part for every instrument in your score. To open all parts at once: 1. Click Parts in the toolbar (This will open the Parts dialog) 2. Click Open all To open an individual part: 1. Click Parts in the toolbar 2. Click a part to select it 3. Click Open selected You can also select specific parts to open at once. Do this by holding `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) while selecting the parts you’d like to open, then click Open selected. You can also select a range of contiguous parts by clicking the first and holding `Shift` while clicking the last.
## Closing a part Click the X close button in a part tab to close a part.
Note that changes you make to a part will be saved with that part and retrievable the next time you open it from the Parts dialog. ## Creating custom parts The Parts dialog is tightly integrated with the [Layout panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings). This integration makes it easy for you to create parts with any combination of instruments from your score. There are two ways to customize parts in MuseScore 4: using the default (i.e. ready-made) parts to reveal other instruments, and creating entirely new parts. ### Reveal instruments in default parts As we’ve already seen, MuseScore 4 automatically creates a new (default) part for every instrument in your score. All you have to do is open the part from the Parts dialog. In fact, each default part already contains all of the instruments in your score – they’re simply hidden from view (except, of course, the chosen part instrument). This means you can “reveal” other instruments within any of the default parts. To do this: 1. Open a part (as described above) 2. Select the Layout panel 3. Click the eye icon next to another instrument This instrument will now be visible in the chosen part. This makes creating custom parts an incredibly flexible process. Revealing or hiding other instruments is completely non-destructive, meaning you can customize every instrument in every part, and hide or show only what you want to reveal to different players (or for different musical projects) without having to create entirely new parts each time. ### Create a new part You can create a completely "blank" part from scratch, allowing you full control over which instruments it shows. To do this: 1. Click Parts in the toolbar to open the Parts dialog 2. Click Create new part 3. Give your new part a name 4. Click Open selected Your new part will now be open in the Score tab, but it will appear to contain no instruments. To add instruments to this part: 1. Go to the Layout panel 2. Click the eye icon next to each instrument you’d like to appear in your part ### Choose which voices appear in each part Sometimes it will be necessary to create individual parts from staves that contain multiple voices. You might, for example, want to extract separate parts for orchestral players who share a staff in the main score (E.g. Flute I and Flute II). Or you might wish to create individual vocal parts from choral scores where, for example, four voices are notated across two staves. You'll need to first create (see above) or duplicate (see below) a part. To then select which voices will appear in a part: 1. Open a part (see above) 2. Go to the Layout panel 3. Expand an instrument by clicking on the triangular dropdown icon 4. Click the settings icon next to the staff name 5. Select which voice(s) you want to appear in your part by ticking/un-ticking the checkboxes under Voices visible in the score
## Applying styles to parts Style settings for a wide range of engraving elements can be applied specifically to parts without affecting the main score. To change style settings for a specific part: 1. Ensure a part has been opened and is currently selected in the Score tab 2. Go to Format → Style... 3. Make your desired style settings changes (applicable changes will be visible in the score in real time) 4. Click OK to confirm your changes Changes you make in this dialog will affect only the part selected in the Score tab. If you want changes to affect all parts (but not the main score), select Apply to all parts before clicking OK. Learn more about saving and loading default style settings in [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). ## Managing synchronisation of score and parts (This section describes features that are new or considerably enhanced in MuseScore 4.2.) When you make changes to the content of the score - adding or deleting an item, or changing pitches and durations of notes, for example - these changes are always reflected in the parts, and vice versa. However, just as you can apply different styles to score and parts, you may want the properties (position, style/appearance) of certain items to differ between score and parts. Therefore: * When you change any property of an item in a part, that change will not be reflected in the score and the item will be marked as 'desynchronised' from the score, if it is not already; * When you change any property of an item in the score, that change will be reflected in the part, unless that item is already desynchronised. When an item in a part is desynchronised, its colour when selected changes to orange and, according on which properties have been changed, the toggles which appear in the Properties panel under Score and part synchronisation will switch off:
Position refers to offset, leading space, minimum distance, autoplace, direction (up/down, above/below), alignment, and a few other properties specific to certain types. Style/appearance is, essentially, all other properties. If you have made changes to an item in the part but wish to resynchronise that item with the score, you can turn these toggles back on to reset those properties to match the score. Text items have a third toggle, Text, which allows you to control synchronisation of the content and formatting of a text item. Unlike other properties, this must be manually switched off before you make changes to a text item in a part which you do not want to be reflected in the score. ### Excluding items from parts or score In some cases you may wish certain items to be in the score but not to appear in the parts at all, or to appear in a part but not in the score. This is not the same as simply making the item invisible, as invisible items sometimes affect the layout. This option is available for frames, clef changes, ottava lines, staff text and system text. In the case of clefs and ottavas, excluding these items from one view will cause the notes there to be repositioned accordingly. To exclude an item from parts: 1. Select the item in the score 2. Open Properties 3. Under Score and part synchronisation, check Exclude from parts To exclude an item from the score: 1. Select the item in the part 2. Open Properties 3. Under Score and part synchronisation, check Exclude from score ## Renaming, duplicating and deleting parts This all takes place in the Parts dialog (accessible from the Parts button in the toolbar).
Simply click the "three dots" menu icon next to a selected part to reveal its options. Note that only newly created parts (created by clicking the Create new part button) can be deleted. All parts can be duplicated or renamed. To duplicate any part: 1. Select a part in the Parts dialog 2. Click the "three dots" menu icon for the selected part 3. Select Duplicate from the context menu that appears 4. Enter a new name for the part (or leave the default name as is) 5. Hit `Enter`, or click anywhere in the Parts dialog To rename any part: 1. Select a part in the Parts dialog 2. Click the "three dots" menu icon for the selected part 3. Select Rename from the context menu that appears 4. Type your new part name 5. Hit `Enter` to confirm the new name Note you can also double click on any part in the Parts dialog to rename it. To delete a newly created part: 1. Select a newly created part in the Parts dialog 2. Click the "three dots" menu icon for the selected part 3. Select Delete from the context menu that appears When a part is deleted, its tab in the Score tab (if already opened) will be closed. Any customizations made to that part will also be lost. The part will also no longer appear in the Parts dialog. ## Exporting and printing parts To export parts: 1. Click File → Export... (alternatively, select the Publish tab and click Export...) 2. Check the box next to the part(s) you want to export, or click Select all to choose all parts at once 3. Select whether to export all parts combined in one file, or leave the default export setting as each part to a separate file 4. Click Export... 5. Select your destination file and name your score in your operating system's Export dialog 6. Click Save Parts will be exported in the PDF format by default. To change the export format, select your preferred format from the dropdown menu in Export settings. You can export your parts in a range of image and audio formats, as well as the braille format for compatible printers. For more information, see [File Export](/file-management/file-export). To print parts: 1. Ensure the part you wish to print is selected in the Score tab 2. Click File → Print 3. Use your operating system's print dialog to print the selected part Note that parts can currently only be printed one at a time. # Default keyboard shortcuts On macOS, make the following substitutions: * Replace `Ctrl` with `Cmd` (or `⌘`) * Replace `Alt` with `Option` (or `⌥`) * Replace `Home` with `Fn`+`Left` * Replace `End` with `Fn`+`Right` * Replace `PgUp` with `Fn`+`Up` * Replace `PgDn` with `Fn`+`Down` * Add `Fn` with function keys ## Navigation ### Page navigation | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ---------------------------- | ------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | Zoom in | `Ctrl`+`=` | `Cmd`+`=` | | Zoom out | `Ctrl`+`-` | `Cmd`+`-` | | Zoom to 100% | `Ctrl`+`0` | `Cmd`+`0` | | Go to first element in score | `Ctrl`+`Home` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`Left` | | Go to last element in score | `Ctrl`+`End` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`Right` | | Jump to next screen | `PgDn` | `Fn`+`Down` | | Jump to previous screen | `PgUp` | `Fn`+`Up` | | Jump to top of first page | `Home` | `Fn`+`Left` | | Jump to bottom of last page | `End` | `Fn`+`Right` | | Jump to next page | `Ctrl`+`PgDn` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`Down` | | Jump to previous page | `Ctrl`+`PgUp` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`Up` | | Find / Go to | `Ctrl`+`F` | `Cmd`+`F` | ### Score navigation | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | -------------------------------- | -------------------------------- | ---------------------------------- | | Select next chord | `Right` | `Right` | | Select previous chord | `Left` | `Left` | | Go to next measure | `Ctrl`+`Right` | `Cmd`+`Right` | | Go to previous measure | `Ctrl`+`Left` | `Cmd`+`Left` | | Select next element in score | `Alt`+`Right` | `Option`+`Right` | | Select previous element in score | `Alt`+`Left` | `Option`+`Left` | | Select note/rest above | `Alt`+`Up` | `Option`+`Up` | | Select note/rest below | `Alt`+`Down` | `Option`+`Down` | ## Note input ### General | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ---------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | Note input: toggle note input mode | `N` | `N` | | Show/hide piano keyboard | `P` | `P` | | Use voice 1 | `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`1` | `Cmd`+`Option`+`1` | | Use voice 2 | `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`2` | `Cmd`+`Option`+`2` | ### Duration | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | Set duration | `1` – `9` | `1` – `9` | | Set duration: 32nd note | `2` | `2` | | Set duration: 16th note | `3` | `3` | | Set duration: 8th note | `4` | `4` | | Set duration: quarter note | `5` | `5` | | Set duration: half note | `6` | `6` | | Set duration: whole note | `7` | `7` | | Toggle duration dot | `.` | `.` | | Enter tuplet | `Ctrl`+`2` – `Ctrl`+`9` | `Cmd`+`2` – `Cmd`+`9` | | Enter tuplet: duplet | `Ctrl`+`2` | `Cmd`+`2` | | Enter tuplet: triplet | `Ctrl`+`3` | `Cmd`+`3` | | Enter tuplet: quadruplet | `Ctrl`+`4` | `Cmd`+`4` | | Add tied note | `T` | `T` | | Halve selected duration (includes dotted values) | `Shift`+`Q` | `Shift`+`Q` | | Double select duration (includes dotted values) | `Shift`+`W` | `Shift`+`W` | ### Pitch | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ---------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | Enter note | `A` – `G` | `A` – `G` | | Add note to chord | `Shift`+`A` – `Shift`+`G` | `Shift`+`A` – `Shift`+`G` | | Enter interval | `Alt`+`1` – `Alt`+`9` | `Option`+`1` – `Option`+`9` | | Toggle accidental: flat | `-` | `-` | | Toggle accidental: natural | `=` | `=` | | Toggle accidental: sharp | `+` | `+` | | Enter rest | `0` | `0` | | Add grace note: acciaccatura | `/` | `/` | ### Tablature | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | | Set duration (TAB) | `Shift`+`0` – `Shift`+`9` | `Shift`+`0` – `Shift`+`9` | | Set duration: 32nd note (TAB) | `Shift`+`2` | `Shift`+`2` | | Set duration: 16th note (TAB) | `Shift`+`3` | `Shift`+`3` | | Set duration: 8th note (TAB) | `Shift`+`4` | `Shift`+`4` | | Set duration: quarter note (TAB) | `Shift`+`5` | `Shift`+`5` | | Set duration: half note (TAB) | `Shift`+`6` | `Shift`+`6` | | Set duration: whole note (TAB) | `Shift`+`7` | `Shift`+`7` | | Enter TAB: fret | `0` – `9` | `0` – `9` | | Enter TAB: fret | `A` – `K` | `A` – `K` | | Go to string above (TAB) | `Up` | `Up` | | Go to string below (TAB) | `Down` | `Down` | | Toggle ghost note | `Shift`+`X` | `Shift`+`X` | ## Selecting | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | Select all | `Ctrl`+`A` | `Cmd`+`A` | | Add to selection: previous note/rest | `Shift`+`Left` | `Shift`+`Left` | | Add to selection: next note/rest | `Shift`+`Right` | `Shift`+`Right` | | Add to selection: staff above | `Shift`+`Up` | `Shift`+`Up` | | Add to selection: staff below | `Shift`+`Down` | `Shift`+`Down` | | Select to beginning of measure | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Left` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Left` | | Select to end of measure | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Right` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Right` | | Select to beginning of score | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Home` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Fn`+`Left` | | Select to end of score | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`End` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Fn`+`Right` | ## Editing ### General | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ----------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | Escape | `Esc` | `Esc` | | Undo | `Ctrl`+`Z` | `Cmd`+`Z` | | Redo | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Z` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Z` | | Copy | `Ctrl`+`C` | `Cmd`+`C` | | Cut | `Ctrl`+`X` | `Cmd`+`X` | | Paste | `Ctrl`+`V` | `Cmd`+`V` | | Repeat selection | `R` | `R` | | Insert one measure before selection | `Ins` | `Ins` | | Insert measures before selection | `Ctrl`+`Ins` | `Cmd`+`Ins` | | Insert one measure at end of score | `Ctrl`+`B` | `Cmd`+`B` | | Insert measures at end of score | `Alt`+`Shift`+`B` | `Option`+`Shift`+`B` | | Delete | `Del` | `Del` | | Delete selected measures | `Ctrl`+`Del` | `Cmd`+`Del` | | Show/hide properties | `F8` | `Fn`+`F8` | | Edit element | `F2` | `Fn`+`F2` | ### Duration | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | Set duration | `1` – `9` | `1` – `9` | | Enter tuplet | `Ctrl`+`2` – `Ctrl`+`9` | `Cmd`+`2` – `Cmd`+`9` | | Add tied note | `T` | `T` | ### Pitch | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------ | | Toggle accidental: flat | `-` | `-` | | Toggle accidental: natural | `=` | `=` | | Toggle accidental: sharp | `+` | `+` | | Move pitch/selection up | `Up` | `Up` | | Move pitch/selection down | `Down` | `Down` | | Move pitch up an octave | `Ctrl`+`Up` | `Cmd`+`Up` | | Move pitch down an octave | `Ctrl`+`Down` | `Cmd`+`Down` | | Change enharmonic spelling (concert and written pitch) | `J` | `J` | | Move note to higher string (TAB) | `Ctrl`+`Up` | `Cmd`+`Up` | | Move note to lower string (TAB) | `Ctrl`+`Down` | `Cmd`+`Down` | ### Notation | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | -------------- | ------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | Flip direction | `X` | `X` | | Use voice 1 | `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`1` | `Cmd`+`Option`+`1` | | Use voice 2 | `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`2` | `Cmd`+`Option`+`2` | ### Manual adjustment | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | --------------------------- | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------- | | Move text left | `Left` | `Left` | | Move text right | `Right` | `Right` | | Move text left quickly | `Ctrl`+`Left` | `Cmd`+`Left` | | Move text right quickly | `Ctrl`+`Right` | `Cmd`+`Right` | | Move selection up | `Up` | `Up` | | Move selection down | `Down` | `Down` | | Move selection up quickly | `Ctrl`+`Up` | `Cmd`+`Up` | | Move selection down quickly | `Ctrl`+`Down` | `Cmd`+`Down` | ## Text ### General | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | Add text: staff text | `Ctrl`+`T` | `Cmd`+`T` | | Add text: expression text | `Ctrl`+`E` | `Cmd`+`E` | | Add text: system text | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`T` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`T` | | Add text: tempo marking | `Alt`+`Shift`+`T` | `Option`+`Shift`+`T` | | Add text: rehearsal mark | `Ctrl`+`M` | `Cmd`+`M` | ### Formatting | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ---------------------- | ---------------------------- | --------------------------- | | Format text: bold face | `Ctrl`+`B` | `Cmd`+`B` | | Format text: italic | `Ctrl`+`I` | `Cmd`+`I` | | Format text: underline | `Ctrl`+`U` | `Cmd`+`U` | ### Lyrics | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | -------------------------- | --------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | | Add text: lyrics | `Ctrl`+`L` | `Cmd`+`L` | | Go to next syllable | `Space` | `Space` | | Go to previous syllable | `Shift`+`Space` | `Shift`+`Space` | | Lyrics: enter hyphen | `-` | `-` | | Lyrics: enter melisma | `\_` | `\_` | | Add lyric verse | `Return` | `Return` | | Go to next lyric verse | `Down` | `Down` | | Go to previous lyric verse | `Up` | `Up` | ### Chord symbols, Roman numeral analysis, Nashville numbers, figured bass | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ----------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | Add text: chord symbol | `Ctrl`+`K` | `Cmd`+`K` | | Next text element | `Space` | `Space` | | Previous text element | `Shift`+`Space` | `Shift`+`Space` | | Advance cursor: next beat | `;` | `;` | | Advance cursor: previous beat | `Shift`+`;` | `Shift`+`;` | | Advance cursor: duration | `Ctrl`+`1` – `Ctrl`+`9` | `Cmd`+`1` – `Cmd`+`9` | ## Other score elements | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | -------------------------- | ----------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ | | Show/hide palettes | `F9` | `Fn`+`F9` | | Search palettes | `Ctrl`+`F9` | `Cmd`+`Fn`+`F9` | | Add slur | `S` | `S` | | Add articulation: accent | `Shift`+`V` | `Shift`+`V` | | Add articulation: marcato | `Shift`+`O` | `Shift`+`O` | | Add articulation: staccato | `Shift`+`S` | `Shift`+`S` | | Add articulation: tenuto | `Shift`+`N` | `Shift`+`N` | | Add hairpin: crescendo | `<` | `<` | | Add hairpin: decrescendo | `>` | `>` | ## Score setup and formatting | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ----------------------------- | --------------------------------- | -------------------------------- | | Add/remove instruments | `I` | `I` | | Open Layout panel | `F7` | `Fn`+`F7` | | Toggle visibility of elements | `V` | `V` | | Decrease layout stretch | `{` | `{` | | Increase layout stretch | `}` | `}` | | Add/remove system break | `Return` | `Return` | | Add/remove page break | `Ctrl`+`Return` | `Cmd`+`Return` | | Reset shapes and positions | `Ctrl`+`R` | `Cmd`+`R` | ## File Operations | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | ------ | ---------------------------- | --------------------------- | | New | `Ctrl`+`N` | `Cmd`+`N` | | Open | `Ctrl`+`O` | `Cmd`+`O` | | Close | `Ctrl`+`W` | `Cmd`+`W` | | Save | `Ctrl`+`S` | `Cmd`+`S` | | Print | `Ctrl`+`P` | `Cmd`+`P` | | Quit | `Ctrl`+`Q` | `Cmd`+`Q` | ## User interface ### Playback | Action | Windows/Linux | macOS | | --------------- | ---------------- | ---------------------------- | | Play | `Space` | `Space` | | Show/hide mixer | `F10` | `Fn`+`F10` | # Instruments, staves, and systems # Instruments and system markings ## Overview The Layout panel (formerly called Instruments) gives you control over your instruments, the position of system markings, and some basic staff properties without having to leave the score view. All of the instruments in your score will appear in this panel. ### Accessing the panel Open the panel by clicking on the Layout tab:
If the tab is not visible, show it by selecting View -> Layout, or by pressing `F7`. ## Managing instruments ### Adding instruments Open the Instruments dialog: 1. Click the Add button at the top of the panel. 2. Choose Add instrument from the popup. You can also open this dialog by pressing `I`. See [Choose instruments](/basics/setting-up-your-score#choose-instruments) for information on using the dialog. ### Deleting instruments Select an instrument and click the remove button at the top of the panel, or press `Del`. This removes the instrument entirely, along with all the music it contains. ### Reordering instruments Select an instrument and click the up/down arrow buttons at the top of the panel to change its position in the score. Alternatively, drag the instrument up or down using the mouse. {% embed url="" %} ### Renaming instruments Click the cog button to the right of an instrument to show instrument name settings. Name on main score is the long name, usually used at the beginning of a score, and Abbreviated name is the short one, often used after the first system of a section. These can also be edited via [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). Part name is used at the top of a part.
To hide instrument labels entirely or control where the long and short names are used, use the settings in Format -> Style -> Score -> Instrument labels, rather than deleting the names here. ### Replacing instruments To replace an instrument in the Layout panel: 1. Click the cog button to the right of the instrument's name. 2. In the popup that appears, click Replace instrument. 3. Select your desired replacement instrument in the dialog that appears. 4. Click OK. ## Managing staves The Layout panel can also be used to add staves to an existing instrument and configure some of their basic properties. Initially, the panel only shows an entry for each instrument. To show the individual staves of an instrument, expand the instrument by clicking the small black triangle to the left of the instrument name. Staves are usually labelled according their default clef (for example, a piano will have a 'Treble clef' and 'Bass clef') ### Adding a staff to an existing instrument 1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves. 2. Click Add staff. The new staff is part of the same instrument but its notation is completely independent of its other staves. To create a staff which stays in sync with the notation of an existing staff, add a [linked staff](#adding-a-linked-staff-to-an-existing-instrument) instead. ### Adding a linked staff to an existing instrument Staves that are linked together will keep their notation synchronized, so any change on one staff will be reflected on the other(s). However, the staves can have different staff styles, which makes this useful for creating staff notation alongside tablature notation for guitar, banjo, ukulele, etc. To create a linked staff: 1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves. 2. Click the cog button to the right of the staff's name. 3. Click Create a linked staff. 4. Click the cog button on the newly-added staff to configure it, for example to change the Staff type, if required (see [Configuring staves](#configuring-staves), below). {% embed url="" %} ### Deleting staves 1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves. 2. Select the staff you wish to delete. 3. Click the remove button at the top of the panel, or press `Del`.
This will only work when an instrument has more than one staff. To delete the last staff, select and delete the instrument itself. ### Reordering staves To change the order of staves within an instrument, select a staff and click the up/down arrow buttons at the top of the panel to move it, or drag it up or down using the mouse. Staves cannot be moved between instruments. ### Configuring staves You can configure some properties of individual staves by clicking the cog buton to the right of the staff name: * Staff type allows you to choose between a Standard staff and a variety of predefined tablature types. * Small staff makes the staff small ('cue-size'). The size for small staves can be configured in Style -> Sizes. * Hide any measures that do not contain notation (cutaway) will prevent the staff from being drawn for any measures which are empty. See [Cutaway staves](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/showing-staves-only-where-needed#cutaway-staves) for more details. {% embed url="" fullWidth="false" %} For more information about staff customization, see [Staff/part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). ## Managing system markings System markings are items like tempo marks, rehearsal marks, voltas and jumps, which apply to all instruments in the score. By default they are shown at the top of the system, but in larger scores are often duplicated at least once further down. In orchestral scores, for example, it is common to duplicate them above the strings. You can control where these markings appear via the Layout panel. Every score has one 'instance' of system markings at the top, which cannot be moved or deleted, but you can add extra instances and position them freely. In a blank score, the instances are listed simply as 'System markings' in the panel, but as you add markings to the score they will update to list which types of markings are shown there. You can configure which types of item you want to show at each position. If your score uses big time signatures (above or across the staves), these will also be treated as system markings, and will appear wherever you create a system markings instance. See [Time signatures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures) for information on how to choose these styles. If you want to specify specific positions on the score where measure numbers will appear, these can also be treated as system markings. See [Measure numbering position](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-numbering#position) for more details. ### Adding a instance of system markings To add a new system marking instance: 1. Open the Layout panel. 2. Select the instrument above which you want the markings to appear. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Choose System markings from the popup. If you do not select an instrument first, the new instance will appear at the first available space from the top of the score. ### Deleting an instance of system markings Select a system markings instance and click the remove button at the top of the panel, or press `Del`. ### Moving an instance of system markings Select a system markings instance and drag it up or down to a new position, or use the up/down arrow buttons at the top of the panel. If you move one instance on top of another, the one being moved will replace the other, since two cannot exist at the same position. It is possible to show system markings below the bottom of the system by dragging an instance below the bottommost instrument. (This is not possible if the score only contains one instrument.) ### Configuring which types of system markings to show To choose which types of markings to show at a given position: 1. Click the cog button to the right of the instance in the list. 2. In the popup, click the eye buttons to toggle visibility for each item type. By default, all types are shown everywhere. The available item types are: tempo, gradual tempo change, rehearsal mark, system text, system text line, volta, jump, play count text, measure number and time signature (if you are using large time signatures). ### System markings and parts System markings cannot be configured in parts. There is only a single instance, shown at the top, with all types of marking visible. You can still make individual markings invisible in parts in the usual way. ## Hiding instruments and staves To hide or unhide an instrument, click the eye buttons to the left of the instrument label. This hides the instrument and all its staves completely. {% embed url="" %} To hide or unhide a specific staff: 1. Expand the instrument by clicking the arrow button to reveal its staves. 2. Click the eye button to the left of the staff. Hidden instruments and staves are not deleted, they are just hidden throughout the whole score and will not affect its layout. You can still create parts for hidden instruments. A hidden instrument will not play back, but hidden staves will. If you wish to hide an instrument but still hear it, do one of the following: * Unmute the instrument in the [Mixer](/sound-and-playback/mixer). * Hide all of its staves individually, but don't hide the instrument itself. {% hint style="info" %} Control whether instruments are automatically muted when hidden via Preference -> Audio & MIDI -> Toggle track mute by showing/hiding instruments in the Layout panel. {% endhint %} If you only wish to hide instruments or staves when there is no music for them on a given system, see [Showing staves only where needed](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/showing-staves-only-where-needed). # Showing staves only where needed By default, a score will show all measures of all staves on all pages throughout the score, whether they are empty or not. However, you may wish to have certain staves appear only on systems where they are needed. You may even wish to have a staff appear or disappear mid-system. MuseScore Studio provides a number of controls for this purpose. To hide a certain instrument or staff entirely throughout a score, see [Hiding instruments and staves](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#hiding-instruments-and-staves). ## Hiding staves when they are empty for an entire system A staff is considered 'empty' if there are no notes or other markings (with a few exceptions) on it for an entire system. It is a common practice in many printed ensemble and orchestral scores to hide these empty staves in order to save space:
### Hiding all empty staves To hide or unhide all empty staves in the current score automatically: 1. Ensure that nothing in your score is selected (press `Esc` if necessary). 2. Go to the Properties panel. 3. Under Score appearance, check the box for Automatically hide all empty staves.
This same toggle is available in Format -> Style -> Score:
It is common, though not universal, to show all staves on the first system of a score even if they are hidden on subsequent ones (in this way, the first page will always show the complete instrumentation). If you wish to hide empty staves even on the first system, uncheck the Don't hide empty staves in first system toggle. If Show brackets when spanning a single staff is unchecked, brackets and braces will be hidden when all but one the staves of a bracketed group are hidden on a system. Check this box if you want these brackets to remain visible. ### Excluding specific staves from being hidden The setting just described (Automatically hide all empty staves) applies to all staves in a score, but you can override this setting for specific instruments and/or staves using settings in the Layout panel (View -> Layout or toggle with `F7`). #### Overriding all staves of an instrument 1. Click the cog button next to the instrument name. 2. In the popup that appears, select an option for Hide empty staves: * Auto: follow the score-wide setting (this is the default option) * Always hide: the staves will always be hidden when empty (even if the score-wide setting is not turned on) * Never hide: the staves will never be hidden when empty (even if the score-wide setting is turned on)
The Always hide setting can be useful for temporary staves. For example: * A cue staff which appears for a few bars * A third stave for a keyboard part required for a specific passage (see also [Ossia](#ossia), below) By default the staves will only be hidden if all the instruments' staves are empty on a system. This is useful where you have an instrument with multiple staves, such as a piano or harp, but you wish for all of its staves to be shown even if some of them are empty (for example, if only the right hand is playing on a given system). If you do want to allow individual staves to be hidden, uncheck Only hide staves on a system if the entire instrument is empty. Note that this option is only visible for instruments with multiple staves. #### Override a specific staff within an instrument) 1. Click the arrow button next to the instrument name to reveal its staves. 2. Click the cog button next to the staff. 3. In the popup that appears, select an option for Hide empty staves: * Follow instrument: Follow the instruments' setting (this is the default option). See [Overriding all staves of an instrument](#overriding-all-staves-of-an-instrument), above. * Always hide: The staff will always be hidden when empty (even if the score-wide setting is not turned on). * Never hide: The staff will never be hidden when empty (even if the score-wide setting is turned on).
### Choosing which staff to show when the entire system is empty Where all staves of a system are empty, and stave hiding is turned on, the topmost staff will be shown by default. If you wish to choose another staff (or staves) to show in this situation: 1. Ensure that the Layout panel is visible (View -> Layout or toggle with `F7`). 2. Click the arrow button next to the instrument name to reveal its staves. 3. Click the cog button next to the staff. 4. In the popup that appears, check the box for If the entire system is empty, show this stave. Note that this setting works independently of all the other settings described here, and only applies when the entire system is empty. ## Hiding empty measures ### Cutaway staves There is a style used in some contemporary scores where individual measures are hidden when they are empty. These are sometimes called cutaway staves.
To use this style for a specific stave: 1. Ensure that the Layout panel is visible (View -> Layout or toggle with `F7`). 2. Click the arrow button next to the instrument name to reveal its staves. 3. Click the cog button next to the staff and check the box for Hide all bars that do not contain notation (cutaway).
Note that this hides the staff on a per-measure basis. Even if all measures on the system are empty, vertical space is still reserved for the staff, unless staff hiding is turned on, and the instrument label and brackets may still be shown. To prevent this from happening, it is a good idea to also set Hide empty staves to Always hide for cutaway staves. ### Hiding specific measures MuseScore Studio also allows you to make individual measures invisible on any given staff, whether empty or not. To set a measure to be invisible on a given staff: 1. Right-click the measure 2. Select Measure properties 3. In the dialog that appears, uncheck the Visible box for the staff or staves in which you wish the measure to be made invisible. ## Ossia An ossia is where a passage is notated on a small staff above or below the main staff to show an alternative (a different editorial reading, a realization of ornaments, a facilitation, etc.)
These can be created in MuseScore Studio using a combination of the features described above: 1. Add a staff as described in [Adding a staff to an existing instrument](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#adding-a-staff-to-an-existing-instrument). You may need to move it to the correct position relative to the main stave, and adjust any brackets that are automatically created. 2. Enter the desired notation on the new staff. 3. Ensure that the Layout panel is visible (View -> Layout or toggle with `F7`). 4. Click the arrow button next to the instrument name to reveal its staves. 5. Click the cog button next to the staff. 6. In the popup that appears, check the boxes for Small stave and Hide all bars that do not contain notation (cutaway). If you wish to hear the ossia play back instead of the normal staff, select the corresponding measures on the normal staff and uncheck the Play box in the Properties panel. If you would rather hear the normal staff, do this for the ossia staff instead. You might also want to hide the initial or final barline for the passage. To do this, select the barline and press `V` or uncheck the Visible box in the Properties panel. You may also wish to decrease or fix the distance between the ossia and the normal staff. To do this, use a [Staff spacer fixed down](/formatting/pages-and-vertical-spacing#staff-spacer-fixed-down) from the Layout palette. # Implode and explode ## Overview The Implode command is used to take multiple voices or staves and combine them into one. The Explode command, its opposite, is used to take a single voice or staff and decombine it into several. These commands can be very useful when arranging, and can also save time when inputting. ## Implode The Implode command allows you to do either of the following: * Combine multiple voices on the same staff into one voice * Combine multiple staves containing single voices into separate voices on one staff. ### Combine notes from multiple voices in a single staff into one voice 1. Select a range of measures in a single staff, where there are multiple voices 2. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Implode.
Imploding two voices to a single voice
All selected notes in the staff are now combined in voice 1. For this to work, all simultaneous notes in different voices need to have the same duration. ### Combine notes from multiple staves into separate voices on one staff 1. Ensure that there is only one voice in each staff to be imploded 2. Select a range of measures in the top staff and extend this selection downwards to include up to four staves 3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Implode.
Imploding two staves to two voices
Imploding multiple staves always works upwards, i.e. the topmost staff of the selection is the destination of the combined result. The notes from the uppermost staff of the selection that contains any music will go to voice 1, those from the next staff down to voice 2, and so on. Empty staves are skipped. The lower staves are not automatically cleared. ## Explode Explode allows you to do either of the following: * Separate multiple voices on one staff into single voices each on their own staff * Separate a passage of chords in one voice into single notes on multiple staves The two cannot be mixed in a single operation. If the passage contains multiple voices at any point, this will take precedence and it will be split into voices, but chords will remain intact. Unlike Implode, Explode will only work on whole measures. If you select part of a measure, the entire measure will be processed. This result will be notated on multiple staves, so there are some things to be aware of: * Exploding always works downwards, so the result will be notated starting on the stave containing the selected passage and on the staves directly below it. You may therefore need to move the passage to the topmost destination stave before exploding it, or may need to create extra staves to make space, because material may be lost if there are not enough staves available * Any existing music on destination staves will be overwritten. ### Separate multiple voices on one staff into single voices To separate multiple voices on one staff into single voices each on their own staff: 1. Select the passage you want to explode 2. If you wish, extend the selection downwards to include the destination staves desired 3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Explode.
Exploding two voices to two staves
Step 2 is usually not necessary. If you select only the passage on the source stave, MuseScore will determine how many staves are required, which is equal to the number of voices in the passage which contain notes. Empty voices will be skipped. If you do extend the selection, but select fewer staves than are required (or, if there are not enough staves available in the score), then MuseScore will only transfer as many voices as it can move to the available staves. For example, exploding a 3-voice passage onto two staves will move voice 2 to the lower stave, and then stop, leaving voices 1 and 3 on the upper stave.
Exploding three voices to two staves
If you explicitly select more staves than are required, the extra lower staves will be left untouched. ### Separate a passage of chords in one voice into single notes To separate a passage of chords in one voice in to single notes on multiple staves: 1. Select the passage you want to explode, ensuring it is all in a single voice throughout 2. If you wish, extend the selection downwards to include the destination staves desired 3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Explode.
Exploding three-note chords to three staves
If you select the passage on the source stave only, MuseScore will determine how many staves are required, which is equal to the largest number of notes in any single chord in the passage. If you explicitly select a range of staves, all the staves will receive notes. MuseScore explodes the chords one by one, following this logic: * If the number of notes in the chord matches the number of destination staves, the highest note goes to the topmost stave, the second highest note goes to the next stave down, and so on * If the number of notes in the chord is greater than the number of destination staves, the chord is split as above, but once the staves run out, any extra notes are lost * If the number of notes in the chord is less than the number of destination staves, then: * if the number of staves is an exact multiple of the number of notes, each note will be repeated an equal number of times; for example, exploding a two-note chord onto four staves, the upper note will go to the top two staves and the lower note will go to the bottom two staves * if the number of staves is not an exact multiple of the number of notes, the notes will be distributed one by one, and then the lowest note will be repeated on the remaining staves.
Exploding chords with different numbers of notes
# Mid-score instrument changes ## Overview When a musician is required to change from one instrument to another in the course of a piece, the instruction to switch is generally placed either after the music for the first instrument ends, or when the music for the new instrument begins. A return to the primary instrument is handled in the same manner. In MuseScore Studio, the instruction to change to a different instrument is handled by the Instrument change text element, which is found in the Text palette. This is a special type of item, quite distinct from other text types, as it also affects the playback of the instrument, and may affect aspects of the notation such as transposition. ## Adding an instrument change To add an instrument change: 1. Click on a note or rest to select the position for the change 2. Click on the Change instr. item in the Text palette 3. Choose which instrument you wish to change to in the Select instrument dialog that appears 4. Click OK. The instruction to change to the new instrument will appear above the selected insertion point in the score.
## Removing an instrument change To remove an instrument change: 1. Single-click an Instrument change text element to select it 2. Press `Del` or `Backspace`. ## Relabelling an instrument change To change the text of an instrument change: 1. Double-click an Instrument change text element to start editing it 2. Edit the text in whatever way you wish. Note that this does not affect which instrument is actually changed to. If you wish to alter which instrument the instruction changes to, you must delete the element and enter a new one. ## Instrument changes in the mixer Playback sounds for instrument changes are reflected in the mixer as separate channel strips stacked to the right of the primary instrument channel strip. These instruments are labelled in parentheses. You can change the assigned playback library, apply effects, adjust the volume, and mute, solo, and pan these channel strips just as you would any other instrument channel strip. For more information, see [Mixer](/sound-and-playback/mixer).
## Changing staff type Changing to a different instrument may necessitate the use of different key signatures, clefs, and even staff type. See [Staff type change](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-type-change) for details. # Staff type change ## Overview The 'type' of a staff refers to its properties: number of lines, distance between the lines, what kinds of noteheads appear on it, etc. To change the type of a staff throughout an entire score, see [Configuring staves](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#configuring-staves) and [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). However, it is also possible to change the appearance of a staff starting at any measure of the score by applying a Staff type change element and then adjusting its properties in the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. This can be used when changing between pitched and unpitched staves or for various experimental notation effects.
An example of a staff type change element
## Adding a staff type change 1. Select the measure in the score where you want the change to occur 2. Click the Staff type change item in the Layout palette: Alternatively, you can drag the symbol from the palette directly to the measure. Other than the item appearing above the measure, nothing will change in the score until you configure its properties. ## Setting staff properties When you apply a Staff type change to a staff, its properties override those which are set in the [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties) dialog, starting from the measure in which it appears. Not all properties can be modified via a Staff type change. The properties of these items are configured via the Properties panel. If you do not see this panel, select View -> Properties from the menu bar, or press `F7`. To configure the properties of a Staff type change: 1. Click the grey Staff type change icon which appears above the measure 2. Go to the Properties tab 3. Configure the properties under Staff type changes as necessary. Note that as you change these properties, the icon in the score will updated to reflect them, as well as the staff itself changing in appearance. These are the available properties: * Cue size: Makes the staff small (cue-sized), following the size defined in Format -> Style -> Sizes -> Small staff size. For a custom size, use Scale, below * Offset: Displaces the staff vertically. This is an offset downwards from the top line of a 5-line stave, so to align a 1-line staff with the middle line of a 5-line staff (for example), set this to 2sp * Scale: The size of the staff, and its contents, as a custom percentage * Number of lines: The number of staff lines * Line distance: The distance between lines, in spaces; 1 is 'normal' * Step offset: Offsets notes and other notation items vertically relative to the staff * Invisible staff lines: Toggles visibility of the staff lines * Staff line color: The color of the staff lines * Notehead scheme: Specifies which type of noteheads to use (e.g. pitch names, shape notes) * Stemless: Will draw notes without stems, flags or beams The remaining checkboxes toggle whether barlines, ledger lines, clefs, time signatures and key signatures should be shown on the staff. For some more details on these options, which are also available in the Staff/part properties dialog, See [Staff properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#staff-properties). # Staff/Part properties ## Overview The Staff/Part properties dialog allows you to change display properties of a staff and the properties of the instrument it belongs to. To open the dialog: 1. Right-click either an empty area in a staff, or the instrument label in the score. 2. Select Staff/Part properties… The up/down arrow buttons in the bottom left of the window will move between staves in the score. Note that any changes you have made to the current staff will be lost unless you click Apply first.
There are four different types of staff, called Style group in the dialog: * Standard, the most common type, which has two variants: * One for pitched instruments except for fretted, plucked string instruments. * One for fretted, plucked string instruments, which has additional options for setting the number of strings and their tuning. * Tablature, also used for fretted, plucked string instruments, with the same options for configuring strings. * Percussion, used for unpitched percussion instruments.
An example of each of the basic staff types
For each type, there are pre-defined templates to choose from in the [Advanced style properties](#advanced-style-properties) dialog (see below). [Replacing an instrument](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#replacing-instruments) can change the staff type, but be aware that doing this may sometimes create an undesirable result with incorrect playback – for example, when replacing a Standard type staff (e.g. Flute) with a Percussion type (e.g. Drum Kit). ## Staff properties The top section of the dialog allows you to customize the appearance of the staff. These options are common to all staff types. Note that all these settings apply only to the specific staff being edited. First column: * Style group: Shows the staff type (Standard, Tablature, Percussion). * Lines: The number of staff lines. Most pitched instruments use a 5-line staff, but percussion staves may have a different number, and most (though not all) tablature staves will have the same number of lines as the instrument has strings. * Line distance: The distance between lines, in spaces; 1 is 'normal'. Do not change this to make a larger or smaller stave; use Scale instead. * Extra distance above staff: Increases or decreases the minimum distance between this staff and the one above. This setting has no effect on the topmost staff of a system. It also affects all systems in the score. To change the spacing on a single system, use a [spacer](/formatting/pages-and-vertical-spacing#spacers). * Scale: The size of the staff, and its contents, as a custom percentage. To change the scale of all staves in a score, use [Page Settings > Scaling](/formatting/score-size-and-spacing#scaling). Second column: * Show clef: Whether clefs will appear on the staff. * Show time signature: Whether time signatures will appear on the staff. * Show barlines: Whether barlines will be drawn on the staff. * Hide system barline: Whether the initial barline at the left edge of the system should be hidden. * Merge matching rests: * Auto: Follows the score-wide setting in Format -> Style -> Rests. * On/Off: Whether simultaneous rests in multiple voices will be merged (drawn on top of each other), regardless of the score-wide setting.
Merge matching rests off (left) and on (right)
Third column: * Invisible staff lines: Makes staff lines invisible. * Staff line color: Change the color of the staff lines. * The Advanced style properties... button opens a separate dialog, described below. ## Advanced style properties
Some settings in this dialog are common to all staff types. Those in the first two rows are simply duplicates of settings found in the main Staff/part properties dialog (Lines, Line distance, Show clef, Show time signature, Show barlines). The Template dropdown, at the bottom of the window, lets you apply a a predefined template style to the staff. For tablature staves, the templates include various numbers of staff lines and notation styles. For percussion staves, the templates include settings for different numbers of staff lines. To apply a template: 1. Make a selection from the Template dropdown list. 2. Press the < Reset to template button. 3. Press OK. For all styles except percussion, the Preview shows a rendered example of notation that reflects the settings in the dialog, so you can see the effect of the changes you make. The remaining settings differ according to the current staff type. ### Standard and percussion staff styles only These settings are also duplicated from the main Stave/Part properties dialog. * Show key signature, Show ledger lines: Control whether key signatures and ledger lines should be drawn. * Stemless: Will draw notes without stems, flags or beams. ### Standard staff style only * Notehead scheme: Specifies which type of noteheads to use (e.g. pitch names, shape notes). See [Notehead schemes](/alternative-notation/custom-staff-types#notehead-schemes). ### Tablature staff style only * Upside down: When unchecked (default), the top staff line will refer to the highest string, and the bottom line is the lowest string. When checked, this is reversed (used, for example, for Italian-style lute tablature). The remaining settings are split into two separate tabs. #### Fret marks
To choose the font for fret marks, there are two options: * Text style: Use a text style. This provides a dropdown from which you can select which text style to use (by default, Tablature fret number). The Edit text style button will take you to the page for the chosen style in Text styles, where you can configure it like any other. * Tab font preset: Use one of eight built-in fonts, which support all the necessary symbols for various different styles, both modern and historic. This provides three sub-options: * Font: Which of the built-in fonts to use. * Size: Font size for fret marks. The built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 9–10pt. * Vertical offset: Applies a vertical offset to the symbols. Positive values move them down, negative ones move them up. It should not normally be necessary to change this, but it may be useful when encountering a font with unconventionally aligned symbols. The remaining options configure the notation style: * Marks are: Either Numbers (1, 2, 3...) or Letters (a, b, c...). When letters are used, 'j' is skipped. * Marks are drawn: Either On lines (i.e. vertically centered on the lines) or Above lines. * Lines are: Either Continuous (the lines will pass straight through fret marks) or Broken (lines will be masked when crossing fret marks). * Show fingering in tablature: Sets whether fingerings added from the Guitar palette should be drawn or not #### Note values
These settings configure how rhythms are indicated on tablature staves. The Shown as setting is actually the most important, as it determines which of the other options are relevant or enabled. There are three options: * None: No rhythm is indicated; all the other options in this tab will be disabled and/or ignored. * Note symbols: Rhythm will be indicated with symbols in the shape of notes above the staff. * Stems and beams: Rhythm will be notated using stems, flags and beams, just as on a standard staff. If Note symbols is selected, these settings apply: * Font: The font used to draw the note duration symbols. Currently five fonts are provided, supporting all the necessary symbols in five different styles (modern, Italian tablature, French tablature, French baroque (headless), French baroque). * Size: Font size for the note duration symbols. The built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 15pt. * Vertical offset: Applies a vertical offset to the symbols. Positive values move them down, negative ones move them up. * Repeat: By default, note duration symbols are only shown when the duration changes. This setting specifies when they should be repeated: * Never: Symbols are never repeated. * At new system: Always draw the duration symbol at the start of a new system. * At new measure: Always draw the duration symbol at the start of a new measure. * Always: Draw a duration symbol for every note. * Show rests: Whether note duration symbols should also be drawn for rests. If shown, they are drawn at a slightly lower position than those for notes. If Stems and beams is selected, these settings apply: * Stem style: Stems and beams can be drawn either Beside staff (always outside the staff, above or below) or Through staff (being drawn through the staff to reach the fret marks, just as stems go to noteheads on normal staves). * Stem position: Whether stems and beams are drawn Above or Below the staff; this is only available if Stem style is set to Beside staff (if Through staff is selected, stems and beams are always drawn below the fret marks). * Half notes: How half notes are indicated. On a normal staff, this is done by changing the notehead, which is not an option in tablature. The options are: * None: Do not draw a stem. * As short stem: Draw a shortened stem (only available when Stem style is set to Beside staff). * As slashed stem: Draw a stem with a double tremolo slash through it. ## Part properties {% hint style="info" %} This section of the dialog should more properly be called Instrument properties. The current wording is leftover from earlier app versions. {% endhint %} Instrument identifies which instrument is assigned to the staff. To change the instrument, click the Replace instrument button and select an instrument from the Select instrument dialog that appears. This replaces the instrument for the staff, including changing playback, staff name, transposition, etc. If there are existing [Staff type change](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-type-change) items on the staff, these may now cause unpredictable results. The default values for all the other settings in this section are taken from MuseScore Studio's instrument definitions. Long instrument name and Short instrument name are the labels which can be shown to the left of the staves on the score. To configure which are shown where, go to Format -> Style -> Score -> Instrument names. Usable pitch range defines the usable range for the instrument. By default, MuseScore will highlight notes which fall outside of these ranges. (The highlighting only affects the display on screen, and does not affect printing or exporting.) To disable or re-enable this functionality: 1. Select Edit -> Preferences (Mac: MuseScore -> Preferences) from the menu bar. 2. Select Note input. 3. Toggle Color notes outside of usable pitch range. There are two ranges defined: * Amateur: A more limited range which can be assumed to be practical for non-professional players. Notes outside this range are colored olive green/dark yellow. * Professional: The full range of the instrument which is accessible to professional players. Notes outside this range are colored red. Many of these range limits are subjective and open to discussion. If you wish to adjust them in your score, click the pencil icons next to each pitch name. Transposition specifies the instrument's transposition, i.e. the difference between how the pitches are notated and how they actually sound, when the score is not shown in concert pitch. This is specified as a combination of: * Octave(s): The number of octaves. * An interval between 0 and 12 semitones, selected from the dropdown. * Up/down: The direction of the transposition. For transpositions other than simple octave transpositions (i.e. where an interval other than Perfect unison) is chosen from the dropdown), an additional dropdown will be shown, Prefer sharps or flats for transposed key signatures, which specifies which key signature to use where there are two enharmonic equivalents available, for example B major and C flat major: * None: Match the type of accidental of the untransposed key signature, when possible. * Flats: Use the version of the key signature with flats, when one exists. * Sharps: Use the version with sharps, when it exists. * Auto: Use whichever version has fewer accidentals; if there is no difference, match the accidental of the untransposed key signature. ### Additional settings for fretted, plucked string instruments There is a final row, only shown for fretted, plucked string instruments (on both Standard and Tablature stave styles): * Number of strings shows the number of strings for the instrument. * Edit string data…: This button opens a dialog where you can change the number of strings and their tuning. See [Changing tuning](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff#changing-tuning) for details. * Don't reflect transposition in linked tablature staves: If turned off, any tablature staves linked to this stave will not reflect the transposition of the main stave. # Brackets ## Overview Brackets are used to visually group multiple adjacent staves together (usually instruments of the same family, e.g. woodwind or brass), and braces are used to group multiple staves of a single instrument (e.g. the grand staff of a piano) or adjacent instruments of the same or similar type. Brackets and braces are automatically added when you create a score via the [New Score dialog](/basics/setting-up-your-score), but you can easily add, remove or change them. Note that brackets and braces are drawn on all systems. You can add, remove or modify them on any system, but the changes will affect every system where they appear. They are added from the Brackets palette. ## Adding brackets To add a bracket or brace: 1. Select a range of staves by clicking a measure on the staff where you want the bracket or brace to start, then hold `Shift` and click on a measure on the staff where you want it to end 2. Click the icon representing the desired bracket type in the Brackets palette. Alternatively: 1. Select a measure on the topmost staff which you wish the bracket to span 2. Click the desired bracket in the Brackets palette (you can also drag it directly from the palette to the staff) 3. Select the bracket at the start of the system, then click the adjustment handle at the bottom and drag it down to the lowest staff you wish it to span. When you release the mouse button the bracket will snap into place. You an apply nested brackets using any of these methods. Newly created brackets are drawn outside of existing ones, so it usually easiest to start with the innermost and work outwards. However, you can edit the order later using the Column property (see below). ## Editing brackets If you select a bracket/brace, you can edit its properties in the Properties panel (sidebar). * Column: Moves the bracket inwards/outwards. * Span: Extends or retracts the end of the bracket/brace. ### Changing bracket span The top position of a bracket is fixed. If you need to move it, you must delete the bracket and create a new one. To change the bottom position, use any of these methods: * Select the bracket, click the adjustments handle, and drag it to the new position * Select the bracket, click the adjustment handle, and press `Shift`+`Up`/`Down` to move it from staff to staff * Select the bracket, go to the Properties panel, and change the Span property, which specifies how many staves the bracket should enclose. ### Changing bracket type * Select the bracket or brace that you wish to change * Click on a new bracket or brace in the Brackets palette. ### Customizing bracket appearance There are a few global properties for brackets and braces which are available in Format -> Style -> System under System brackets: * Bracket thickness: The thickness of a thick bracket * Bracket distance: The distance between a thick bracket and the staff * Brace thickness: The thickness (total width) of a brace. Note that this only applies when the Emmentaler and Gonville fonts are used, as these fonts do not include brace symbols and so the braces are drawn algorithmically * Brace distance: The distance between a brace and the staff. ## Deleting brackets To delete a bracket or brace, select it and press `Del`. ## Brackets and vertical justification Brackets and braces can affect the vertical spacing of staves: usually, extra space is given between bracketed groups, and staves enclosed by a brace are kept closer together. This behaviour can be configured in Format -> Page. See [Vertical spacing](/formatting/score-size-and-spacing#vertical-spacing) for details. # Rhythm, meter, and measures # Time signatures ## Overview Time signatures are applied from the Time signatures palette:
When creating a new score, the initial time signature can be set on the second page of the [New Score dialog](/basics/setting-up-your-score#time-signature). The default is 4/4, which will be used if you skip this page. ## Adding a time signature To add a time signature, or replace an existing one: 1. Select a measure, note or rest, or time signature in the score 2. Click a time signature in the Time signatures palette. Alternatively, drag a time signature directly from the palette onto the measure where you want it to appear. Currently, time signature changes can only occur at the beginning of a measure. Changing a time signature will cause any existing music that follows to be re-barred, and some items may be lost in this process, so the changes should be checked carefully. ## Deleting a time signature To delete a time signature, select it and press `Del`. If you delete the time signature at the beginning of the score, the music is treated as though it is in a nominal 4/4 and re-barred accordingly. ## Creating a custom time signature If you need a time signature that is not available in the palette, you can create your own using the Create Time Signature dialog. You can access this dialog from the Time signatures palette: 1. In the Time signatures palette, click More 2. Click the Create time signature button in the popup Or, from the Master Palette: 1. Select View -> Master palette from the menu bar, or press `Shift`+`F9` 2. Choose Time signatures from the list in the left of the dialog. To create your time signature in this dialog: 1. In Value, enter the numerator and denominator 2. If you want the time signature to be displayed differently than its real value, enter the text you wish to see in the Text fields 3. If necessary, adjust the beaming in the Beam groups section ([see below](#beam-groups)) To add the new time signature to the Time signatures palette, click the Add button. You can now add it to the score from the palette in the usual way. ## Controlling time signature visibility To toggle whether time signatures are to be shown on a particular staff (throughout the score): 1. Right-click the staff and choose Staff/Part properties... from the context menu 2. Check/uncheck the Show time signature box. To hide a specific time signature on all staves: 1. Select the time signature 2. In the Properties panel, under General, uncheck the Visible toggle (or simply press `V`). For controlling visibility of courtesies, see [Courtesy time signatures](#courtesy-time-signatures), below. ## Adding a local time signature Sometimes there may be different time signatures on different staves simultaneously. In this example, the global time signature is 3/4, but the right hand staff is notated in 18/16:
Bach: Goldberg Variations, no. 26
We refer to this as a 'local' time signature, i.e. one which applies only to a single staff, rather than to all staves. To add a local time signature, add it (either by dragging from the palette to the required staff, or selecting the measure and clicking a time signature in the palette) while holding `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`). Local time signatures always result in bars of the same length as the global time signature; you can think of them as putting an invisible tuplet over each bar (in the Bach example above, an 18:12 tuplet). It is not yet possible to have bars of differing lengths. It is also not possible to add a local time signature on a staff where there is any existing music following it. ## Resizing a time signature 1. Select a time signature 2. In the Properties panel, under Time signature, adjust the Scale values. The horizontal and vertical scale can be modified separately. Changing the scale affects the time signature on all staves where it appears. ## Time signature properties To open the Time Signature Properties dialog, either: * Right-click on a time signature and select Time signature properties from the menu * Select a time signature and click the Time signature properties button under Time signature in the Properties panel.
### Appearance These options let you change the appearance of the time signature without affecting its underlying rhythmic value. Choose between: * Text: Insert the nominal numerator and denominator that you wish to appear on the score (if empty, the real values will appear in the score) * Common time * Cut time * Other: a dropdown containing Medieval and Renaissance prolation symbols. ### Beam groups Here you can customize how groups of notes are beamed together. See [Setting the default beaming for a time signature](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/beams#setting-the-default-beaming-for-a-time-signature). ## Courtesy time signatures Normally, when a time signature change falls at the start of the system, a courtesy (also called cautionary) is shown at the end of the previous system. To disable or re-enable all courtesy time signatures throughout the score: 1. Select Format -> Style from the menu bar and 2. Select Clefs, keys & time signatures from the list on the left 3. Under Time signatures, check/uncheck the Show courtesy time signatures box. To hide or show an individual courtesy time signature: 1. Select the parent time signature (i.e. not the courtesy itself) 2. In the Properties panel, under Time signature, check/uncheck the Show courtesy time signature on previous system box. To control what happens around repeats and jumps, see [Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps](/notation/repeats/changes-and-courtesies-at-repeats-and-jumps). ## Time signature styles There are three options for time signature position available in the style dialog (Format -> Style -> Clefs, key & time signatures) under Time signatures -> Position: * On all staves: show the time signature on each stave (this is the default, and most common style) * Above staves: show the time signature above specific staves only, usually at a larger size * Across staves: show the time signature across the staves, usually at a much larger size For the 'Above staves' and 'Across staves' options, time signatures are treated as system markings and will appear at the positions you specify for system markings in the Layout panel. See [Managing system markings](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#managing-system-markings) for more information. This is followed by settings for Style and size, which are somewhat different for each of the three Position settings, and can be set independently for each style: * Numeral style, with three options: * normal * narrow (often used for 'Above staves' and 'Across staves' styles) * narrow sans-serif (often used for the 'Across staves' style, especially in band and film scores) * Alignment with barlines (for 'Above staves' only): whether the time signatures should be left-aligned or centered over barlines * Alignment across staves (for 'Across staves' only): whether the time signatures should be aligned to the top of the group that they apply to, or vertically centered * Scale: the size of the time signatures as a multiple of their 'normal' size; the horizontal and vertical settings are linked, but if you want to adjust them independently, click the lock icon to the right * Gap between numbers (scaled): the vertical distance between the top and bottom numbers in the time signature, scaled to the vertical Scale setting * Vertical placement: offset from the default vertical position If Show courtesy time signatures is turned on, the 'Above staves' style also has options for End-of-staff alignment: * Hang into page margin: allow the time signature to hang into the margin (only available if Alignment with barline is set to centered) * Inset time signature: right-justify the time signature to the margin, without moving the barline * Inset barline: right-justify the time signature to the margin, moving the barline inward to maintain the required alignment There are some more global style settings for time signatures available in the style dialog (Format -> Style): * In Measures, under Padding, some settings to configure the distances between time signatures and other items: * Clef to time signature * Key signature to time signature * Barline to time signature * Time signature to barline * In Measures, under System header, one more distance setting: * Time signature to first note (this only applies at the beginning of a system) * In Barlines, Use double barlines before time signatures has three options: * Always: always use a double barline * Never: always use a single barline * Only before courtesy time signatures: use a double barline before courtesies, but a single barline otherwise. # Stems and flags ## Stem direction ### Default stem direction MuseScore aligns the stems of [voice](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices) 1 notes according to the conventions of music theory. By contrast, voice 2 and voice 4 stems point downwards by default, while voice 3 stems point upwards. Voice 1 stems automatically flip upwards in the presence of voice 2 or 4 notes. ### Flipping stem direction 1. Select either the notehead, stem or attached beam (if any) 2. Use any of the following methods: * Press `X` * Click on the "Flip direction" icon in the Note input toolbar * Select a stem direction from the Stem tab in the Properties panel This action will flip any attached beam as well. ## Changing stem length 1. Select the stem 2. Use one of the following methods: * Press `Up` or `Down` to extend or shorten the stem * Change Length in the Properties panel ## Creating stemless notes To hide the stems of individual notes: 1. Select one or more noteheads 2. Go to the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel 3. Select the Stem tab 4. Select the checkbox next to Stemless To hide all stems in an instrument part: 1. Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part properties 2. Click on Advanced style properties 3. Select the checkbox next to Stemless ## Stem and flag properties Properties specific to stems and flags can be edited from the Stem tab in the Note section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel: * Stemless removes the stem (and associated beams) from the selected note(s) * Stem direction: * Auto determines the direction of the stem according to the voice of the selected note(s) * Up and Down override the default stem direction * Flag style sets the appearance of flags for the entire score to either traditional (default) or straight * Thickness determines the stem's width * Length determines the stem's length * Stem offset can be used to move the stem in a horizontal and/or vertical direction ## Stem and flag style Global settings for Stem thickness and Flag style may also be set in Format→Style→Notes. ## See also [Beams](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/beams) # Beams ## Overview A beam is a line connecting consecutive notes to indicate rhythmic grouping of eighth or shorter notes ([Wikipedia](https://w.wiki/AF$x)). You can change control the presence or absence of beams between notes as well as their appearance. ## Controlling which notes are beamed The default beaming of notes is determined by properties of the time signature. You can edit those defaults and thus affect the beaming of all notes within that time signature, and you can also override the beaming of individual notes to differ from the time signature defaults. ### Setting the default beaming for a time signature See the main chapter [Time signatures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures#time-signature-properties) Each time signature has a set of beaming defaults that control the beaming of all notes in that time signature. Since you will normally want the beaming consistent throughout the score, this is usually the place to start when altering the beaming. To edit the defaults for a given time signature, use the Time signature properties dialog. #### Accessing Time signature properties 1. Select a time signature within the score 2. Click the Time signature properties button in the Properties panel 3. Edit the Beam Groups section as explained below You can also access this dialog by right-clicking a time signature. Note: the settings made in this dialog are per score and also per staff. To apply changes to other staves within the same score, you can Ctrl+Shift+drag the time signature to another staff, which acts similarly to adding it from the palette. To make a customized time signature available to other scores, Ctrl+Shift+drag it back to the palette. #### Beam groups
To change the beaming of a note of a given duration on a given beat, click the corresponding note in the Beam groups section to toggle the beam into that note on or off. That is, if you click a note that is currently beamed to the previous note, that will break the beam, and if you click a note that is not currently beamed to the previous note, that will join them. You can also drag one of the Beam selector icons to any given note to set its beaming as explained further below. If you select the Also change shorter notes option, then changes made to any given note will affect notes on the same beat of shorter durations as well. Click `Reset` to remove all changes made since this dialog was opened. Note that this button does not reset settings back to the original defaults from the palette. To revert all changes made since the time signature was added, use the palette to replace the time signature. ### Overriding the default beaming for a specific note The time signature properties control the default beaming for notes in your score, but you can override those defaults on a note-by-note basis, such as to have one measure beamed differently from another. This can be useful when writing certain rhythms that might be more readable beamed in a non-standard manner, or in cases where the options available in Time signature properties are insufficient to create the defaults you want. It is also the only way to create beams over rests. Beam properties are set on the notes themselves. To change the beam between two notes, you will normally start by selecting the second of the two notes, as most of the beam properties control the beam into a note. Note that these properties can be set from the Properties panel or the Beam properties palette, but this discussion will focus on the Properties panel. To change the beaming of a given note: 1. Select the note 2. Select the Beam tab in the Note section of the Properties panel 3. Select one of the icons to set the appropriate property
From left to right, the available properties are: * Auto: resets the beaming of the note to the time signature default behavior * No beam: breaks any beams into or out of the selected note * Break beam left: breaks any beam into the selected note * Break inner beams (8th): breaks all but one beam into the selected note (for notes that would otherwise have two or more beams) * Break inner beams (16th): breaks all but two beams into the selected note (for notes that would otherwise have three or more beams) * Join beams: joins a beam from the previous note into the selected note (unless the previous note is set to No beam) ### Beaming over rests
To extend a beam over a rest: 1. Select the rest 2. Apply the Join beams or Break beam left property ### Beaming over barlines
To extend a beam across a barline: 1. Select the first note or rest after the barline 2. Apply the Join beams property ## Controlling the appearance of beams While breaking and joining beams is a function of the individual notes, the actual appearance of the beam can be controlled by selecting either the beam itself or any of the notes it joins. Thus, to set these properties, you can either: 1. Select a note that is currently beamed 2. Select the Beam tab within the Note section of the Properties panel or 1. Select the beam itself Either way, at that point, you will see the options to control the appearance of the beam. ### Feathered beams
The buttons in the Feather beams section of the Properties panel can be used to indicate gradual slowing down or speeding up of the joined notes (note this is not supported in playback). These options only apply to 16th and shorter durations using multiple beams.
* None: reset the beam to standard (non-feathered) appearance * Decelarate: feather the beams to fan inward to indicate a gradual slowing down * Accelerate: feather the beams to fan outward to indicate a gradual speeding up ### Beam angle
The angle of a beam can be edited directly by selecting it and moving the handles by dragging or using the cursor keys. But you can also use the settings in the Properties panel. You may need to click the More button first to display this section.
The two settings here correspond to the left and right handles on the beam and allow you to set the height of either side of the beam independently. You can also force a beam to be horizontal by enabling the Force horizontal property. ## Beam style A few global properties of beams can be set from Format→Style→Beams: * Beam distance: Set the vertical distance from one beam to the next. * Beam thickness: Set the thickness of all beams. * Broken beam minimum length : Set the minimum length of broken beams such as those used in dotted rhythms. * Flatten all beams: Check to make all note beams horizontal, regardless of context. ## See also * [How to add a beam over a rest](https://musescore.org/en/node/11370) * [Using the palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes) # Regroup rhythms ## Overview Standard music notation normally follows a set of conventions designed to facilitate the reading of rhythm. The basic idea is to group notes in ways that clarify which notes belong to which beat. Rules include: * sixteenth notes should be beamed in a way that clarifies each beat * eighth notes should be beamed in a way that clarifies each group of two beats * longer notes that start off the beat should be broken up with ties to clarify each beat or group of two beats A full discussion of this topic is beyond the scope of this Handbook, but for more information, see [this handout](https://musescore.com/user/2975/scores/5711373). Here is an example of a rhythm written incorrectly and then correctly:
MuseScore can correct many of these cases automatically. ## Regrouping rhythms To regroup rhythms according to the common conventions of standard music notation: 1. Select the passage you wish to regroup. 2. From the main menu, select Tools→Regroup rhythms. The rhythm itself is not changed—only the notation of it. ## See also * [Notation Rules: Rhythm](https://musescore.com/user/2975/scores/5711373) # Tuplets ## Creating tuplets A tuplet is a division of a duration into a number of equal units. The eighth-note triplet (one quarter note divided into three) is perhaps the most familiar type of tuplet:
### Simple tuplets To create a simple tuplet, such as the one above: 1. Select or navigate to a note or rest where you want the tuplet to begin. 2. Specify the duration of the entire tuplet group, by clicking a duration in the top toolbar or pressing the appropriate keyboard shortcut (for example, press `5` for a quarter note). 3. Specify the number of divisions (between 2 and 9) using one of these methods: 1. The keyboard shortcuts `Ctrl`+`2`–`9`. 2. Choose one of the options from the Add -> Tuplets menu. 3. Click the tuplet icon on the top toolbar and choose an option from the dropdown. The note or rest will be divided into the given number of units and you can continue entering notes as required. If you need to input a series of tuplets, try this shortcut: 1. Create the first tuplet. 2. Select the entire first tuplet as a range selection. 3. Press `R` (repeat) as many times as required. Each press will create a new tuplet after the first one. ### Custom tuplets More complex tuplets can be created as follows: 1. Select or navigate to a note or rest where you want the tuplet to begin. 2. Specify the duration of the entire tuplet group, as described above. 3. Open the Create tuplet dialog, either from the menu (Add -> Tuplets -> Other...) or by clicking the tuplet icon in the top toolbar and choosing Other... from the dropdown:
You can then define the properties of the tuplet via this dialog, and click OK to create it. ### Nested tuplets Tuplets can be nested within other tuplets:
To create a nested tuplet: 1. Create the outer tuplet as described above. 2. Select a note or rest within the tuplet, and create an inner tuplet in the same way. Tuplets can be nested many layers deep, until the durations become too small to represent. ## Tuplet properties The appearance of a selected tuplet can be controlled in the Properties panel.
* Direction: Whether the tuplet appears above or below the staff; if left at Auto (the default), this will be determined by context. * Number type: Whether to show just the number of divisions (e.g. '3'), the explicit ratio (e.g. '3:2'), or no number. * Bracket type: Whether or not to show a bracket; if left at Auto, this will be determined by context. * Line thickness: The thickness of the bracket. ## Tuplet style General settings for all tuplets in the score can be configured in Format -> Style -> Tuplets.
### General styles * Direction: Whether tuplets should appear above or below the staff. * Auto: The direction is determined by context (which is closely connected to the stem direction of the notes under the tuplet, like with slurs). * Up: Above the staff. * Down: Below the staff. * Number type: How to show tuplet numbers. * Number: Just show the number of divisions (e.g. '3'). * Ratio: Show the explicit ratio (e.g. '3:2'). * None: Show no number. * Number alignment: Where to place the number * Graphical center: In the graphical center of the bracket * Rhythmic center: Over the central rhythmic division of the tuplet (or in the case of an even number of divisions, between the middle two). ### Brackets * Bracket type: When to show a bracket over the tuplet. * Automatic: A bracket is shown according to context (generally, no bracket is drawn if there is a continuous beam matching the length of the tuplet and connecting the first and last divisions). * Bracket: Always show a bracket. * None: Never show a bracket. * Bracket thickness: The thickness of the line. * Bracket hook height: The height of the vertical hooks at either end of the bracket. * Extend bracket to end of duration: If unchecked, the bracket will end over the last note or rest inside the tuplet. If checked, the right end of the bracket will be extended to the position where the final division of the tuplet would appear, even if there is no explicit note or rest there. For example:
### Distances * Maximum slope: The maximum vertical distance between the left and right ends of the tuplet. If set to 0, all tuplet brackets will be horizontal. * Avoid staves: If checked, all tuplet numbers and brackets will stay entirely outside of the stave. If unchecked, they will follow the noteheads, beams and stems more closely, even if they go into the stave. The other options in this section should be self-explanatory. The horizontal distance settings all refer to the position of the ends of the tuplet brackets (the vertical hooks). ### Text style The text style of tuplet numbers can be configured in Format -> Style -> Text styles -> Tuplet.
This style has one additional option, Use musical symbols font for tuplet numbers. If checked, the tuplet number symbols from the music font (e.g. Leland) will be used instead of the specified text font, and their size can be controlled via the Musical symbols scale setting. # Barlines The Barlines [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) contains a full range of common barlines.
## Adding double and other special barlines ### Changing barline type for all staves 1. Select one or more barlines in a staff. 2. Click on the desired barline in the palette. Alternatively, you can drag a barline from the palette onto a barline in the score. Changes are applied automatically to all barlines at the same point in the score. ### Changing barline type for a single staff 1. Select one or more barlines in the score. 2. Hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) then click on the desired barline in the palette. Alternatively, you can hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) and drag a barline from the palette onto a barline in the score. Only selected barlines are affected when using this modifier. ### Adding mid-measure barlines 1. Select a note or rest (or several, as a list selection). 2. Click on a barline in the palette. This will add a barline marking after each selected note. The barline is for visual purposes and does not factor into any measure operations. If you wish to divide a measure, inserting a real barline in the process, see [Splitting a measure](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/pickup-and-non-metered-measures#splitting-a-measure). ## Changing barline length Here we are concerned with the vertical extension of barlines in order to link staves together, or their reduction to create partial barlines. ### Extending all barlines in a staff 1. Select a barline on the 'starting' (topmost) staff. 2. Do any of the following: * Drag the end handle downwards until it meets the destination staff (this method is the best for extending barlines through multiple staves). * Select the edit handle and press `Down`. * Check the Span to next staff box in the Barlines section of the Properties panel, then click Set as staff default. 3. Repeat if required for subsequent staves. The barline snaps into place, and all other barlines in that staff follow. {% embed url="" %} ### Extending selected barlines in a staff 1. Select one or more barlines (and their counterparts in the staves below if there are more than two staffs to join). 2. Check Span to next staff in the Barlines section of the Properties panel. ### Creating partial barlines Partial barlines can be created by adjusting Span from and Span to in the Barlines section of the Properties panel. ### Creating barlines between staves only (Mensurstrich) See [Working with Mensurstrich](/alternative-notation/mensural-notation-and-mensurstrich#working-with-mensurstrich). ## Barline properties You can edit properties specific to barlines in the Barlines section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel: * Style: The barline type (single, double, dashed, final, etc.). * Span to next staff: If checked, the barline will be extended to reach the next staff down. * Span from: The vertical position of the top of the barline. * Span to: The vertical position of the bottom of the barline. {% hint style="info" %} The Span from setting is an offset relative to the top line of the staff. As with most other vertical positioning settings in MuseScore Studio, positive values move down and negative values move up. The Span to setting works differently depending on whether Span to next staff is checked. If unchecked, this is an offset relative to the bottom line of the staff. If checked, the barline will be extended down to match the position of the top of a default barline on the staff below (i.e. either the top staff line or, in the case of a one-line staff, 2sp above the staff line). Exceptionally, in this situation, the offset works in reverse: positive values move up and negative values move down. One-line staves present one further complication: the default barline, which is drawn when both the Span from and Span to settings are 0, is drawn from 2sp above the line to 2sp below. The span offsets are however still relative to the (only) staff line and, if Span to next staff is unchecked, changing one will also apply the other (even if it is 0). Finally, the unit for these offsets is in all cases the half space. {% endhint %} The Set as staff default button will apply all the Span settings of the currently selected barline to all barlines on the staff. The Span presets buttons apply certain presets to the barline:
When applied, the presets will set Span from and Span to to specific values and, except for Default, will disable Span to next stave. ## Barline style Selected properties for all barlines in the score can be changed in Format -> Style -> Barlines:
* Show repeat barline tips: Adds 'wings' above and below repeat barlines. * Barline at start of single staff: Whether a system containing only one staff should have an initial system barline. * Barline at start of multiple staves: Whether a system containing more than one stave should have an initial system barline. * Scale barlines to staff size: Whether the thickness of barlines should be scaled on resized staves. * Mask barlines when intersecting text: Whether barlines should be masked when text crosses over them. * Thin barline thickness: The thickness of a 'normal' thin barline. * Thick barline thickness: The thickness of a thick barline (for example, the thick portion of a repeat barline or final barline). * Thick barline distance: The distance between the thick and thin portions of a repeat or final barline. * Double barline thickness: The thickness of the lines in a double barline. * Double barline distance: The distance between the two lines in a double barline. * Repeat barline to dots distance: The distance between the innermost line of a repeat barline and its dots. * Use double barlines before key signatures / time signatures: Lets you choose if and when double barlines are automatically shown before key or time signatures. * Left (start) repeat signs contains the following options: * Show barline before key and time signatures changes: When turned on, adds an additional barline before key and time signatures that are before a left repeat sign. You can also choose if this is a double barline or not. The thickness and distance settings are among those which may change automatically when changing a score's music font, if Style -> Score -> Automatically load style settings based on font is checked (which it is by default). ## See also * [Fixed measure widths](https://musescore.org/en/node/313555#comment-1169175) for a workaround to ensure barlines are aligned vertically between systems. * [Repeat signs](/notation/repeats/repeat-signs) # Measure numbering ## Showing and hiding measure numbers By default, MuseScore shows measure numbers at the start of each system except for the first in a section. To turn measure numbers on or off for the whole score: 1. Go to Format -> Style -> Measure numbers. 2. Toggle Show measure numbers. To configure whether a number should be shown or hidden on a particular measure: 1. Right-click the measure and choose Measure properties... 2. Change Measure number mode to Always show or Always hide. The default setting for Measure number mode is Auto which means that a number will be shown or not according to the score's [style](#measure-number-style) settings. You can also show a number on a specific measure by applying the 'Measure number' item from the Text palette (under More). This is equivalent to setting Measure number mode to Always show. To remove a number from a specific measure, you can select it and press `Del`. If this is an automatically generated number, this sets Measure number mode to Always hide. If it was an explicitly added measure number (and is not in a measure where a number would be generated anyway) this sets Measure number mode to Auto. ## Changing the measure number sequence There are ways to alter the sequence of numbers which can be useful in various circumstances. Note that this affect the visual numbering only. Internally, MuseScore Studio always numbers the bars consecutively through the whole score, starting at 1, and these are the numbers that will be shown in the status bar. ### Excluding a measure from the count 1. Right-click the measure and choose Measure properties... 2. Check Exclude from measure count. This option is automatically checked for pickup bars when one is specified in the New Score Wizard. ### Altering the numbering of a measure 1. Right-click the measure and choose Measure properties... 2. Change the value of Add to measure number. Both positive and negative values are accepted. This can be useful when starting a new movement in the same score. If the first movement is 100 bars long, the second will start at bar 101. If you set Add to measure number to -100 on the first bar of the second movement, it will now be numbered as bar 1. ### Resetting measure numbering for a new section By default, the numbering of measures always restarts from 1 at the beginning of a new section (after a section break). To prevent this so that the numbering is continuous: 1. Select the section break. 2. Go to the Properties panel. 3. Uncheck Reset measure numbers for new section. See [Using sections for multiple movements or songs](/formatting/using-sections-for-multiple-movements-or-songs) for more details. ## Measure number properties Measure numbers are text items, so the usual properties for text are available in the Properties panel under Text. {% hint style="info" %} It is important to note that measure numbers are usually automatically generated items, rather than explicitly entered by the user. As such, while it is possible to make adjustments to them via Properties, these changes may be lost if the layout of the score changes and the numbers are regenerated. {% endhint %} ## Measure number style This section describes all the options available in Format -> Style... -> Measure numbers.
### Measure numbers The top section contains the most general settings: * Show measure numbers: Whether measure numbers should be shown at all. * Show initial measure number: Whether a number should be shown on measure 1 (unchecked by default). * Text style: Which text style to use for measure numbers. 'Measure number' is the default, but there is also a 'Measure number (alternate)' style provided so that you can quickly switch between two different styles. You can also choose any other style from the dropdown, or define your own. * The Edit text style button takes you to the page in Text styles where the currently selected text style can be configured. ### Frequency Here you can specify how often bar numbers should appear. Start of each system is the default. ### Position These options specify where the bar numbers should be placed. * Align: The numbers can be aligned (via the next setting) relative To the barline or To the measure. * Alignment: Left, center or right. * Show: At which positions the bar numbers should appear. Choose from: * Above system: Only at the top of the system (above the top staff). * Below system: Only at the bottom of the system (below the bottom staff). * At system marking positions: At the positions where system markings are shown. * On all staves: On every staff in the score. When this option is selected, an extra Position setting becomes available, to specify whether the numbers should be Above or Below the staves. * Offset when above/below staff: The default offset for measure numbers above and below the staff respectively The At system marking positions option can be used if you need a more unusual configuration (for example, above certain sections of instruments, or above and below the system). See [Instruments and system markings](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#managing-system-markings). ### Measure number range at multimeasure rests
When shown, measure number ranges appear bracketed below their multimeasure rests by default.
Here, you can determine if and how measure number ranges are shown next to multimeasure rests. * Show measure number ranges: Turn measure number ranges on or off. * Text style: Choose the text style used for the range text. * The Edit text style button takes you to the page in Text styles where the currently selected text style can be configured. * Bracket type: Use square brackets, parentheses, or nothing. * Alignment: Left, center or right. * Position: Choose whether the range goes above or below the multimeasure rest. * Offset: Fine-tune the positioning of the range text. # Measure and multimeasure rests ## Measure rests A measure rest looks like a whole rest, but is centered within a measure and indicates that the entire measure (or a voice within it) is silent:
It is commonly used in all meters (except 4/2 and 8/4, which often use double whole rests instead). ### To create one or more full measure rests Use the following method if all selected measures are 'standard' i.e. with no [custom durations](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties#measure-duration): 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) a measure, or [range](/basics/selecting-elements#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) of measures 2. Press `Del` (Mac: `Backspace`). If one or more of the measures contains a [custom duration](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties#measure-duration), use the following method instead: 1. [Select](/basics/selecting-elements) a measure, or [range](/basics/selecting-elements#selecting-a-range-of-measures-and-staves) of measures 2. Press `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Del` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Backspace`). ### To create a full measure rest in a particular voice 1. In the appropriate voice, enter a rest that extends for the full measure 2. Make sure the rest is selected, then press `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Del` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Backspace`). If the voice contains only rests you can select the first rest and invoke the conversion keystroke. ## Multimeasure rests A multimeasure rest is used to indicate a run of empty measures, the number of measures being shown by a figure above/below the staff. The thick bar drawn on the staff is called an H-bar.
### Enabling and disabling multimeasure rests Multimeasure rests can be turned on or off with the shortcut `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`M` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`+`M`), or by checking Multimeasure rests in Format -> Style -> Rests. Multimeasure rests can be turned on/off independently in the score and instrument parts. (By default, they are off in scores and on in parts.) By default, if multimeasure rests are enabled, any sequence of two or more empty measures is automatically converted to multimeasure rests. You can change the minimum number of empty measures needed before they are combined into a multimeasure rest; see [Multimeasure rest style](#multimeasure-rest-style), below. ### Breaking multimeasure rests Multimeasure rests are automatically broken at important points, such as double barlines, rehearsal marks, key signature or time signature changes, section breaks etc. However, you can opt to break a multimeasure rest elsewhere as follows. 1. [Disable multimeasure rests](#enabling-and-disabling-multimeasure-rests) in the score or part 2. Right-click on the measure where you want the multimeasure rest to break, and select [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties) 3. In the dialog, check Break multimeasure rest 4. Click OK 5. Re-enable multimeasure rests. ### Multimeasure rest properties You can edit properties of multimeasure rests in the Multimeasure rest section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel: * Show number: Whether to show the number of measures * Number offset: Adjust the vertical position of the multimeasure number relative to its default position. ### Multimeasure rest style Extensive style settings for multimeasure rests are available in Format -> Style under Rests then Multimeasure rests. To change any of the settings, the box next to Multimeasure rests must be checked.
* Minimum number of empty measures: the number of consecutive empty measures required before a multimeasure rest is created. The default is 1, which may seem illogical, but this is because a single measure rest may still be treated as a multimeasure rest in terms of styling and spacing. If you wish to use multimeasure rests but do not want single-measure rests to be considered multimeasure rests in any way, set this value to 2 (or higher). * On single empty measure (these options are only available if Minimum number of empty measures is set to 1): * Use normal rest: notate as a normal rest (usually a whole rest). The Show number '1' checkbox specifies whether a '1' should appear. * Use H-bar: use an H-bar instead. This option will be unavailable if Old-style multimeasure rests is turned on.
Multimeasure rests generally require more horizontal space the more measures they contain. These options give you control over how exactly this should happen. * Proportional to time signature: the width of multimeasure rests will vary according to their time signature; for example, a 2-bar rest in 4/4 will require more space than a 2-bar rest in 3/4 * Fixed, based on time signature of...: the width of multimeasure rests will not vary according to their time signature; for example, all 2-bar rests will require the same amount of space. You can specify the time signature that is the basis for this calculation. The default, 2/4, means that a single measure rest (when treated as a multimeasure rest) will require the same space as an empty 2/4 measure. * Minimum width: the minimum width of a multi-measure rest * Cap width after: multimeasure rests will stop requiring any extra space once they exceed this number of measures.
* Vertical position: the default vertical position of the number (by default, half a space above the staff) * Break H-bar if number overlaps: whether the H-bar should be broken when the number is offset to overlap it * Center between staves on multi-staff instruments: if checked, when a multimeasure rest occurs on an instrument with multiple staves the number will appear centered between each pair of adjacent staves (the Vertical position setting will not apply). If unchecked, the number will appear on each stave.
* Horizontal stroke thickness: the thickness of the horizontal stroke of an H-bar * Margin within barlines: the distance between the barline and the vertical stroke of the H-bar, at either end * Vertical stroke thickness: the thickness of the vertical strokes that appear at either end of the H-bar * Vertical stroke height: the height of the vertical strokes of the H-bar.
Old-style multimeasure rests are indicated as combinations of whole and double-whole rests. To use this style, check the box, and the following options become available: * Maximum number of measures: the maximum number of measures to notate in this manner. After this point, an H-bar will be used * Spacing of symbols: the distance between the symbols of the rest.
An example of an old-style multimeasure rest
## See also Other measure-related pages: * [Measure numbering](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-numbering) * [Pickup and non-metered measures](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/pickup-and-non-metered-measures) * [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties) * [Adding and removing measures](/basics/adding-and-removing-measures) * [Mensural notation and Mensurstrich](/alternative-notation/mensural-notation-and-mensurstrich) # Pickup and non-metered measures ## Creating a pickup measure A pickup measure, also known as an upbeat or anacrusis, is a partial, or incomplete, measure at the beginning of a score or section. Note: By convention, measure numbering starts at the first complete measure. ### Specifying the pickup duration during score creation 1. Click on [Measures](/basics/setting-up-your-score#measures) in the "Additional score information" page (page 2) of the [New Score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) dialog; 2. Check "Create pickup measure"; 3. Choose an underlying time signature using the spin controls below. ### Converting a measure into a pickup 1. Right-click on the measure and choose [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties). 2. In the Measure duration section, next to "Actual", choose an underlying "time signature". 3. Click `Apply` and `OK`. * Alternatively, use the `←` (previous) or `→` (next) buttons to configure an adjacent measure. It is accepted musical practice to omit the same duration as the pickup from the final measure of the piece or of the same repeat section. The same method of shortening the measure applies here. ## Creating non-metered measures A non-metered measure is one which is less or greater in duration than the indicated time signature. A measures of less duration than the indicated signature may be created in exactly the same way as a pickup measure (see above). Other ways of creating non-metered measures are described below: ### Inserting notes and rests Extra notes/rests can be inserted in a measure with the help of either a keyboard shortcut, or by using a special mode of entry called Insert mode: #### Using a keyboard shortcut 1. Select the note or rest in the score before which you want to insert notes/rests; 2. Enter note-input mode; 3. Select a [duration](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-duration); 4. Press `Ctrl`+`Shift` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`) while adding the note/rest from the keyboard or mouse. #### Using Insert mode 1. Make sure you have the element selected where you want to start inserting notes/rests; 2. Click and hold the Note input icon, and select Insert (or if Insert is the current default, just press N); 3. Enter a note or rest as you would in step-time mode. Each note is inserted before the current cursor position; 4. Move the cursor forward and backward if required (using the arrow keys), to change the insertion point. If, at any time, the total duration of the notes and rests within the measure does not match the time signature, a small + or - sign will be shown above the measure. ### Joining measures This command joins selected measures into one measure. Method A. To join two measures only: 1. Select the barline between the two measures; 2. Press `Ctrl`+`Del`; or select `Tools`→`Remove selected range`. Method B. To join any number of measures: 1. Select the measures you want to join; 2. From the menu bar, select `Tools`→`Measures`→`Join selected measures`. Notes: (1) If you select measures on only one staff in a score with multiple staves, the same measures will be joined in each staff of the system. (2) Beaming may be automatically modified. ### Splitting a measure This command inserts a barline before a selected note, splitting the measure into two. Use one of the following methods: * Select a note; then hold `Ctrl` and click a barline in a palette. * Hold `Ctrl` and drag a barline (from a palette) to a note. * Select a note; then, from the menu bar, select `Tools`→`Measures`→`Split Measure Before Selected Note/Rest`. ## See also * [Working with non-metered music](/alternative-notation/mensural-notation-and-mensurstrich#working-with-non-metered-music). Other measure-related pages: * [Measure numbering](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-numbering) * [Measure and multimeasure rests](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-and-multimeasure-rests) * [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties) * [Adding and removing measures](/basics/adding-and-removing-measures) * [Mensural notation and Mensurstrich](/alternative-notation/mensural-notation-and-mensurstrich) # Measure properties ## Opening and using the dialog The Measure properties dialog allows you to adjust various properties of an individual measure, such as visibility, duration, numbering and width ('stretch'). {% hint style="info" %} To instead change all measures on the score, use the settings in Format -> Style... under the Score, Page, Measure numbers, and Measure categories. To change all measures of a specific staff throughout the whole score, change the staff's [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). {% endhint %} To open the Measure properties dialog, right-click on a measure and select Measure properties:
If you only want to adjust one measure, once you have made the changes you want, just click OK. If you want to adjust multiple measures, instead click Apply and then use the left/right arrows at the bottom left of the dialog to move between measures. The measure number being edited appears both at the top of the dialog and in the status bar. ### Staves * Visible: Uncheck this to hide this measure entirely on this staff. Note that this checkbox is disabled if there's only one staff in the score or part. * Stemless: Check this to use stemless notation in this measure on this staff. {% hint style="info" %} If you want to automatically hide all empty measures on a particular staff, see [Showing staves only where needed](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/showing-staves-only-where-needed#cutaway-staves). {% endhint %} ### Measure duration * Nominal: This is the [time signature](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures) set in the score (which cannot be edited here). * Actual: Adjust these figures to increase or decrease the real duration of a measure, for example for a [pickup bar](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/pickup-and-non-metered-measures) (anacrusis) or cadenza. ### Other * Exclude from measure count: Check to make the count skip the selected measure (this is checked by default for pickup bars created via the New Score Wizard). * Measure number mode: Choose Always show or Always hide to override the Auto score-wide [measure numbering settings](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-numbering) for this particular measure. * Add to measure number: A modifier to the number this measure automatically receives, which will apply from this point on. * Break multimeasure rest: [Break a multimeasure rest](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-and-multimeasure-rests#breaking-multimeasure-rests) at this measure. * Layout stretch: See [Systems and horizontal spacing](/formatting/systems-and-horizontal-spacing#layout-stretch). * Play count: This only appears if the measure is before an end repeat barline. It indicates the number of times the repeat section is played (defaulting to 2). Access this option more easily by selecting the end repeat barline and changing Properties -> [Play count](/notation/repeats/repeat-signs#changing-how-often-to-repeat). ## See also If you want to make all barlines aligned vertically between systems, see [Fixed Measure Widths](https://musescore.org/en/node/313555#comment-1169175) for a workaround. # Pitch # Clefs Clefs are applied to the score from the Clefs [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). ## Setting the initial clef for a staff MuseScore automatically applies the most appropriate clef(s) for the instrument when creating a [new score](/basics/setting-up-your-score). You can easily change this from the score window if needed. To change the clef at the very beginning of the score: 1. Select the initial clef or the first measure 2. Click the desired clef in the Clefs palette Or, drag the clef from the palette onto the first measure of the score (not onto a specific note within the bar). ## Adding a clef change To add a clef change anywhere in the score: 1. Select a note, rest or measure (except for the very first measure) 2. Click the desired clef in the Clefs palette Or, drag the clef from the palette onto a note, rest or measure (except the very first measure). It is sometimes desirable to have a clef change immediately after the initial clef, appearing after the time signature before the first note. This is achieved by applying a clef change to the very first note or rest of the score. Note that when adding a clef change, any existing music that follows will be repositioned to maintain the same pitches in the new clef. ## Deleting a clef change To delete a clef change, select it and press `Del`. Note that initial clefs and clefs at the beginning of systems cannot be deleted. ## Controlling the visibility of clefs Most commonly, the prevailing clef is repeated at the start of each new system, except for tab clefs, which normally appear only once at the start. This behaviour can be controlled via options in the Style dialog (Format -> Style) in the Clefs, key & time signatures section under Clefs -> Visibility. For non-tab clefs, you can choose between the two options: * Show all clefs on every system (the default) * Hide all clefs after the first system where they appear: only show at their first appearance For tab clefs there is a separate checkbox, Hide tab clefs after the first system where they appear, which is checked by default. To hide all clefs on a particular staff: 1. Right-click on the staff 2. Choose Staff/Part properties... from the menu 3. In the dialog, uncheck Show clef. ## Courtesy clefs Where a clef change falls at the very beginning of a system, the change is shown at the end of the previous system where it is called a 'courtesy' (or 'cautionary'). To configure whether courtesy clefs should be shown: 1. From the menu, select Format -> Style and choose Clefs, keys & time signatures 2. Under Clefs, toggle the Show courtesy clefs checkbox. If courtesy clefs are enabled, you can still hide an individual courtesy clef as follows: 1. Select the clef 2. In the Properties panel, uncheck Show courtesy clef on previous system. To control what happens around repeats and jumps, see [Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps](/notation/repeats/changes-and-courtesies-at-repeats-and-jumps). ## Clefs and transposition ### Using octave clefs \[To be added] ### Using different clefs for transposed and concert pitch \[To be added] ## Clef position relative to barlines When a clef applies from the first note of a measure, the clef is usually drawn before the barline by default, except in certain cases around repeat barlines. To change the position of a clef relative to the barline: 1. Select the clef 2. In the Properties panel, under Position relative to barline, choose Before or After. A clef change which occurs at the same place as a repeat or jump, but which only applies to the music after the repeat or jump (i.e. when continuing, not jumping), is normally placed after the barline. To configure this: 1. Open the Style dialog (Format -> Style) 2. Choose Clefs, key & time signatures 3. Under Clefs, key & time signatures at repeats and jumps then Changes that apply only after repeats and jumps, choose between Place clefs before repeats and Place clefs after repeats. In the special case of such a change occurring at the same point as an end-start repeat barline, the change can be placed between the end repeat and start repeat. To enable or disable this behaviour, toggle the Allow changes between end-start repeats checkbox. ## Clef style There are some more global style settings for clefs available in the style dialog (Format -> Style): * In Sizes, under Cue sizes: * Small clef size is the size used for cautionary clefs and clef changes * In Clefs, key & time signatures: * Default TAB clef lets you choose between two styles for tab clefs (Standard or Serif) * In Measures, under Padding, some settings to configure the distances between clefs and other items: * Clef to key signature * Clef to time signature * Clef to note * Clef to barline * In Measures, under System header, one more distance setting: * Clef/key signature to first note (this only applies at the beginning of a system) # Key signatures ## Overview Key signatures are applied from the Key signatures palette. When creating a new score, the initial key signature can be set on the second page of the [New Score dialog](/basics/setting-up-your-score#time-signature). The default is C major/A minor, which will be used if you skip this page. ## Adding a key signature To add a key signature, or replace an existing one: 1. Select a measure, note or rest, or key signature in the score 2. Click a key signature in the Key signatures palette. Alternatively, drag a key signature directly from the palette onto the measure where you want it to appear. Currently, key signature changes can only occur at the beginning of a measure (except for [local key signatures](#adding-a-local-key-signature)). Though they most commonly appear at the start of a measure, key signature changes can occur on any note or rest within a measure. Note: It is also possible, though uncommon, to add a key-signature mid measure by selecting a note then clicking a palette key signature, or dragging the key signature to a note. ## Deleting a key signature To delete a key signature, select it and press `Del`. You cannot delete the key signature at the very beginning of a score, and MuseScore Studio will give an error if you try. This is because it is impossible to know whether you want a C major/A minor key signature, or an 'open/atonal' one. Instead, add the key signature you want to the first bar from the palette. ## Controlling key signature visibility To toggle whether key signatures should be shown on a particular staff (throughout the score): 1. Right-click the staff and choose Staff/Part properties... from the context menu 2. Click the Advanced style properties... button 3. Check/uncheck the Show key signature box. Note that the music is still notated as though the key signatures are in effect, even though they are not drawn. To remove a key signature from a particular staff and notate the pitches with accidentals instead, apply a [local key signature](#adding-a-local-key-signature) of the [open/atonal](#open-atonal-key-signature) type to that staff instead. Usually, key signatures are repeated at the start of each system after the point where they first appear. To change this: 1. Open the Style dialog (Format -> Style) 2. Select Clefs, key & time signatures from the list on the left 3. Under Key signatures, select an option for Visibility: * Show on every system is the default behaviour * Hide after the first system where they appear will suppress the automatic restatement of key signatures on subsequent systems. To hide a specific key signature on all staves: 1. Select the key signature 2. In the Properties panel, under General, uncheck the Visible toggle (or simply press `V`). Note that the key signature will still appear on subsequent systems, unless you disable this behaviour (see above). For controlling visibility of courtesy key signatures, see [Courtesy key signatures](#courtesy-key-signatures), below. ## Adding a local key signature Sometimes you may need a different key signature to the global one on certain staves. We refer to this as a 'local' key signature. Unlike global key signatures, local key signatures can be applied to any note or rest within the measure, not just to the beginning. To add a local key signature, add it (either by dragging from the palette to the required place, or selecting the measure, or a note or rest within it, and clicking a key signature in the palette) while holding `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`). ## Deleting a key signature on a single staff If you have a global key signature but do not want the change to apply to a specific staff, you can delete it on that staff only: 1. Hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) and click the key signature on the desired staff 2. Press `Del`. ## Courtesy key signatures Normally, when a key signature change falls at the start of a system, a courtesy (also called cautionary) is shown at the end of the previous system. To disable or re-enable all courtesy key signatures throughout the score: 1. Open the Style dialog (Format -> Style) 2. Select Clefs, key & time signatures from the list on the left 3. Under Key signatures, check/uncheck the Show courtesy key signatures box. To hide or show an individual courtesy key signature: 1. Select the parent key signature (i.e. not the courtesy itself) 2. In the Properties panel, under Key signature, check/uncheck the Show courtesy key signature on previous system box. To control what happens around repeats and jumps, see [Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps](/notation/repeats/changes-and-courtesies-at-repeats-and-jumps). ## Key signatures and transposing instruments When working with a transposed score or part (i.e. with Concert pitch turned off), care must be taken when applying key signatures. All key signatures are 'sounding pitch', so, for example, if you wish to achieve a 'written' D major key signature in a B flat clarinet part, you need to apply a C major key signature (since the clarinet is written a tone higher than it sounds). ### Open/atonal key signature Some instruments (e.g. French horn, timpani) are conventionally written with no key signatures. To achieve this, add an open/atonal [local key signature](#adding-a-local-key-signature) to the staff. This is already done in scores created from templates. An open/atonal key signature looks like a C major/A minor one, but unlike all the other key signatures it is unaffected by transposition. ## Creating a custom key signature If you need a key signature that is not available in the palette, you can create your own using the Create Key Signature dialog. You can access this dialog from the Key signatures palette: 1. In the Key signatures palette, click More 2. Click the Create key signature button in the popup Or, from the Master Palette: 1. Select View -> Master palette from the menu bar, or press `Shift`+`F9` 2. Choose Key signatures from the list in the left of the dialog.
To create your key signature in this dialog, simply drag accidentals from the bottom of the dialog onto the staff above as required. Note: * To adjust the vertical position of an accidental on the staff, simply drag it up or down * The accidentals are automatically spaced from left to right in the order you add them. If you want to move them horizontally, hold `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) and drag them left or right * To remove an accidental, select it and press `Del` * To remove all accidentals, click the Clear button. To add the new time signature to the Key signatures palette, click the Add button. You can now add it to the score from the palette in the usual way. ## Key signature mode You can set the mode of a key signature (major, minor, Dorian, etc) if required: 1. Select a key signature 2. In the Properties panel, under Key signature, select an option from the Mode dropdown. MuseScore Studio does not currently do anything with this information, and the default setting is Unknown. However, it is included when exporting to MusicXML, where it may be relevant. ## Key signature style There are some more global style settings for key signatures available in the style dialog (Format -> Style): * In Measures, under Padding, some settings to configure the distances between key signatures and other items: * Clef to key signature * Key signature to time signature * Barline to key signature * Key signature to barline * In Accidentals: * Naturals in key signatures lets you specify when cancelling naturals should be shown in key signature changes * In Measures, under System header, one more distance setting: * Clef/key signature to first note (this only applies at the beginning of a system) * In Barlines, Use double barlines before key signatures has three options: * Always: always use a double barline * Never: always use a single barline * Only before courtesy key signatures: use a double barline before courtesies, but a single barline otherwise ## See also * [Transposition](/notation/pitch/transposition) # Transposition ## Overview Transposition is the act of raising or lowering the pitch of a selection of notes by the same interval. In MuseScore Studio, you can transpose your music using keyboard shortcuts, or via the Transpose dialog. ## Transposing with keyboard shortcuts To transpose with keyboard shortcuts, first select a range of notes (See [Selecting elements](/basics/selecting-elements)). Then use one of the following options, depending on how you need to transpose your music: ### Transpose chromatically Press `Up` or `Down` to move the selection up/down in semitone steps ### Transpose diatonically Press `Alt`+`Shift`+`Up`/`Down` to move the selection up/down in scale degrees (Mac: `Option`+`Shift`+`Up`/`Down`). ### Transpose by an octave Press `Ctrl`+`Up`/`Down` to move the selection up/down in octave steps (Mac: `Cmd`+`Up`/`Down`). ## Using the transpose dialog The Transpose dialog gives you more control over transposition, with options to transpose to selected keys or by specific intervals. First select a range of notes you wish to transpose. (See [Selecting elements](/basics/selecting-elements)). If no selection is made, the whole score is automatically selected for transposition. Then open the dialog by selecting Tools → Transpose...
### Transpose Chromatically When this is selected, you can choose to transpose to a specific key, or by specified interval. #### To transpose chromatically to a specific key: 1. Select To key 2. Select whether to transpose to the Closest key (relative to the current key signature of the selection), or Up or Down to the destination key signature 3. Choose your destination key signature from the drop down menu 4. Leave Transpose key signatures selected to transpose any existing key signatures in your selection (deselecting this will leave any existing key signatures unchanged) 5. Leave Transpose chord symbols and fretboard diagrams selected to transpose any existing chord symbols and fretboard diagrams in your selection (deselecting this will leave any existing chord symbols and fretboard diagrams unchanged) 6. Click OK #### To transpose chromatically by interval To transpose selected notes up or down in semitone increments: 1. Select By interval 2. Select whether to transpose your selection Up or Down by the specified interval 3. Select the transposition interval from the drop down menu 4. Select options for Transpose key signatures and Transpose chord symbols and fretboard diagrams as required (see above) 5. Click OK ### Transpose Diatonically Select this to transpose the selection by a specified interval without changing the existing key signature(s). Note: the intervallic relationships between pitches in your selection will change as a result! 1. Select Transpose Diatonically 2. Select whether to transpose your selection Up or Down by the specified interval 3. Leave Keep degree alterations selected to retain any accidentals in the selection. Accidentals will be modified relative to the existing key signature. Deselecting this will remove any existing accidentals upon transposition. 4. Leave Transpose chord symbols and fretboard diagrams selected to transpose any existing chord symbols and fretboard diagrams in your selection (see above) 5. Click OK ## Working with transposing instruments ### Transposed and concert pitch Transposing instruments (such as the clarinet, French horn, trumpet etc.) are notated at a different pitch (and key signature) to how they sound. The notated pitch is called the written pitch, while the actual pitch is called concert or sounding pitch. By default the program is displayed with all the staves at written pitch. However, if you wish to view the score at concert pitch just check the "Concert pitch" box (to the left of the tuning fork icon) in the status bar.
### Setting the interval of transposition When you set up a score in the [New Score](/basics/setting-up-your-score), or [Add or remove instruments](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings) dialogs, transposed key signatures are automatically applied to any transposing instruments. However if for any reason you need to set up the staff transposition manually, this is how to do it. 1. Right-click on the instrument staff and select [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties); 2. Next to "Transpose" in the lower part of the dialog, select the interval that the instrument sounds above/below concert pitch. (Music for the Bb clarinet, for example, is written a tone above its sounding pitch and the transpose setting is therefore a major second down.)\\
3. Click `OK`. The correct transposed key signature will now appear on the staff. ### Controlling enharmonic spelling The enharmonic spelling of the transposed key signature, whether in sharps or flats, is set in Staff/Part properties (see [Setting the interval of transposition ](#setting-the-interval-of-transposition)). To change the enharmonic spelling of pitches in the score, see [Change spelling](/notation/pitch/respell-pitches). # Octave lines ## Overview Octave (Ottava) lines are used to indicate that a section of music is to be played one or more octaves above or below written pitch; the line may be dotted or solid: 8--------┐or 8va--------┐: Play one octave above written pitch.\ 8--------┘or 8va--------┘: Play one octave below written pitch. 8va alta/bassa lines are particularly common in piano scores, though they are sometimes used in other instrumental music. 15ma alta (2 octaves above) and 15ma bassa (2 octaves below) are also occasionally used. MuseScore automatically adjusts playback of the score under the ottava to the correct pitch. Ottava lines may be found in the Lines [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). ## Adding an octave line to your score See [Adding a line to your score](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#adding-a-line-to-your-score). To adjust the range and vertical position of the line, see [Adjusting elements directly](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly). ## Octave line properties Properties specific to the selected ottava(s) can be adjusted in the Ottava section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel, namely: ### Style tab Type: Specifies whether the Ottava line is 8va, 8vb etc.\ Show number only: Hides any text (such as “va”).\ Show line: Makes the line visible / invisible. Text is unaffected.\ Allow diagonal: Allow line to slope if required. For other properties in this tab, see [Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-properties). ### Text tab This has a similar user interface to general lines (see [Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-properties)), but uses special code to specify the ottava text. ## Octave line style Default properties for ottavas can be adjusted in `Format`→`Style`→`Ottava`.
# Noteheads ## Overview This chapter discusses the appearance of noteheads in MuseScore. ### Notehead schemes One aspect of music notation systems is notehead scheme. A scheme is a set of rules used to decide notehead shape's meaning, some of which are supported in MuseScore. Supported schemes relate notehead meaning to a note's: * duration: as in the most widely used scheme. * pitch (using movable-do or absolute pitch solfege): literally written on it, and * pitch (relative pitch using shape note solfege): as in "shape note notation" (see reference under [External links](##external-links)). The most widely used scheme is very likely the only one known to most musicians. It is referred to as "Normal" in MuseScore and is the default setting for a new staff. Details of the nine schemes available in MuseScore are covered in [Custom staff types:Notehead scheme](/alternative-notation/custom-staff-types). Understanding relative pitch notations (shape note solfege, shape note notation) can enhance the reader's comprehension of this chapter. Most of the time, a notehead shape conveys one specific meaning, and that meaning is only associated with one notehead shape. Shape note solfege is like a variant of movable-do solfege that belongs to the exceptions. For example, in one type of "shape note notation", a triangle must be used to notate a relatively pitched "C4", but triangles are also read as relatively pitched "C"s or "F"s only, and triangles must sing "Fa" or a syllable agree upon by singers on-site. The loosely related shape note solfege notates interval perception much better than the "Normal" setting. ### Notehead shape
Shown above, the diamond notehead can be used for harmonic notes in guitar, violin etc; and slash notehead for guitar strums etc. The cross is also known as crosshead, ghost note, or dead note. Final display of notehead shape in MuseScore is determined by three factors: the notehead type factor, the pitch factor, and the duration factor (or note-value, rhythm). #### Pitch factor Note pitch may affect affect notehead shape, depending on the scheme, but it only happens on note(s) that do not use an overriding Notehead type property. See ["Notehead type factor" section](#notehead-type-factor). "Normal" notehead scheme does not use pitch to determine notehead shape. #### Duration factor The duration factor is determined by a note's duration. To edit duration see [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) and [Editing notes and rests](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests) chapters. It also can be [visually overridden](#changing-notehead-shape) for an individual note, while keeping the real value and playback intact. #### Notehead type factor Options available for notehead type factor depends on [staff type](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#overview): * On Standard staffs (type 1a, type 1b), there are three levels: 1. Level 1 Notehead scheme of a staff : Default is "Normal". 2. Level 2 Notehead scheme of a note (option named "Notehead System" in Musescore 4.1.1): * The default option "Auto" means "ignore this level". * Other options: scheme to use on this note, overrides Level 1. 3. Level 3 Notehead type property of a note. Affects notehead shape if and only if the result scheme of Level 1 and Level 2 is "Normal". * [Tablatures](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation) (type 2) do not use notes. To change selected fret number(s) into crosshead, click the cross item in the Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes). To enclose selected fret number(s) with brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note), use `Shift`+`X`. Only the first two items of Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes) works on Tablatures. * On percussion staffs (type 3), instrument (like snare or hi-hat, not the "drumset" MuseScore Instrument) determines the notehead type factor. See [Entering and editing percussion notation: Notehead shape](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/entering-and-editing-percussion-notation#notehead) chapter. Notehead scheme is used to determine notehead shape unless overridden by individual note's Notehead type property. When notehead scheme is not overridden, note pitch may affect notehead shape, depending on the scheme. "Normal" notehead scheme does not use pitch to determine notehead shape. When a note uses an overriding Notehead type property, note pitch information does not affect notehead shape at all. ## Changing notehead shape Notehead type factor * (Valid on standard staffs only) To change level 1 notehead scheme of a single staff, affecting all notes: 1. Right click on an empty part of the desired staff and select Staff/Part properties. 2. Click on the Advanced style properties button (opens Edit Staff Type window). 3. Select an option in Notehead scheme dropdown. * (Valid on standard staffs only) To change level 2 notehead scheme of note(s): 1. Select note(s) on a score. 2. In the Properties panel, open Note: Head tab. 3. select an option from the Notehead system dropdown (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it): the default "Auto" means "ignore this level". * (Valid on standard staffs only) To change level 3 notehead type property: 1. Select note(s) on a score. 2. Use one of the following: * In Properties panel, open Note: Head tab, select a Notehead type, or * Click on an item in the Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes), or drag it onto a notehead in the score. * To change selected fret number(s) into crosshead, click the cross item in the Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes). To enclose selected fret number(s) with brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note), use `Shift`+`X`. * To change noteheads on percussion staffs, see [Entering and editing percussion notation: Notehead shape](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/entering-and-editing-percussion-notation#notehead) chapter. Duration factor * To change note duration, see [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) and [Editing notes and rests](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests). * To change the apparent duration without altering real value so that playback is not affected: 1. Select note(s) on a score. 2. In the Properties panel, open Note: Head tab. 3. Select the desired option from the Override visual duration (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it): the default "Auto" means "no override" ## Adding pitch information to notes There are six methods to change "pitch". Most of the time, a note's pitch only affects its staff space / vertical position, to change it: * Change note pitch, see [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) and [Editing notes and rests](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests). * Modify the playback pitch of note(s) on score without altering notation: In Properties panel, click General: Playback , edit Tuning (cents). This is useful for reasons explained in Musescore 3 Handbook's [Tuning systems, microtonal notation system, and playback](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/tuning-systems-microtonal-notation-system-and-playback). Does not work on instruments using Muse sounds (yet) on Musescore 4.1.1 [Tablatures](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation), [percussion staffs](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/entering-and-editing-percussion-notation#notehead) and some notehead scheme (see [Overview](#overview)) use notehead shape to convey pitch information: * The brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note) item in Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes) can be added to a note or accidental. * To change selected fret number(s) into crosshead, click the cross item in the Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes). To enclose selected fret number(s) with brackets (parentheses, dead note or ghost note), use `Shift`+`X`. * To use custom notehead shape for visual pitch representation: 1. [Change level 1 setting](#changing-notehead-shape) as required for the staff. 2. Use a level 2 overriding setting on selected note(s): 1. Select note(s) on a score. 2. In the Properties panel, open Note: Head tab. 3. Select an "Normal" from the Notehead system dropdown (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it). 3. Assign level 3 notehead type property. Use either one of the following: * In Properties panel, open Note: Head tab, select a Notehead type, or * Click on an item in the Noteheads [palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes), or drag it onto a notehead in the score. 4. These note(s) will be always use this item, regardless of [any future pitch change by user](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests) unlike other notes on this staff. 5. [Change duration factor](#changing-notehead-shape) as required. * To loosen the relationship between note vertical position and pitch so that all notes on a staff create desired playback, take advantage of ['Transposing instruments' feature](/notation/pitch/transposition#working-with-transposing-instruments). ## Changing notehead direction To move notehead(s) horizontally to the other side of stem, use one of the following: * Press `Shift`+`X`, or * In Properties panel, open Note: Head tab, select a Notehead direction (you may need to click "Show more" at the bottom of the panel to reveal it).\\
(Note: Contrast this command with `X` which moves the stem and beam horizontally and vertically to other side of the notehead) ## Notehead properties
With at least one note selected in the score, notehead properties can be modified in the Properties panel in the Note section under the Head tab as follows: * Notehead parentheses: Add or remove parentheses to a single notehead or multiple selected noteheads. When a chord is selected a single set of parentheses will be drawn across the entire chord. You can break the parentheses into groups by selecting a single note in a parenthesized chord and pressing the Normal notehead button. Properties such as visibility and offsets can be set individually for either the left or right parenthesis. * Notehead type: See [overview](#overview) and [changing notehead shape](#changing-notehead-shape). * Hide notehead: Makes notehead invisible, see [Properties: visibility](/basics/properties-panel#visibility). * Small notehead * Duration dot position: This provides an alternative vertical offset for the duration dot. * Show more / Show less button * Notehead system: level 2 Notehead scheme, see [Overview](#overview). The default "Auto" means "ignore this level". * Override visual duration: change duration factor, see [Overview](#overview). "Auto" means "no override". * Note direction: See [Changing notehead direction](#changing-notehead-direction) (above). * Notehead offset: This changes the offset of the notehead only (to change the offset of the complete note, use "Offset" in Properties: Appearance instead). ## Notehead style and font There are 8 font options (two new options compared to MuseScore 3) for notehead set in Format→Style→Score. Notehead does not use style profiles ([Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles)).\ Noteheads [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) is displayed with Bravura font. ## Sharing noteheads between voices When two notes in different voices coincide on the same beat, they can either share a single notehead, or else be offset to allow the display of both noteheads. This is done automatically by MuseScore according to certain rules (see below). To force two offset noteheads in different voices to share a single notehead, use one of the following methods: * Make the smaller-value notehead [invisible](/basics/properties-panel#visibility). This works for the majority of cases. * Select the smaller value notehead and in the Note section of the Properties toolbar change "Head type (visual only)" to that of the higher value note. Rules for automatically sharing or offsetting noteheads: * Notes with stems in the same direction do not share noteheads. * Dotted notes do not share noteheads with undotted notes. * Black notes do not share noteheads with white notes. * Whole notes never share noteheads. ### Remove duplicate fretmarks in tablature If you are using paired standard and tablature staves you will come across situations where a shared notehead in the standard staff generates two fretmarks in tablature. In this case simply hide one of the fretmarks by making it [invisible](/basics/properties-panel#visibility). ## See also * [Entering and editing percussion notation](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/inputting-percussion-notation) ## External links * [The Music Notation Project Wiki > Shape Note Notation](https://musicnotation.org/wiki/notation-systems/shape-note-notation/) * [IMSLP.org Wiki > 4-shape notation](https://imslp.org/wiki/Category:4-shape_notation) * [IMSLP.org Wiki > 7-shape notation](https://imslp.org/wiki/Category:7-shape_notation) # Ambitus An ambitus indicates the range of notes included within a staff. It is used to indicate the appropriate voice for a particular part. (See [Ambitus](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ambitus_$music$) on Wikipedia.) ## Adding an ambitus to your score To create an ambitus, use either of these methods: * Select the desired start clef and click on the ambitus symbol in either the Pitch or Lines palette * Drag the ambitus symbol from either the Pitch or Lines palette and drop it onto the desired start clef. ## Changing the range of an ambitus You can change the range of an ambitus via the Properties panel. To update manually, set the values for Top note and Bottom note as required. To do so automatically, click the Update to match the notes on the staff button. ## Ambitus properties These properties are also available in the Properties panel (under Show more): * Direction * Notehead type and Notehead duration * Line thickness # Respell pitches ## Manually changing the enharmonic spelling of notes To change the enharmonic spelling of a note, or notes, in both transposed and concert pitch views: 1. Select one or more notes. 2. Press `J`. 3. Continue pressing `J` to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents. To change the enharmonic spelling in the transposed pitch view, without affecting the concert pitch view, or vice versa: 1. Select one or more notes. 2. Press `Ctrl`+`J` (Mac: `Cmd`+`J`). 3. Continue pressing the same combination of keys to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents. {% hint style="info" %} These features are intended to work with single notes or a selection of multiple notes with the same pitch. If the pitches of selected notes are not all the same, the result may be undesirable. {% endhint %} ## Automatically respelling all notes in a selection ### Respell pitches 1. Select one or more notes. 2. From the menu, select Tools -> Respell pitches with sharps or Respell pitches with flats. ### Optimize enharmonic spelling 1. Select one or more notes. 2. From the menu, select Tools -> Enharmonic spelling -> Optimize enharmonic spelling. {% hint style="info" %} You can set a custom shortcut for any of the above actions in Preferences -> Shortcuts. {% endhint %} # Expressive markings # Articulations This chapter discusses symbols available in the Articulations palette (accents, staccato, vibrato markings etc). To add verbal articulation objects available in the Text palette (legato, pizz., arco, tremolo etc) to a score, see [Entering and editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text) chapter. Guitar articulation is covered in chapters under [Idiomatic notation: Guitar](/idiomatic-notation/guitar). Brass or woodwind articulation (fall, doit, plop, scoop) is covered in [Arpeggios and glissandi](/notation/expressive-markings/arpeggios-and-glissandos#bends). ## Adding articulations to a score ### Keyboard shortcuts To add an articulation with a keyboard shortcut: 1. Select one or more notes 2. Apply the relevant shortcut from the list below: * Marcato: `Shift`+`O` * Accent: `Shift`+`V` * Tenuto: `Shift`+`N` * Staccato: `Shift`+`S`. ### From the toolbar
Certain articulations (accent, marcato, staccato, and tenuto) can be added from the note input toolbar: 1. Select one or more notes 2. Click on the desired icon in the articulations toolbar area. ### Articulations palette
The Articulations palette
To add an item to a score: 1. Select one or more notes 2. Click on the desired articulation in the Articulations palette. Alternatively, drag and drop an articulation symbol from the palette to a notehead. ## Articulations playback Certain articulations affect note playback - such as staccato, staccatissimo, louré (tenuto + staccato), and accents. This is handled automatically by the program. ## Articulation properties Editable properties of selected articulations on the score are shown in the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel).
* Placement: This alters the position of the symbol above or below the note. ## Articulation style See the main chapter [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles) * Values of the "Style for Articulations & Ornaments" can be edited in Format -> Style -> Articulations & ornaments.
Shown below are the result of some options on the score. ### Alignment options
Align with stem

Align with notehead

Center between stem and notehead
### Combined articulation options
Always keep together

Prefer closeness to notehead
(combined articulations may become separated)
# Dynamics and hairpins ## Overview All dynamics symbols are to be found in the Dynamics palette:
The Dynamics palette
This includes all the standard dynamics symbols (p, mf, ff, etc.) as well as gradual dynamic changes in the form of hairpins:
and in the form of cresc. and dim. text lines, which function in the same way but are more suitable for longer spans:
Unless stated otherwise, anything in this document that refers to hairpins also applies to cresc./dim. lines. ## Adding dynamics and hairpins ### From the palette To add a dynamics symbol to the score, either: * Select one or more notes, and then click an item in the Dynamics palette, or * Drag an item from the Dynamics palette onto a note. To add a hairpin to the score: 1. Select the note(s) to which you wish to add a hairpin, by either 1. selecting a single note; in this case, the hairpin will be drawn up to the next note, or 2. selecting a range of notes or measures 2. Add the hairpin by either 1. clicking a hairpin in the Dynamics palette, or 2. using the keyboard shortcuts `<` to add a crescendo hairpin, or `>` to enter a diminuendo hairpin. You can also drag a hairpin from the palette directly onto a note, in which case it will extend to the end of the measure. {% hint style="info" %} The right-hand end of a hairpin is attached to the first note (or rest) after the range to which you apply it, though it will be drawn to end just before that note. Therefore, do not include the final note in the range that you select. {% endhint %} ### From the dynamics popup You can also add a dynamic via the dynamics popup: 1. Select a note 2. Type `Ctrl`+`D` (Mac: `Cmd`+`D`) to open the dynamics popup 3. Click on a dynamic in the popup, or type it directly (e.g. `pp` or `mf`, etc.) and then press `Esc` or click on a blank area of the score, whereupon the text, if valid, will convert to a dynamic symbol.
The dynamics popup
You can access more dynamics in the popup by clicking the left and right arrows. With a dynamic selected, you can also create a hairpin directly from that dynamic by dragging the handle at the right of the dynamic out the note or anchor where you want it to end. When you let go, the dynamics popup will reappear, and you can select a new dynamic to go at the end of the hairpin. If that dynamic is of a lower level than the starting dynamic, the hairpin will switch from a crescendo to a decrescendo. This makes it very quick and efficient to enter chains of dynamics and hairpins. ## Replacing dynamics When a dynamic is selected, you can easily replace it with another dynamic by either clicking a different dynamic in the Dynamics palette or in the dynamics popup. The new dynamic will replace the selected one. ## Editing hairpins ### Adjusting hairpin height The handle at the bottom of the open end of a hairpin, here shown in gray as when selected, can be used to control its height:
To do so: 1. Select the hairpin 2. Select the height handle 3. Drag the handle up or down, or use the `Up`/`Down` arrow keys. You can also adjust height via the Properties panel: see [Hairpin properties](#style). ### Drawing at an angle By default all hairpins are drawn level. To draw one at an angle, first ensure that the Allow diagonal box is checked in the Properties panel (in the Style tab). You will then be able to move the start and end handles of the hairpin independently on the vertical plane. ## Assigning dynamics to voices {% embed url="" %} By default, dynamics are assigned to all voices on the instrument when they are entered. If you would prefer all dynamics to be assigned to the voice of the note to which they are applied, this is available as an option in Preferences -> Note input -> Voice assignment:
Changing this preference will not affect the assignment of any existing dynamics. Regardless of this setting, you can assign a dynamic directly to a specific voice when you add it: 1. Select a note or rest in the score 2. Click on a dynamic in the Dynamics palette while holding `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) 3. The dynamic will be assigned to the voice of the selected note or rest. (Currently this does not work when dragging dynamics from the palette, or when using the dynamics popup. In these cases, dynamics will be assigned to all voices.) You can change the voice assignment of an existing dynamic in multiple ways. Firstly, by selecting the dynamic and clicking one of the buttons in Properties -> Voice assignment:
For instruments with multiple staves, clicking the the All button will open a menu with distinct options for * All voices on this instrument (all voices on all staves of the instrument) * All voices on this staff only (all voices on the staff to which the dynamic is attached)
You can also either: * Click one of the voice buttons in the top toolbar to assign to voices 1–4 (you cannot select All via this method), or * Use the keyboard shortcuts: * For voice 1–4: `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`1`–`4` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Opt`+`1`–`4`) * For All: `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`0` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Opt`+`0`) For instruments with multiple staves, this last shortcut will apply the All voices on instrument option. For All voices on this staff only, use `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`-` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Opt`+`-`. {% hint style="info" %} In playback, a dynamic affects its assigned voice(s) from the point at which it appears until another dynamic in the same voice, or a dynamic that affects all voices, is reached. See the [Dynamics playback compatibility](#dynamics-playback-compatibility) to learn how the voice assignment feature works with different sound technologies. {% endhint %} ## Positioning dynamics and hairpins There are three options available in Format → Style → Dynamics & hairpins → Default positions of dynamics and hairpins which control general dynamics positioning:
* Position determines whether dynamics should be positioned according to their [voice assignment](#assigning-voices-to-dynamics) ('Based on voice', the default), or should all go 'Above' or 'Below' * Place above the staff on vocal instruments specifies whether dynamics should go above the staff on vocal staves (on by default) * Center on grand staff instruments automatically will center dynamics vertically between the staves of multi-stave instruments automatically (on by default). ### Voice-based positioning If the Based on voice position is chosen, [voice assignment](#assigning-voices-to-dynamics) will affect the default position of dynamics as follows: * Voice 1 dynamics go below the staff if there is only one voice at that rhythmic position, and otherwise go above * Voice 3 dynamics go above the staff * Voice 2 and 4 dynamics go below the staff * Dynamics assigned all voices go below the staff The position of any dynamic can be explicitly overridden via Properties → Position. {% hint style="info" %} If Place above the staff on vocal instruments is turned on then, on vocal staves, dynamics assigned to voice 1 will go above the staff, as will dynamics assigned to all voices on the staff. Voice 2 and 4 dynamics will still go below. {% endhint %} ### Centering dynamics between staves Dynamics on grand staff instruments (e.g. keyboards, keyboard percussion, harp) can be centered vertically between the staves. If the Center on grand staff staves automatically option is turned on, By default, dynamics are automatically centered (i.e. when when: * There is a staff on the same instrument above or below the dynamic (according to its position relative to the staff to which it is attached) against which it can be centered * Properties -> Voice assignment is set to All voices on instrument * Properties -> Center between staves is set to Auto * In Format -> Style -> Dynamics & hairpins, the Center on grand staff instruments automatically option is on * No manual Y-offset has been applied to the dynamic. You can also manually center dynamics by setting Center between staves to On and configuring Position based on whether the staff to which you want to center is above or below. ### Avoiding barlines Dynamics are centered under the note or rest to which they are attached. In the case of longer dynamics such as ppp this can easily mean that they would collide with a barline that precedes or follows them, when there is a barline connecting to the staff below. By default, dynamics items will be offset to the left or right to avoid these collisions. This behaviour can be turned off globally (Format -> Style -> Dynamics & hairpins -> Avoid barlines), or for a specific item via the Properties panel.
Avoid barlines on

Avoid barlines off
The second image shows the result if this option is turned off, but text masking is turned on (Format -> Style -> Barlines -> Mark barlines with intersecting text). If this option were also turned off, the barlines would be drawn over the top of the dynamics. If the dynamic has additional text typed before or after it, this is also included in the barline avoidance. See [Text as part of a dynamics item](#text-as-part-of-a-dynamics-item) for details. ## Moving dynamics and hairpins Dynamics, and the endpoints of hairpins, do not have to be attached only to notes or rests, but can be moved to rhythmic positions within longer durations. See [Anchors](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#anchors) and also [Changing the range of a line](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line). If a dynamic has a hairpin snapped to it on either side or both, the endpoints of these hairpins will follow the dynamic as it is moved around. See [Snapping and alignment](#snapping-and-alignment). ## Snapping and alignment If a piece of Expression text is at the same position as a dynamic, and has the same voice assignment and the same position setting (above/below), the two items will snap together, with the expression positioned after the dynamic. If either item is moved, the other will follow. To decouple a piece of Expression text from a dynamic: 1. Select the text 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Under Expression, uncheck Align with preceding dynamic. You can then move the items independently of each other. If you want to disable this snapping behaviour entirely, uncheck Format -> Style -> Expression text -> Snap to dynamics. If a hairpin starts and/or ends at the same position as a dynamic, and has the same voice assignment and the same position setting (above/below), the hairpin will automatically vertically align with the dynamic(s) at either end. To disable this behaviour for a specific hairpin: 1. Select the hairpin 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Under Expression, in the Position tab, uncheck Snap to previous (to disable alignment with any dynamic at the beginning of the hairpin) and/or Snap to next (to disable alignment with any dynamic at the end). Flipping the position of a snapped or aligned item to the other side of the staff, or changing the voice assignment of either item, will automatically stop it from snapping or aligning. ## Combining dynamics and text There are two ways to combine dynamics and text together, and there are subtle but important differences between them. ### Dynamics and expression text Where a dynamic is followed by an expressive marking, for example p dolce or f espress., it is best to input the dynamic and the expression text as separate items. The two will automatically snap together (see [Snapping and alignment](#snapping-and-alignment)). The quickest way to add expression text to a dynamic in this way is: 1. Enter a dynamic into the score via any method (the dynamic will be selected once it is entered) 2. Click the expression item in the Text palette, which adds a piece of expression text after the dynamic 3. Edit the expression text as necessary (assuming the text is selected, which it will be after it is entered, simply press `Enter` to go into editing mode). You can also input them the other way round (expression, then dynamic), though the expression will still be placed after the dynamic. The cresc./dim. text lines can be added to a dynamic in exactly the same way, and will snap to the dynamic, as will hairpins. ### Text as part of a dynamics item If the text is part of a dynamic phrase, for example più p or f sub., it is usually best to type these directly into the dynamic, so that it is treated as a single item. This is also the only way to put text before the dynamics symbol, as expression items are always placed after the dynamic when snapped. 1. Double click the dynamic, or select it and press `Enter`, to go into editing mode 2. Use the cursor keys to move to the start or end of the item (if necessary) 3. Type in the text. Any text typed into a Dynamic item is styled as Expression text, and is scaled independently of the dynamics symbols. When Avoid barlines is turned on, this applies to the entirety of a dynamics item, including any text which is typed into the item itself. It does not apply to any expression item that may be snapped to the barline. Consider the difference between these two examples:
Dynamic with text typed after it

Dynamic with separate expression item
In the former case, the barline avoidance pushes the text to the left and the dynamic appears as though it applies earlier than intended. This is one reason why it is often preferable to use separate expression text rather than adding text after a dynamic directly. When a dynamics item includes text, you can also choose whether the dynamic should remain centered under the note with the text extending out to the left and/or right (this is the default), or whether the whole item should be centered. These options are available in the Properties panel, in the Dynamics section under Show more:
The icons illustrate the difference between the two options. This has no effect when a dynamic has an piece of expression text attached to it. ## Properties Individual dynamics and hairpins can be edited via the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel). To edit the score-wide settings, see [Style](#style-1). ### Dynamics properties For dynamics, the following options are available: * Scale: the size of the dynamics symbol, as a percentage relative to default * Avoid barlines: whether dynamics should automatically be offset left or right to avoid collisions with barlines (see [Avoiding barlines](#avoiding-barlines)) * Voice assignment: to which voice the selected dynamic is assigned; this can affect both its position and also [playback](#dynamics-and-playback); the default is All (see [Assigning dynamics to voices](#assigning-voices-to-dynamics)) * Position: whether the dynamic should be positioned above or below the staff; the default, Auto, means that the position will be determined by voice assignment * Center between staves: on instruments with more than one staff, whether the center the dynamic between the staff to which it is attached and the next staff; the default, Auto, means that this will be determined by voice assignment (if the voice is set to anything other than All voices on instrument, the dynamic will not be centered) Under Show more: * Alignment with notehead: how to align a dynamics item which has additional text in it; see [Text as part of a dynamics item](#text-as-part-of-a-dynamics-item) for details * Border: allows you to draw a square or round border around the item. The usual additional border settings will appear if either is chosen. If the dynamics item has additional text typed into it, there will also be a Text heading which contains the usual text properties (font, style, size, etc.) These settings will only affect the text, not any dynamics symbols. ### Hairpin properties For hairpins, the following options are available: #### Position * Voice assignment: to which voice the selected dynamic is assigned; this can affect both its position and also [playback](#dynamics-and-playback); the default is All (see [Assigning dynamics to voices](#assigning-voices-to-dynamics), below) * Position: whether the dynamic should be positioned above or below the staff; the default, Auto, means that the position will be determined by voice assignment * Alignment with adjacent dynamics * Snap to previous: if this is checked, then if there is a dynamic at the start of the hairpin, with the same voice assignment, the hairpin will be drawn starting just after the dynamic (and any expression text that is snapped to it), and vertically aligned with it * Snap to next: if this is checked, then if there is a dynamic at the end of the hairpin, with the same voice assignment, the hairpin will be drawn ending just before the dynamic, and vertically aligned with it. #### Style {% hint style="info" %} These options are available for hairpins specifically. For cresc./dim. lines the options are instead the same as for other text lines: see [Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#style-tab). {% endhint %} * Niente circle: draws a small circle at the point of the hairpin to indicate niente (coming from or going to nothing) * Allow diagonal: allow the hairpin to be angled (see [Drawing at an angle](#drawing-at-an-angle)) * Thickness: the thickness of the line * Height: the height of the open end of the hairpin (see [Adjusting hairpin height](#adjusting-hairpin-height)) * Height (new system): the height of the opening of the hairpin at the start of a new system, when it crosses a system break. #### Text These settings are the same as for text lines: see [Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#text-tab). ## Style See the main chapter [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles) Format -> Style -> Dynamics & hairpins contains options for the default positioning, spacing, and appearance of dynamics and hairpins. {% hint style="info" %} You can edit the expression text style (which affects Expression text items and also any normal text typed into Dynamics items) in Format → Style → Text styles → Expression. {% endhint %} ### Default positions of dynamics and hairpins See [Positioning dynamics and hairpins](#positioning-dynamics-and-hairpins). ### Dynamics * Override score font: dynamics are usually taken from the music font (as specified in Format -> Style -> Score -> Musical symbols font). If you want to use a different font for dynamics only, check this box, and then select your desired font from the Font dropdown * Avoid barlines: whether all dynamics should be offset to avoid barlines by default (see [Avoiding barlines](#avoiding-barlines)) * Scale: the size of dynamics symbols, as a percentage relative to default * Offset above/below: the default vertical position of dynamics above and below the staff * Autoplace min. distance: the minimum distance between a dynamic and the staff, or an item between it and the staff. {% hint style="info" %} Though dynamics look like text, and are frequently used alongside text, they are better considered as musical symbols like any other (clefs, noteheads, etc) and in any given music font are designed at a certain size appropriate to the other symbols in the font. This is why the Scale setting is not expressed in points, but as a percentage, where 100% represents 'the size at which they are designed'. {% endhint %} ### Hairpins * Offset above/below: the default vertical position of hairpins above and below the staff * Height: the default height of the open end of hairpins * Continue height: the default height of the opening of hairpins at the start of a new system, when they cross a system break * Autoplace, distance to dynamics: the distance between the end of a hairpin and a dynamic * Line thickness: the default line thickness. ## Dynamics playback compatibility Support for voice-specific dynamics varies depending on the sound technology chosen (e.g. SoundFont, VST, or Muse Sounds) and whether the instrument is a single-note-dynamic instrument (i.e. an instrument capable of changing its dynamic on a single note, such as the violin or flute) or a non-single-note-dynamic instrument (e.g. the piano or percussion instruments, where the instrument's dynamic properties begin to recede after a note's initial attack). In the below table, single-note-dynamic instruments are referred to as SND instruments, while non-single-note-dynamic instruments are referred to as non-SND instruments. | Sound technnology | Support for individual voices/staves | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Muse Sounds | Full support for per-voice and per-stave dynamics. | | SoundFont (MS Basic) | Both SND and non-SND instruments will support dynamics on individual voices. Only non-SND instruments will support dynamics on individual staves. | | VST | Only non-SND instruments support per-voice and per-staff dynamics. | # Slurs and ties A slur is a curved line spanning any number of notes of different pitches and indicates legato articulation, though the exact interpretation depends on the instrument. Though they look very similar, slurs should not be confused with ties, which connect notes of the same pitch and extend the duration of the first note to encompass the next note. For information on how to input ties in note input mode, see [Entering ties](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#entering-ties). For information on how to input ties in normal mode, see [Adding ties in normal mode](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests#adding-ties-in-normal-mode). ## Adding a slur After selecting a note, a slur can be created using any of the following: * A keyboard shortcut, `S`. This option is both convenient and fast. * The menu option, Add -> Line -> Slur * A slur from the Lines palette. The exact method of applications depends on whether you are in [note input](/appendix/glossary#note-input-mode) or [normal](/appendix/glossary#normal-mode) modes of operation. The keyboard shortcut method will be used as an example. ### Adding slurs in normal mode #### Method 1 1. Select the note where you want the slur to start:
2. Press `S` to add a slur extending to the next note:
3. To extend the slur to the next note, hold `Shift` and press `Right`, repeating as required:
4. As you extend the slur to cover more notes it may flip direction. To manually flip the direction, press `X`:
5. Press `Esc` to exit edit mode:
#### Method 2 1. Select the note where you want the slur to start; 2. Choose one of the following options: * To add a single slur: Hold down `Ctrl` (Mac: `Cmd`) and select the last note that you want the slur to cover. * To add slurs to all voices: Hold down `Shift` and select the last note that you want the slurs to cover. 3. Press `S`. ### Adding slurs in note input mode 1. Enter the first note in the slurred section 2. Press `S` to create a slur starting on the note just entered 3. Type in the remaining notes in the slurred section 4. Press `S` again to end the slurred section on the last note entered. ## Multi-voice and cross-staff slurs Using [method 2](#method-2) (above) you can create a slur between notes in the same or different voices. Cross-staff slurs can be created in exactly the same way. e.g.
You can also adjust the start/end handles of an existing slur to move the start or end to a note of a different voice: 1. Click on the start or end handle of the slur.; 2. Press `Shift`+`Up`/`Down` to move the start or end between voices, and from staff to staff. ## Changing the appearance of slurs and ties To adjust the shape of a slur or tie, or the range of a slur, see [Adjusting elements directly](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly). ## Slur and tie properties Some properties of slurs and ties can be adjusted in the Properties panel: * Style: solid, wide dashes, narrow dashes, or dotted * Position: above or below the notes Ties have one more setting: * Tie placement: position the endpoints inside or outside of the noteheads ## Slur and tie style Default properties for all slurs and ties in the score can be adjusted in Format -> Style under Slurs & ties.
These options specify how slurs and ties are drawn. They are usually the same for slurs and ties, but they can be styled differently from each other. * Line thickness at end and Line thickness at middle: slurs and ties are usually drawn as an arc which is thin at either end and thickens towards the middle. These settings determine the minimum and maximum thickness. Note that not every tie will reach this maximum thickness as some very short ties need to be made thinner for layout reasons. Also, these options are among those which may change automatically when changing a score's music font, if Style -> Automatically load style settings based on font is checked (which it is by default). * Dotted line thickness: the thickness of dotted slurs and ties, which are usually drawn thinner * Autoplace min. distance: the minimum distance between a slur and another item outside it Partial slurs across repeats and breaks controls the slant of partial slurs (which cross a system break or a repeat or jump), and has two options: * Follow contour of notes: the slant of each part of the slur will be determined by the notes that it spans * Angle away from staff: the 'hanging' end of the slur will always be angled away from the staff, regardless of the contour of the notes.
These options apply to ties only. * Minimum tie length: this enforces a minimum length for ties, useful for ties between short durations and chords * Minimum hanging tie length: the minimum length for a hanging or partial tie, for example the two segments of a tie which crosses a system break, or a partial tie at a repeat or jump * Placement on single notes and Placement on chords: the default positioning of the tie endpoints relative to the noteheads it connects, as illustrated by the two icons: * 'inside': the tie starts just to the right of the first notehead and ends just to the right of the second notehead, vertically slightly above or below its center (according to its direction) * 'outside': the tie starts just above or below the noteheads (according to its direction), horizontally just right of the center of the first notehead and just left of the center of the second notehead * Placement of inner ties with respect to augmentation dots: this specifies where the left endpoint of inner ties should go when the note has any augmentation dots ('inner ties' are all ties when 'inside' placement is used, or ties to the inner notes of chords when 'outside' placement is used): * Auto: start the tie before the dot if there is space; in chords, this may mean that the startpoints of the ties may not align, as the layout of each tie is considered separately * Always before dots: start all ties before the dots; this may result in collisions with the dots, which should be avoided via manual adjustments * Always after dots: start all ties after the dots, in alignment. These examples use 'outside' placement:
Auto

Always before dots

Always after dots
# Laissez vibrer ties ## Overview Laissez vibrer ties (often abbreviated as 'l.v. ties') are short ties starting on a note and hanging into space, indicating that the sound is to be allowed to resonate. They are commonly encountered in parts for piano, harp, guitar and metal percussion, among others.
Laissez vibrer ties are per-note, rather than per-chord. ## Adding l.v. ties To add an l.v. tie: 1. Select a note or range of notes 2. Click the l.v. tie icon in the top toolbar: If you do not see this icon in the toolbar: 1. Click the cog at the right of the toolbar 2. In the Customize toolbar popup, locate Laissez vibrer and click the eye icon to its left. ## Removing l.v. ties To remove an l.v. tie, either: * Select it and press `Del`, or * Select the note to which it is attached and click the l.v. tie icon in the top toolbar (it acts as a toggle). ## Laissez vibrer properties You can configure individual l.v. ties via the Properties panel:
Style, Position, and Placement function the same as they do for ordinary ties and slurs (see [Slur properties](/notation/expressive-markings/slurs-and-ties#slur-properties)). Minimum length allows you to override the score-wide minimum length setting for a specific tie. Style and Minimum length will not be available if the Use SMuFL symbols option (see below) is enabled. ## Laissez vibrer style There are two settings for laissez vibrer ties in Format -> Style under Slurs & ties then Laissez vibrer: * Minimum laissez vibrer length: specifies the minimum length of l.v. ties. In the case of a chord with multiple ties, they may start at different positions, but the ending positions are aligned; some ties may, therefore, end up longer than this value. * Use SMuFL symbols: If this is unchecked (the default), l.v. ties are drawn as 'normal' ties, following all the same rules for placement and geometry. If this option is checked, symbols from the music font will be used instead, which have a fixed size and shape. {% hint style="warning" %} Laissez vibrer ties will be heard in playback when using MS Basic, VST (with limited support, depending on the VST), and MuseSounds. As of the MuseScore Studio 4.5 release date, only the following MuseSounds libraries will support laissez vibrer playback. This list will be updated as support gets added to further libraries: * Muse Keys * Muse Guitars (Vols. 1 and 2) {% endhint %} # Breaths and pauses Breaths and pause symbols may be found in the Breaths & pauses [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes).
These symbols also have an adjustable playback effect. ## Types of pauses ### Fermata A fermata, or pause appears above/below a note, and extends its written duration, indicating a pause in the music.
It may also be written above a rest, or a barline, indicating the end of a piece or section of music.
### Breath mark A breath mark is placed just above the staff, and tells a wind instrument performer or singer to take a breath here, or other instruments to pause slightly. It may occur between two notes or at the end of a measure. ### Caesura The caesura also indicates a pause, slightly longer than a breath mark but less so than a fermata. It may occur between two notes or at the end of a measure. ## Adding a pause to your score To add a fermata: 1. Select a note, rest or barline 2. Click on a fermata symbol in the Breaths & pauses palette. Alternatively drag a fermata symbol onto a note. Note that while it is customary for fermatas to be shown on all staves in a score, MuseScore Studio does not currently do this automatically: you must add fermatas to each stave manually. To add a breath mark or caesura: 1. Select a note 2. Click on a breath mark/pause symbol in the Breaths & pauses palette. Alternatively drag a breath mark/caesura symbol onto a note. MuseScore automatically places the breath mark/caesura in the correct position, just above the staff and after the selected note. It may create extra horizontal space for the marking. ## Changing pause playback Pause symbols have a playback effect in the score. To adjust the pause length: 1. Select the pause 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Click Playback 4. In the popup, adjust the Time stretch value. The Time stretch value scales the rhythmic duration of the note or rest to which the pause is attached. ## Pause properties To specify whether a fermata is placed above or below the stave: 1. Select the fermata 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Under Fermata, choose the desired Position setting. ## Pause style You can specify default positional properties for all fermatas in Format -> Style -> Fermatas.
# Ornaments Ornaments and ornament lines can be applied from the Ornaments [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). If it is not already displayed in the palettes area, see [Adding more palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes#adding-more-palettes). Available ornaments include turns, (short) trills, and mordents, are discussed here. See [Other lines](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines) for ornament lines available including (long) trill lines, upprall, downprall, prallprall.
## Adding an ornament to your score ### Add an ornament To add an ornament to the score: 1. Select one or more notes 2. Click on the desired ornament in the Ornaments palette. For a trill only, it is possible to use a [custom shortcut](/customization/preferences#shortcuts) instead at step 2. ### Add an ornament line See main chapter of ornament lines [Other lines](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines). The procedure for applying ornament lines is just like any other line, i.e. 1. Select a start note 2. Press `Shift` and click on an end note 3. Click on an ornament line in the Ornaments palette. If you subsequently need to adjust the ornament's length, see [Changing the range of a line](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line). ## Changing ornament intervals (adding accidentals) Ornaments are aware of the key signature and of other accidentals in the bar. By default, trills, turns, mordents and other ornaments will display and play diatonic intervals. Use the Properties panel to change the interval, displaying the appropriate accidentals in the score and changing playback. To change the interval of an ornament: 1. Select an ornament 2. Open the Properties panel 3. Use the interval selectors to choose the desired interval. The score will display the appropriate accidentals for the chosen interval. Trills can be customized by quality (major, minor, augmented, etc.) and interval number from unison to octave. The appropriate accidental or upper auxiliary note will display in the score above or below the ornament. For intervals larger than a second, consider using a [tremolo](/notation/expressive-markings/tremolos-and-rolls).
Both the upper and lower interval can be set for turns.
Short trill and mordent intervals can be set to the minor or major second.
Any accidentals introduced only by an ornament must be confirmed or cancelled later in the measure for clarity, meaning it is not possible to delete accidentals where the note: * is after and in the same measure as an ornament with accidentals * as the same pitch class as a note with an accidental specified by the ornament (excluding the base note) For example, in a measure starting with a chromatic turn on A as seen below, all Gs and Bs later in the measure will have an accidental, even if it is the same as what appears in the ornament.
While these accidentals cannot be deleted, they can be made invisible. To do so: 1. Select the accidental 2. Open the Properties panel 3. Uncheck Visible. ## Ornament properties The following properties of selected ornaments can be edited from the Ornament section of the Properties panel: ### Accidental visibility * Default: only show accidentals that have not shown up yet in the measure, or which are not in the key signature * Show any alteration: show accidentals again even if they have appeared earlier in the measure (and they are not in the key signature) * Always display an accidental: show an accidental regardless of the context. ### Placement Use the placement controls to either let MuseScore Studio automatically choose the standard placement, or manually select above or below. ### Accidental properties Any accidentals that appear on ornaments can be selected independently and have an option for Bracket type (None, round or square) available in the Properties panel. ## Ornament style Default sizing and spacing properties for ornaments can be edited in Format -> Style under Articulations & ornaments:
Ornaments can be individually repositioned by clicking and dragging in the score or via the Appearance dialog in the Properties panel.
The Trill cue note setting lets you specify when a bracketed cue-size note should be shown to indicate the trill interval. By default these are only shown for intervals greater than a second; if you want them on trills of a second too, choose Show for all intervals. # Arpeggios and glissandos [Arpeggios, strum arrows](#arpeggios), [glissandi (slide)](#glissandi), [portamento (glide)](#portamento), [brass or woodwind instrument bends](#bends) and [Guitar techniques: Slide in and slide out](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-techniques#adding-a-slide-to-your-score) can be applied from the Arpeggios & glissandos [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes):
Many have an adjustable playback effect (see [below](#changing-playback-of-arpeggios)). ## Arpeggios ### Adding an arpeggio/strum to your score To add an arpeggio/strum to a score: 1. Click on any note in a chord (multiple selection is possible)'; 2. Click on an arpeggio/strum symbol in the palette. Alternatively you can drag an arpeggio/strum symbol from a palette onto a notehead. ### Adjusting the height of an arpeggio/strum Click on an arpeggio and two adjustment handles will appear at the top and bottom of the symbol. You can move either up or down by dragging, or by selecting a handle and using the up/down keyboard arrows. ### Creating multi-voice or cross-staff arpeggios Arpeggios only span the voice to which they are input initially, but then can then be adjusted to span multiple voices in the same instrument, even across multiple staves. To adjust an arpeggio to span multiple voices: 1. Select either the top or bottom handle of the arpeggio 2. Press `Shift`+`Up` or `Shift`+`Down` to move the handle up or down to the next adjacent voice The handle will jump to the next voice above or below that has any notes at that point. This includes voices on staves above or below, in the case of multi-staff instruments. The arpeggio is considered to 'belong' to the uppermost voice that it spans, and will be coloured accordingly. ### Changing playback of arpeggios To change the speed of a selected arpeggio: 1. Go to the Properties panel 2. Click Playback 3. In the popup, adjust the Spread delay property. If you want to turn off playback altogether: 1. Go to the Properties panel 2. Untick the Play checkbox. ### Arpeggio style Default properties for all arpeggios in the score can be adjusted from the style menu at Format -> Style -> Arpeggios:
## Portamento To add a slide or portamento between two notes, add a [glissando ](#glissandi)line and [change its appearance](#changing-appearance-of-glissandi) and [playback setting](#changing-playback-of-glissandi). To add a slide or portamento before or after a note before a note (a string instrument or guitar technique), add either [one of the four brass or woodwind instrument bends](#bends) or a [Guitar techniques: Slide in and slide out](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-techniques#adding-a-slide-to-your-score), see also [Guitar techniques](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-techniques#adding-a-slide-to-your-score). Alternative wavy symbols are found in [the Symbols category in Master palette](/notation/expressive-markings/other-symbols), those do not affect playback. ## Glissandos Note: Guitar slides are covered in [Guitar techniques](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-techniques#adding-a-slide-to-your-score). ### Adding a glissando to your score 1. Select one or more start notes; 2. Click on the desired glissando icon in the palette. A glissando is created extending to the next note in the same voice:
Alternatively you can drag a glissando symbol from the palette onto a notehead. Glissandos can cross staves if needs be:
### Editing range of a glissando If required, you can change the start or end position of a glissando as follows: 1. Select the edit handle whose position you want to change; 2. Press `Shift`+`Up`/`Down`/`Left`/`Right` to move the handle in the specified direction, one note at a time. This method can also be used to move the edit handle between voices and across staves. ### Changing appearance of glissandos The line type of a selected glissando - whether straight or wavy - and any text associated with it, can be changed in the Glissando section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. You can also turn off text by unchecking the Show text box. ### Changing playback of glissandos To change the playback of a glissando: 1. Go to the Properties panel 2. Click Playback 3. In the popup, select an option from the Style dropdown. The available options are Chromatic, White keys, Black keys, Diatonic and Portamento. This last option creates a portamento between two notes; to add other types of slide see [Portamento](#portamento), above. To turn off playback off the glissando entirely: 1. Go to the Properties panel 2. Untick the Play checkbox. ### Glissando properties The following properties are available in the Glissando section of the Properties panel: * Line type: either Straight or Wavy. For a straight line, the following additional options are available: * Thickness: the thickness of the line * Line style: continuous, dashed or dotted * Show text: whether to show text over the glissando * Text: the text to show (by default, "gliss."). Text will only appear if there is sufficient space for it, i.e. if the glissando line is long enough. The default style of glissando text is defined in Format -> Style -> Text styles under Glissando. ## Bends Not to be confused with [Guitar techniques: Bends](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-techniques#adding-a-bend-symbol-to-your-score). The Arpeggios & glissandos palette also contains bend symbols for brass or woodwind instruments:
These have a playback effect on the score. ### Types of bends The four icons represent fall, doit, plop and scoop. (If you are not sure which are which, hovering over the palette icon will display a tooltip with the name of the symbol.) Falls and doits come after the notehead, plops and scoops go before it. ### Adding a bend to your score 1. Select a notehead 2. Click on the desired bend symbol in the palette. Alternatively, drag a bend symbol onto a notehead in the score. ### Changing appearance of bends To change the shape of the bend, click on it and four adjustment handles become visible. Drag the handles, or click on them and press the keyboard arrows, until you get the shape you want. # Grace notes Grace notes can be applied to the score from the Grace notes palette.
For bagpipe players there is a comprehensive range of grace notes in the Bagpipe embellishments palette. ## Types of grace notes Grace notes are small (cue-size) notes which ornament a previous or following note. They take their value from this parent note but do not themselves count towards the measure duration. There are several kinds: * Acciaccatura:
Usually written with an oblique stroke through the note flag, or through the beam, if there is a beamed series. * Appoggiatura:
A stressed note which takes half the value from the parent note. * Grace note after (trill endings). ## Adding a grace note to your score Note: For standard staves and tablature, the following instructions for adding grace notes work in both note input and normal modes. ### Add grace note with keyboard shortcut 1. Ensure that the "parent" note is selected (multiple selection is possible in normal mode) 2. To apply an acciaccatura, press `/` (slash). You can create a custom shortcut for other types of grace notes if you wish (see [Preferences: Shortcuts](/customization/preferences#shortcuts)). ### Add grace note from palette 1. Ensure that the "parent" note is selected (multiple selection is possible in normal mode) 2. Click on the desired symbol in the Grace notes palette. Alternatively, you can drag and drop a grace note from the palette onto a note in the score. ## Multiple grace notes ### Sequential grace notes You can add a run of grace notes to a selected note by repeatedly doing any of the following: * pressing the relevant keyboard shortcut (see above) * clicking on a grace note icon in a palette * dragging and dropping a grace note from a palette onto a note. ### Grace note chords To input a chord of grace notes: 1. Add a single grace note (as described above) 2. For standard staves, use one of the following methods: * Press `Shift` and a note letter, `A` to `G`; this will add the corresponding note above * Press `Alt`+`1`-`9` * from the menu bar, select Add -> Intervals and choose an interval from the list. This will add a note at the indicated interval above the selected note. 3. For tablature, select the grace note in normal mode, then add further chord notes using the method of adding intervals in step 2. ## Editing grace notes ### Change duration To edit the visual duration, click on the grace note in normal mode, and select a duration from the note input toolbar or by using a keyboard shortcut (see [Selecting duration](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-duration)). ### Change pitch On a standard stave, change the pitch of a grace note using one of the methods described in [Editing notes and rests](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests). On tablature staves, use one of the methods described in [Changing the pitch in normal mode (tablature)](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation#changing-the-pitch). ## Grace note properties The same properties are available for grace notes as for normal notes. See [Notehead properties](/notation/pitch/noteheads#notehead-properties), [Stem and flag properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/stems-and-flags#stem-and-flag-properties). To control whether a slash should be shown through the stem, there is one additional option for grace notes only 1. Select a grace note 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Under Note, select the Stem tab 4. Toggle Show stem slash. In the case of a beamed group, setting this for any note in the group will set it for the entire group. ## Grace note style You can adjust the default size for all grace notes in Format -> Styles -> Sizes -> Grace note size. {% hint style="info" %} Note that Grace note size is independent from Small note size, which is the size used for cue-size notes; the two sizes are often the same, and they are in MuseScore Studio by default, but do not have to be. {% endhint %} # Tremolos and rolls ## Types of tremolos and rolls A Tremolo is the rapid repetition of one note or chord, or a rapid alternation between two notes or chords. The placement of tremolos is handled automatically by the program. ### Single-note tremolos For stemmed notes, the rhythmic value of the tremolo is indicated by the number of diagonal strokes through the stem. One stroke indicates that the original note is divided into eighth notes, e.g.
A single-note tremolo
Two strokes divides the note into sixteenth notes, and three strokes into thirty-second notes. (On notes with beams or flags, the number of strokes and flags are combined, e.g. an eighth note with a one-stroke tremolo is divided into sixteenths.) On whole notes and other notes without stems the tremolo is centered on the notehead. ### Two-note tremolos In traditional two-note or two-chord tremolos, incomplete beams are drawn between the notes to indicate the rhythmic value of the tremolo (to change the style see [below](#changing-appearance-of-tremolos)). One beam indicates eight notes, two beams sixteenth notes, and three beams thirty-second notes. e.g.
Two-note tremolos
### Buzz roll A buzz roll symbol is also available from the Tremolos palette. (Whether it plays back correctly depends on which sound library you are using.) ## Adding a tremolo to a single note 1. Click on a notehead in the score 2. Click on the desired tremolo symbol in the Tremolos palette. ## Adding a tremolo between two notes/chords 1. Enter the notes at half the desired final duration of the tremolo. 2. Select a note in the first chord. 3. Click on the desired tremolo symbol in the Tremolos palette (one of the tremolo symbols without a stem). Tremolo beams appear between the notes/chords and the appearance of the noteheads is adjusted accordingly. Example: To enter a two-note tremolo with the duration of a half note, enter two normal quarter notes. After applying a tremolo symbol to the first note, the note values automatically double to half notes. ## Changing appearance of tremolos Three styles of tremolos between notes/chords are supported in MuseScore Studio. To change the style: 1. Select the tremolo symbol in the score 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Under the Tremolos section, choose the desired setting for Style (between notes). {% hint style="info" %} Style can only be changed for half-note tremolos, as beaming tremolos of shorter duration may introduce rhythmic ambiguity. {% endhint %} # Other lines ## Overview A line is a type of object capable of anchoring to a [horizontal continuous range](/basics/selecting-elements#creating-a-range-selection) of notes and rests. In MuseScore Studio, a line object contains a length of string or arc, and optionally some text. These objects can functionally affect the score and playback, and share similar configurable [line properties](#line-properties), [text properties](#text-tab), and [styles](#style-tab). Line objects include these subtypes. Follow the links to read more on each type: * [Standard line or Plain line](#standard-lines) (a simple general purpose, straight line) * [Lines with arrowheads](#lines-with-arrowheads) * [Slurs](/notation/expressive-markings/slurs-and-ties) * [Staff text lines and System text lines](#staff-and-system-text-lines) * [Hairpins and crescendo/decrescendo lines](/notation/expressive-markings/dynamics-and-hairpins) * [Tempo lines](#tempo-lines), such as ritardando * [Voltas](/notation/repeats/voltas) (brackets on top of repeated sections) * [Pedal](/idiomatic-notation/keyboard/pedal) markings * [Octave lines](/notation/pitch/octave-lines) (i.e. 8va) * [Trill lines](#trill-lines) * [Arpeggios](/notation/expressive-markings/arpeggios-and-glissandos) * [Glissandi](/notation/expressive-markings/arpeggios-and-glissandos) (slides) and portamento between notes * [Vertical brackets](#vertical-brackets) * Upprall, Downprall, Prallprall lines * [Guitar-related lines](#guitar-related-lines), including barré lines, "let ring" lines, palm mute lines, and vibrato lines * Vibrato sawtooth, tremolo sawtooth (these do not affect playback) * [Ambitus](/notation/pitch/ambitus) (an early music feature) While the following markings look like lines or arcs, they are not considered line objects in MuseScore because they cannot attach (anchor) to a continuous range: * [Bends](/notation/expressive-markings/arpeggios-and-glissandos) (brass or guitar articulations) * [Ties](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#ties) * [Tremolo and rolls](/notation/expressive-markings/tremolos-and-rolls) * Single note [ornaments](/notation/expressive-markings/ornaments) such as turns, (short) trills and mordents * (Staff) [Brackets](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/brackets) and curly braces * [Barlines](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/barlines) * Staff line * To change global staff line thickness, go to Format -> Style... -> Score and change Staff line thickness. For other staff formatting settings, see [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). {% hint style="info" %} The following description of actions and general behaviors applies to Line objects discussed here (those do not have a dedicated handbook chapter), for Line objects having dedicated handbook chapters, refer to those chapters for more accurate info. {% endhint %} ## Adding a line to your score The easiest way to add a new line is to use either: * A predefined keyboard shortcut, for example `S` to add a [slur](/notation/expressive-markings/slurs-and-ties#adding-a-slur), or * The Lines and Guitar [palettes](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/palettes). To apply a line to a [selected range](/basics/selecting-elements#creating-a-range-selection): 1. Select a range of notes. 2. Click on a line in a palette. Or 1. Drag a line from a palette to the starting note. 2. Adjust the end handle to extend its range (see [Changing range of a line](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line)). To apply a line to a single note, either: * Select a note and click on the desired line in palettes, or * Drag a palette line to the desired start note. ## Adjusting a line To adjust the range of a line, see [Changing range of a line](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line). ## Types of lines ### Standard lines Plain lines are applied from the Lines palette. They can be purposed to anything you like such as to [create guitar fingering/string number lines](#guitar-related-lines). They can be adjusted to be diagonal or vertical. ### Lines with arrowheads Lines with arrowheads may be applied from the Lines palette, or the line ends of an existing line can be changed to either filled or line arrows in the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. The height and width of the arrowhead may also be adjusted.
### Staff and System Text lines A staff text line, like [staff text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text), is affixed to one staff in a system, and is indicative only for that staff. It appears only in [parts](/basics/parts) featuring that staff. A system text line, like [system text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text), is affixed to one staff but is indicative for all the staves in the system. It appears in all instrument parts. ### Tempo lines Tempo markings such as rit. (ritardando) and accel. (accelerando) affect playback and can be used to create gradual tempo changes. See [Tempo markings](/text/tempo-markings). ### Guitar-related lines These lines are available in the Guitar palette: * Barré lines: Used to indicate fret positions. See [Guitar techniques](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-techniques#adding-a-barre-line-to-your-score). * To create a Fingering/String number-line: * Vibrato: You can change the shape of the line in the Vibrato section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. * Palm mute: Changes playback sound to that of a clean muted electric guitar. * Let ring: Affect playback, acts like the sustain pedal on a keyboard. If you want to indicate a fingering that should apply over time: 1. Add a [Fingering](/text/fingering) from Fingerings palette. 2. Add a line from Lines palette to the same note as the fingering. 3. [Adjust the length](#adjusting-a-line) of the line as required. ### Trill lines Not to be confused with (short) trill [ornaments](/notation/expressive-markings/ornaments). Trill lines have additional properties that allow showing bracketed small notes and accidentals to notate trill note pitch. Trill lines create trills in playback for instruments using both [SoundFonts](/sound-and-playback/soundfonts) and [MuseSounds](/sound-and-playback/musesounds). When using Muse Sounds, a trill line will trigger professionally recorded trill audio for playback (if the sound sample for the notated interval exists), like the perfect fifth trill line pictured below.
### Vertical brackets Vertical brackets can be added from the Lines palette and the Keyboard palette. They are used in a variety of situations, such as showing notes to be played by either the left or right hand for pianists, divisi assignment for strings, or even bracketing entire sections of music. Hook length, placement (left or right of the anchor point) and which end(s) have hooks can be controlled in the Properties panel.
## Line properties The [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel) allows you to view and edit [General](/basics/properties-panel#general), [Appearance](/basics/properties-panel#inside-the-appearance-tab), and [Playback](#types-of-lines) settings. The name of the section below varies depending on the type of line. But it will have two tabs marked Style and Text: ### Style tab Clicking on the Style tab allows you to set the properties of the line itself: * Line type: Choice of straight, hooked, angle-hooked, T-style hooked, line arrow or filled arrow. * Hook height / Arrow height / Arrow width: Adjust the height of the hook or the dimensions of the arrowhead. * Thickness: Adjust the thickness of the line (and any hooks or line arrowheads applied). * Style: Choice of solid, dashed or dotted line. * Dash / Gap: Adjust the appearance if 'Dashed' is selected. ### Text tab Clicking on the Text tab allows you to apply and position any text associated with the line: * Beginning text: Specify the text, if any, to appear at the beginning of the line. * Text when continuing to a new system: If the line spans more than one system, this is the text that will appear before the line on each system after the first one. * End text: Text to appear at the end of the line. * Offset: Adjust the position of the text relative to the line (in [sp.](/formatting/page-layout-concepts#staff-space-spatium)). * Gap between text and line: Adjust both the amount of space from beginning text to the start of the line and end text to the end of the line. ## Line style See [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). Use the Style dialog (Format -> Style...) to set certain global properties for lines. The relevant pages within the dialog are Voltas, Ottavas, Pedal lines, Trill lines, Vibrato lines, Glissandos and note-anchored lines, Text lines, System text lines, and Text styles. In the latter, you can edit the default text style for each line type.
# Other symbols The Symbols palette is a category within the [Master palette](/basics/using-the-palettes#the-master-palette) and houses all symbols and text from all built-in music fonts.
Unlike other categories in the [Master palette](/basics/using-the-palettes#the-master-palette), items in the Symbols palette are non-functional: they are for display purposes only and have no other effect on the score. You should find most symbols and text items you need for scoring in the [Palettes panel](/basics/using-the-palettes)—use of the Symbols palette should be reserved for specialist items not available in the small palettes, or on those occasions when you really do need a non-functional element. ## The Symbols palette ### View To view the Symbols palette, select View→Master Palette, or use the shortcut `Shift`+`F9`. Selecting “Symbols” in the list of headings reveals all symbols under all subcategories. Selecting one subcategory to focus on a specific set.
### Search You can search for a symbol by entering a term in the Search box at the top of the Symbols section. Specify the musical font you want in the dropdown at the bottom right. ## Adding symbols to your score Symbols added from the Symbols palette scale in line with the score (see [Staff size](/formatting/score-size-and-spacing#staff-size)), but their font-size is fixed. If you need a symbol with an adjustable font-size, you should consider adding it instead from the [Special characters](/text/entering-and-editing-text#special-characters) palette as [staff text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text). ### Add a symbol Use one of the following methods: * Select one or more score elements (notes, rests, barlines) then click on the desired symbol in the Symbols palette. * Drag the desired symbol from the Symbols palette onto a score element (note, rest, barline). ### Add to other symbols After adding a symbol, you can, if required, add an additional symbol to the existing one. Use one of the following: * Select a symbol (previously added to the score from the Symbols palette), then click on the desired symbol in the Symbols palette. * Drag the desired symbol onto the existing symbol in the score. ### Reposition symbols To reposition, you can drag the symbol, or edit the offsets in the Apprearance section of the Properties panel. You can also move the symbol using the keyboard arrows—after selecting it and entering edit mode by pressing `Alt`+`Shift`+`E` or `F2`. If two symbols have been joined together (see [Add to other symbols](#add-to-other-symbols), above), moving the first-added symbol moves both. However you can still move the second symbol in relation to the first. ### See also * [Using the palettes](/basics/using-the-palettes) for information about how to search for and apply palette items to the score. * [Working with images](/formatting/working-with-images) for how to apply images to your score. # Repeats # Repeat signs A repeat sign looks like a double [barline](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/barlines) with a dot above and below the center line of the staff (see image below). It is used to enclose repeated sections of the score. ## Adding repeat signs to your score Find repeat signs in the Repeats & jumps and Barlines [palettes](/customization/palettes). Place a start repeat barline at the beginning of the repeated section and an end repeat barline at the end:
If the start of the repeat section coincides with the beginning of the piece there is no need for a start repeat barline. For repeated sections with multiple endings, use [voltas](/notation/repeats/voltas). ## Changing how often to repeat Unless indicated otherwise, a repeated section is played through twice. To change the number of times a section is repeated: 1. Select the end repeat barline of the section. 2. Open the Properties panel. 3. Change the value of Play count to the number of times you wish the section to be played. This will be reflected in playback, and also a textual indication will appear above the barline, for example:
#### Customizing play count text The text that appears above the repeat can be configured in Format -> Style... -> Repeats -> Repeat play count text:
* Automatically show text at repeat barlines: This toggle controls whether this text should appear at all in the score. * Show for single repeats: If checked, the text will also appear above repeats with a play count of 2. * Preset: This dropdown gives several options for the format of the text ('x3', '3x', 'Play 3 times', '3 repeats'). * The Edit text style button takes you to the page where the Repeat play count text style is configured. Play count text is a type of [system marking](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#managing-system-markings), and can be shown (or hidden) wherever there is a system marking instance in the score. You can customize the behavior for any specific end repeat barline in the score via the Properties panel. See [Repeat signs](/notation/repeats/repeat-signs#repeat-properties), below. ## Ignoring repeats during playback To ignore all repeats during playback: * Click the cog icon in the [playback toolbar](/sound-and-playback/playback-controls). * Uncheck Play repeats. ## Repeat properties
* Repeat style: Either the 'plain' or 'winged' style. * Play count: The number of times to repeat (see [#changing-how-often-to-repeat](#changing-how-often-to-repeat "mention"), above). * Play count text (which may be disabled depending on the value of Play count and the score's [style settings](#customizing-play-count-text)) has three options: * Auto: Whether to show the text, and how to format it, is also determined by the score's style settings. * Custom: Provides a text field where you can enter any text you wish, to override the default. You can also [edit the text](/text/entering-and-editing-text#editing-text-object-content) directly in the score and Custom will be automatically selected. * Hide: Do not show play count text on this repeat. For the other settings under Show more, see [Barlines](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/barlines#barline-properties). ## Repeat style Style settings for repeat barlines can be found in Format -> Style -> Barlines: The settings specific to repeat barlines are: * Show repeat barline tips: Adds 'wings' above and below repeat barlines. * Repeat barline to dots distance: The distance between the innermost line of a repeat barline and its dots. For the other settings, see [Barlines](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/barlines#barline-style). # Voltas Volta brackets are lines above the staff used to mark different endings for a repeated section. MuseScore Studio creates correct playback. In the example below, the repeated section is played once through with the ending marked "1.", then a second time with the ending marked "2.".
## Adding voltas to your score 1. Make sure that [repeat barlines](/notation/repeats/repeat-signs#adding-repeat-signs-to-your-score) are in the correct position. 2. To apply the volta bracket, use one of the following: * Select a measure and click on the desired volta in the Repeats & jumps palette, or * Drag a volta from a palette onto a measure. To change the range covered after the volta has been added, see [Adjusting elements directly](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line). ## Changing appearance of voltas The appearance of voltas can be changed via the Properties panel. See [#volta-properties](#volta-properties "mention"), below. Note that changing the text is purely visual and does not affect playback. ## Changing playback of voltas 1. Select a volta in the score. 2. Go the Properties panel and find the Volta section. 3. Select the Style tab and edit the Repeat list value. The Repeat list specifies which times through the music under the volta should be played. For example, a value of `1` means that the passage will be played only the first time, and will be skipped other times. `2` means it will be played only the second time. If the volta is to be played more than once, you can enter a series of numbers separated by commas, e.g. `1,2,3`. In this case, you must also edit the end repeat's Play count property accordingly. See [Repeat signs](/notation/repeats/repeat-signs#changing-how-often-to-repeat). The play count is usually the number of Repeat list entries plus 1. For example:
This example plays back the measures in this sequence: 1–3, 1–2, 4–5, 1–3, 1–3, 1–2, 4–5, 1–2, 6–8.
To achieve this, the following properties are set: * For Repeats: * In measure 3, Play count is set to `4` * In measure 5, Play count is set to `3` * Voltas: * In measure 3, Repeat list is set to `1,3,4` and Beginning text is set to `1., 3., 4.` * In measures 4–5, Repeat list is set to `2,5` and Beginning text is set to `2., 5.` * In measure 6, Repeat list is set to `6` and Beginning text is set to `6.` {% hint style="info" %} To ignore all repeats during playback, see [Repeat signs](/notation/repeats/repeat-signs#ignoring-repeat-signs-during-playback). {% endhint %} ## Volta properties In the properties panel, there are two tabs for voltas: Style and Text. The only option specific to voltas is Style -> Repeat list which is used to specify which repeats the volta applies to. See [#changing-playback-of-voltas](#changing-playback-of-voltas "mention"), above. For all the other options in Style, see [Other lines](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-properties). For the options in Text, see [Entering and editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text) and [Formatting text](/text/formatting-text). ## Voltas style Styles for voltas can be found in Format -> Style -> Voltas:
* Vertical position: The default position of the horizontal line of the volta. * Hook height: The height of the vertical hook (note that if this value is close to or larger than Vertical position then this will determine the position of the whole item, as it will automatically move up to avoid colliding with the staff). * Line thickness: The thickness of the line. * Line style: Solid, dashed or dotted. There are two options to control the alignment of the beginning of the volta: * At start of system, start volta: This controls whether the vertical hook should start after or on the key signature. Note that this affects also affects the continuation of a volta line when it continues to a new system. * Align start hook: This controls whether the vertical hook should align to the left or right side of the thick barline in a repeat. Styles for the text under voltas can be found in Format -> Style -> Text styles under Volta. # Jumps and markers Jumps and markers are used to create repeat structures in a score. They can be found in the Repeats & jumps palette. ## Types of jumps and markers ### Jumps Jumps are items that indicate a jump from one point in the score to somewhere else.
D.C. Repeat from the beginning (stands for for da capo).
D.S. Repeat from the segno marker (stands for dal segno).
D.C. al Fine Repeat from the beginning until 'Fine'.
D.S. al Fine Repeat from the segno marker until 'Fine'.
D.C. al Coda Repeat from the beginning until 'To Coda', then jump to the coda.
D.S. al Coda Repeat from the segno marker until 'To Coda', then jump to the coda.
### Markers Markers are labelled positions in the score. Coda and segno markers indicate the destination of a jump:
Coda (with or without additional text)
Segno
Fine and To Coda indicate the place where something should happen after a jump has been made:
Fine End the piece or section. This must be used together with a 'D.C. al Fine' or 'D.S. al Fine'.
To Coda Jump to the coda. This must be used together with a 'D.C. al Coda' or 'D.S. al Coda'.
{% hint style="info" %} Though the 'To Coda' item is effectively both a marker and a jump, internally it is treated as a marker and has the corresponding properties. The destination of the jump to the coda is specified in the 'D.C. al Coda' or 'D.S. al Coda' item (see [Jumps and markers](/notation/repeats/jumps-and-markers#jump-properties), below). {% endhint %} ## Adding a jump or marker To add a jump or marker to your score: 1. Select a measure, or an item within the measure. 2. Click the desired item in the Repeats & jumps palette. Alternatively, drag an item from the palette and drop it onto the measure. Coda and segno are placed at the beginning of the measure, and all other jumps and markers at the end. ## Changing appearance of jumps and markers Jumps and markers are text, so they are edited like any other text objects. Markers often also contain music symbols (e.g. for segno and coda), which are taken from the [musical text font](/appendix/music-fonts) the score is using. The size and alignment of these symbols can be controlled independently of the rest of the text in their [properties](#marker-properties). To enter music symbols into these items, use the [Special characters](/text/entering-and-editing-text#special-characters) dialog (Properties -> Text -> Insert special characters). ## Changing playback of jumps and markers #### Using labels to define the flow of playback Jumps and markers are connected using labels, which are simple text identifiers that define the flow of playback. For most scores, you should not need to change the default labels of jumps and markers that are added from palettes. See [#example-of-how-labels-control-playback-flow](#example-of-how-labels-control-playback-flow "mention"). To indicate the beginning or end of the score, this specific syntax must be used: * `start` is the beginning of the score or section. * `end` is the end of the score or section. Otherwise, the labels can be whatever you like, as long as they match up correctly. If you are creating more elaborate structures than the defaults allow, you can customize them in properties. {% hint style="info" %} Labels do not display on the score and have no inherent relationship to the text that the item on the score may contain. {% endhint %} #### Ignoring jumps and markers in playback To ignore repeats, jumps, and markers in playback: 1. In the [playback toolbar](/sound-and-playback/playback-controls#playback-controls), open the cog menu 2. Uncheck Play repeats ## Jump properties
Default settings for 'D.S. al Coda'
* Jump to: The label of the marker that playback should jump to, once this jump is reached. * Play until: The label of the marker where playback should continue until. * Continue at: The label of the marker to jump to once the label specified in Play until is reached. If this field is blank, playback will stop at the Play until label. * Play repeats: Whether to play repeats after the jump happens. #### Example of how labels control playback flow The image above shows the default settings for a 'D.S. al Coda'. It describes that the following should happen once it is reached: 1. Jump to the marker with the label `segno` (which is the default label of the segno item from the palette). 2. Play from that label until the marker with the label `coda` (which is the default label of the 'To Coda' item from the palette). 3. Then jump to the marker with the `codab` (which is the default label of the coda item from the palette). Since Play repeats is unchecked, any repeats encountered after the initial jump will be ignored. ## Marker properties
Default settings for 'Segno'
* Marker type: The type of marker (non-editable). * Label: The marker's label. This should match one of the labels referenced in a jump, according to what purpose the marker serves. * Symbol size: The size in points of any musical symbols (coda, segno, etc.) used as part of the text on the score. * Align symbol with barline: If checked, and if the item contains a symbol, the entire item will be positioned such that the symbol is centered over the barline. If unchecked, the alignment buttons below become enabled and the desired alignment can be chosen. ## Jump and marker style The text styles for repeats and jumps can be configured in Format -> Style -> Text styles -> Repeat text left and Repeat text right. The Repeat text left style is used for markers which go at the start of the bar (coda, segno), and the Repeat text right style is used for markers which go at the end (everything else). The musical text font, used for the symbols, can be changed in Format -> Style -> Score -> Musical text font. # Items across repeats and jumps Sometimes, items which can span multiple notes can start before a repeat or jump but need end at the other side of that repeat or jump. This can mean that the end actually comes before the start in the score (for example, when going back to the start of a repeat, or at a D.C. or D.S.), or may come after the start but have other material in between, like when jumping across a first-time bar or to a coda. MuseScore Studio supports this behaviour for certain types of item, specifically ties, slurs and lyrics lines. The way that each type of item is created is slightly different. The following instructions will refer to this short example as a model:
Before

After
### Ties To add a tie that crosses a repeat or jump: 1. Select the starting note of the tie 2. Press `T` or click the tie icon in the toolbar. The tie will be drawn to all valid locations where there is a note of the same pitch to connect to. It is entirely possible for there to be more than one endpoint for a tie, so several segments may appear. In the example, adding a tie to the A in the first-time measure will create a partial tie from the note to the end repeat barline, and a partial tie from the start repeat barline to the A in the first measure. Adding a tie to the F in the first measure will create a 'normal' tie to the next note, but will also create a partial tie to the F in the second-time measure. This is an example of a tie that has multiple endpoints. If you select such a tie, you will see a popup which lists the places the tie connects to:
You can select or deselect items in this list and the tie segments will appear or disappear accordingly. You can also select the partial tie segment at any endpoint and delete it. ### Slurs Slurs can span any range of notes, rather than only connecting adjacent notes, so MuseScore cannot create these 'automatically' for you. Therefore, you must add the individual segments manually. To add a slur segment: 1. Select the two endpoints of the slur by clicking one and then `Ctrl`+clicking (macOS: `Cmd`+click) the other. One endpoint must be a note and the other endpoint must be a repeat barline or a barline which has a jump on it (D.C., D.S., etc.) 2. Press `S` or click the slur icon in the toolbar. If you have a slur which starts on the first note after a jump, or which ends on the last note before a jump, and you want to move the endpoint next to the jump into the 'hanging' position, you can do this by selecting that endpoint and pressing `Shift`+`Alt`+`Left`/`Right` (macOS: `Shift`+`Option`+`Left`/`Right`). ### Lyric lines Lyric extension lines and dashes can also be added across jumps; like slurs, the individual parts need to be input manually. For general information on inputting lyrics, see [Lyrics](/text/lyrics). To add a partial lyric line after a repeat or jump: 1. Select the first note after the repeat or jump 2. Type `Ctrl`+`L` (macOS: `Cmd`+`L`) to enter lyric entry mode 3. Type `\_` for an extension line or `-` for a dashed line (without any other characters before); the line will be drawn starting just after the barline. Repeat the keypress to extend the line across more notes if necessary. To delete a partial lyric line of this type, simply select it and press `Del`. Only partial lines like this (with no preceding syllable) can be selected in this way. Normal lyric lines are dependents of the syllable that precedes them, and cannot be selected directly. Lyric lines going into a repeat or jump are added in the 'normal' way during lyric entry: once you get to the last note before a jump, which may either have a syllable on it or have a continuation of a lyric line that started before, simply type `\_` or `-` and the line will be drawn up until the repeat or jump. A partial lyric line of this type can be selected in order to delete it (press `Del`). This is in contrast to normal lyric lines, which are dependents of the syllable that precedes them. In the example at the top of the page, the lyrics are entered in the following way (these can be done in any order): * Select the first A, enter lyric entry mode and type `\_` once; this creates a partial lyric line starting from the repeat barline * Select the first F, enter lyric entry mode and type `jump` then`\_` three times; the third press extends the lyric line to the repeat barline * Select the second F, enter lyric entry mode and type `\_` twice. # Changes and courtesies at repeats and jumps ## Overview Layout and styling of clefs, key signature and time signature changes at repeats and jumps can be a complex matter. MuseScore Studio provides a range of options to configure when and where you want them to appear. These are options are found in Style -> Format -> Clefs, key & time signatures. ## Clef, key and time signature changes
Changes that apply to both the repeat/jump and the subsequent bar: sometimes a change of clef, key or time signature applies both to the destination of a jump (an end repeat barline or a 'to Coda', for example) and also when continuing on. There are two options for now to notate this: * if the option is checked: only show the change once, before the repeat/jump * if the option is unchecked: show the change after the repeat/jump, but allow for a courtesy change to also be shown before the repeat/jump. Whether a courtesy is actually shown or not, and whether it is parenthesised if it does, depends on the [courtesy settings](#courtesies) (see below). You can configure this behaviour separately for repeats and for all other types of jump. These examples show illustrate a repeat:
option checked

option unchecked
If you turn off Show at repeats under Courtesies, below, the courtesy will disappear, resulting in the change only appearing after the jump:
option unchecked and courtesies disabled
Changes that apply only after repeats and jumps are for when the change only applies when continuing. However, some styles prefer to keep clefs before the barline (in their 'usual' position) even when this applies. For that reason the options Place clefs before repeats and Place clefs after repeats (the default) are provided. Finally, Allow changes between end-start repeats will, when checked, allow an end-start repeat barline to be split into an end-repeat and start-repeat, with the changes placed between, if the changes do not apply when going back to the start of the repeat. (Clefs may still go before the end-repeat if Place clefs before repeats is selected.) ## Courtesies It is possible to display courtesies before any jump as an indication that the clef, key signature and/or time signature is different at the destination of the jump.
There are four toggles which form two pairs of options: * Show at repeats: show cautionaries, where necessary, before a repeat barline (to indicate that the clef, key or time signature is different back the start of the repeated section) * Show at all other jumps: show cautionaries, where necessary, before all other types of jump (e.g. D.C., D.S., To Coda, etc.) * Show when cancelling a courtesy before repeats: if a courtesy is shown before a repeat, but it does not also apply after the repeat, show a cautionary to 'cancel' the preceding cautionary * Show when cancelling a courtesy before all other jumps: the same as the previous option, but for all other types of jump. Each of these toggles also has a Use parentheses checkbox which specifies whether the cautionaries should be enclosed in parentheses. Where several cautionary items appear in the same place (it is possible to have a clef, key signature and time signature all at once), a single pair of parentheses will enclose all the items. The Small parentheses option specifies that the parentheses should be drawn to just enclose the height of the items within them (the preview images use this style). If unchecked, the parentheses will be drawn from 1sp below the staff to 1sp above. # Measure and multimeasure repeats A measure repeat symbol indicates that the previous measure is to be repeated. Two-measure and four-measure repeat symbols indicate the repetition of the previous two or four measures. ## Adding a measure or multimeasure repeat to your score To apply a measure repeat symbol, select a measure in the score and click on the measure repeat icon in the Repeats & jumps [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes), or drag the symbol on to a measure.
To apply a two-measure or four-measure repeat symbol, select the first blank measure following the section you want to be repeated, then click on the applicable measure repeat icon in the Repeats & jumps palette. Alternatively, drag the repeat icon from the palette onto the same blank measure instead.
Note: You may need to click the More icon in the palette to reveal the two-measure and four-measure repeat symbols. In the case of multiple-measure repeats a "Keep measures on same system" layout item is automatically added to each measure of the repeated section except for the last. This keeps the repeated measures together on the same system, so they will not be broken up by layout changes to the score. These layout items can be deleted if desired. ## Measure repeat properties For multiple-measure repeats you can change the vertical position of the number which appears above the symbol: 1. Select the multiple-measure repeat 2. Go to the Properties panel 3. Under Bar repeat, edit the Number position value. ## Measure repeat style You can edit the properties of all measure repeats in the score in Format -> Style -> Measure repeats:
# Keyboard # Pedal For Harp Pedal see [Idiomatic notation: Harp](/idiomatic-notation/harp) instead. ## Types of pedal markings This chapter focuses on the types of piano pedal engraving available, for knowledge of various piano pedals see [wikipedia article](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Piano_pedals). ### In terms of visual representation Supported engravings including: * Line at either or both ends, have no hook or hooks at angles of either 45 or 90 degrees, or "T" end; * Ped. followed by such a line, or a rosette symbol (\): The line from the built-in Ped. \ palette item is invisible and non-printing. Adjust on-screen display with View menu > Show > Show invisible setting accordingly, see [The user interface](/navigation/the-user-interface). To convert the line to visible in printing, or style it as dashed, see [properties](#pedal-properties).\\
* Other related symbols and pictogram can be found under Symbols category in Master palette window, see [Other symbols](/notation/expressive-markings/other-symbols). Sost. (sostenuto pedal) marking should not be confused with sost.-- [Tempo markings](/text/tempo-markings), see also [discussion on steinberg.net](https://forums.steinberg.net/t/sostenuto-inconsistent-preset-behaviour/131902).\\
* Create custom sim. or pedal ad lib marking with [Staff text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text). * Full pedal is implied for playback, [embed images](/formatting/working-with-images) to add pedal strength symbols for engraving need. ### In terms of function inside MuseScore There are three different subtypes: Type 1 includes:\\
* Line with 45 degree angled End hook or no End hook, with or without Ped. beginning text. * Ped. followed by a rosette symbol (\) Visually, the line or symbol only extends horizontally to the notehead* attached to the end anchor.\ Functionally, if that note is attached to another marking's start anchor, the following marking will automatically connect and make a shape resembling "-^-", which is indicative of the piano technique "pedal released and pressed again without releasing this note".\\
\ \_shown above is the auto connect, their playback are also in line with the piano technique\_\ If the instrument use \[SoundFonts]\(../../sound-and-playback/soundfonts.md) such as "MS Basic", or when exported as MIDI file, sustain (MIDI CC 64) is created. When consecutive type 1 markings create a "-^-", playback matches the piano technique, the \_first marking\_ is interpreted by synthesizer as \_released \\at\\ the note attached to the \\end anchor\\\_. Single or trailing type 1 markings creates playback like type 2: \_sustain until the note attached to the \\end anchor\\ ends.\_\\
\ \_The last two type 1 markings shown above are single or trailing, they create the same playback as type 2\_ Type 2 includes:\\
* Line other than described in Type 1, with or without Ped. beginning text. Visually, the line extends horizontally to an aprpopiate length spanning the full duration of note attached to the end anchor.\ Functionally, if the instrument use [SoundFonts](/sound-and-playback/soundfonts) such as "MS Basic", or when exported as MIDI file, sustain (MIDI CC 64) is created. Type 2 always sustain until the note attached to the end anchor ends. Type 1 and 2 are interchangable by adjusting [properties](#pedal-properties). Type 3 includes the sostenuto pedal marking and custom Staff texts, they are for engraving purpose only and are non-functional. ## Adding pedal markings to your score
\ \_shown above a type 2 marking on score\_ Add pedal markings from Lines palette, see [Other lines:Adding a line to your score](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines). Adjust with `Shift`+`Left`/`Right`, switch handle with `Tab`, see [Adjusting elements directly: Changing the range of a line](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line). Unfortunately, you might need to make compromise with engraving style or not notate at all if you must create a desired playback, because of the functional limitation of Type 1 and Type 2 explained. As of Musescore 4.1.1, pedal marking always create sustain playback only (cannot be turned off), making it impossible to use "add redundant symbol, make it invisible" trick. To create shape resembling "-^-" with consecutive Type 1 markings, make sure the end anchor is attached correctly, which is usually to the first note of the next measure instead of the last note of the previous measure. This big picture shows the correct end anchor result.\\
MuseScore 4.1.1 does not offer keyboard shortcut bindings to palette items, the keyboard shortcut key available in Musescore 3 that you can use to re-apply the same (last used) palette item is removed (not reimplemented yet). ## Creating pedal changes Not to be confused with [Harp pedal change](/idiomatic-notation/harp) Use type 1 markings, explained in ["adding marking" section](#adding-pedal-markings-to-your-score).\ For issues related to MusicXML direction import / export, there are upcoming changes in Musescore 4.2, see forum discussion \[please feel free to update info here] ## Pedal properties Select pedal marking(s), in [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel) Pedal section, [Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-properties) can be set, the extra option available to pedal marking is "Show line with rosette" checkbox under Style tab, tick it to make [the default line visible in printing and exporting](#types-of-pedal-markings).
## Pedal style See [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles) Values of the "Style for Pedal" can be edited in Format→Style→Pedal.\ Values of the "Style for text inside Pedal" can be edited in Format→Style→Text styles→Pedal\ See also [Line style](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-style).
# Cross-staff notation ## Creating cross-staff notation 1. First of all, enter the notation on one staff only 2. Select a note in the [voice](/basics/working-with-multiple-voices) that you wish to move up or down to the other staff, e.g.\ ![](/files/s3vmGNAmy5lzY6vn52tg) 3. Press `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Up`/`Down` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Up`/`Down`), to move the voice up or down to the other staff. Alternatively, you can click on the cross-staff icon in the toolbar and choose the same options from the context menu.\ ![](/files/Qppr3dwHupAVExjjCuy2) Note: Currently it is not possible to move individual notes of a chord from one stave to another; if you move one note, the whole chord will move. Therefore, if you want certain notes to remain on the original staff, they should be moved to a different voice. Also, be aware that notes which are moved to a different staff in this way still belong logically to the staff of origin - they are just drawn on a different staff. This is why no rest is shown on the staff where the notes have been moved from. ## See also [How to span a chord or stem over two staves](https://musescore.org/en/node/8717)
# Accordion notation \[work in progress, please add missing info] See [Accordion notation and playback](https://musescore.org/en/node/316284) tutorial. * accordion symbols are literally just symbol from the Symbols, but there is a dedicated palette for them * we could consider eliminating this page * we could also consider adding one for harp ## Adding accordion symbols to your score # Guitar # Fretboard diagrams ## Overview Fretboard (or chord) diagrams usually appear above the staff on lead sheets and piano scores.
They are commonly used for guitar chords, but MuseScore Studio allows you to create and customize diagrams for any stringed instrument. MuseScore Studio comes with a library of common fretboard diagrams which can be accessed by first creating chord symbols and then adding fretboard diagrams to them. ## Adding a fretboard diagram to your score The quickest way to add a fretboard diagram to your score is the following: {% stepper %} {% step %} Press `Ctrl` + `K` to enter a chord symbol at a selected nore or rest (Mac: `Cmd` + `K`). {% endstep %} {% step %} Type in any chord name. {% endstep %} {% step %} Right-click on the chord symbol and select Add fretboard diagram. A fretboard diagram corresponding to the chord symbol will automatically populate in the score. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} You can also use any of these other methods: * Select one or more [chord symbols](/text/chord-symbols#entering-chord-symbols) in the score, then either: * In the Properties panel, click the Add fretboard diagram button in the Chord symbol section. * Set a keyboard shortcut for the Add fretboard diagram action in Preferences -> Shortcuts and run it. * Select one or more notes, then click a fretboard diagram in Palettes -> Fretboard diagrams. * Drag and drop a fretboard diagram from a palette onto a note. {% hint style="info" %} To create a grid of fretboard diagrams summarizing every chord symbol in your score, see [Fretboard diagram legend](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/fretboard-diagram-legend). {% endhint %} ### How do chord symbols and fretboard diagrams interact? Fretboard diagrams and chord symbols on the same beat position and staff are considered linked. #### Autofilling fretboard diagrams When you change the name of a chord in a chord symbol, its linked fretboard diagram will update automatically to match it. Once you customize a diagram, to prevent it from being overwritten, it won't automatically update when you edit its linked chord symbol. If you never want fretboard diagrams to change when editing chord symbols, go to Preferences -> Note input -> Fretboard diagrams and turn on 'Never autofill fretboard diagrams when changing chord symbols'. #### Placement You can control the default distance between chord symbols and fretboard diagrams using the 'Minimum space from fretboard diagram' property found in Format -> Style… -> Chord symbols -> Positioning. You can further control individual chord symbol and fretboard diagram positioning using their [Appearance](/basics/properties-panel#appearance-settings) properties. A linked chord symbol can be deleted independently of its fretboard diagram and vice versa. You can also add a new linked chord symbol to a fretboard diagram by right-clicking on the diagram and choosing Add chord symbol, or using the `Ctrl` + `K` shortcut. ### Fretboard diagrams palette The Fretboard diagrams [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) provides some basic fretboard diagrams to get started with (major, minor, and 7th chords). To see the associated chord name, hover the cursor over a diagram. When any fretboard diagram from Palettes is added to the score, a chord symbol is automatically placed above it. The Blank diagram element lets you add a blank diagram, though when placed in the score you can immediately type in a chord symbol to fill the diagram automatically. You can save any in-score fretboard diagram to any palette by holding `Shift` + `Ctrl` (Mac: `Shift` + `Cmd`) and dragging the diagram from the score into the desired palette. ## Customizing a fretboard diagram #### To make your own custom fretboard diagram, or edit one that's been automatically filled: 1. Add the Blank diagram from the Fretboard diagrams palette (or select a diagram that's already in your score). 2. Open the Properties panel (toggle `F8`). 3. Edit the properties in the [Settings](#settings-tab) tab as required. 4. In the [General](#general-tab) tab, use the interactive fretboard diagram editor to customize the diagram as described below: * Finger dots (markers) * To add a dot: Click on a fret. The shape of the dot is determined by the Marker type setting. If Multiple dots is checked you can add more than one dot per string. * To delete a dot: Click on an existing dot/marker. * Barrés * To add a barré: Hold `Shift` and click on the fret where you want the barré to begin. Or, with Barré checked, simply click on the fret.
* To add a partial barré ending before first string: Create a standard barré first (see previous instruction). Then shorten it by `Shift` clicking (or clicking with Barré checked) where you'd like the barré to end.
* To delete a barré: Hold `Shift` and click on the 'top' of the barré (its left end). Or, with Barré checked, just click on the 'top'. * To create multiple barrés: Repeat the above steps at different fret positions. * Open / Mute strings: Click just above each string in the diagram to toggle between: * No symbol * Open (O) * Mute/Unplayed (X) See also [Fretboard diagram properties](#fretboard-diagram-properties) (below). ## Fretboard diagram properties
When a fretboard diagram is selected, its properties are viewable in the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel) as follows: ### General (tab) At the bottom of the Fretboard diagram properties section is an interactive editor of the selected fretboard diagram. The General tab contains tools for using the interactive editor, though the editor is also functional in the Settings tab. * Barré: Check on if you want to add or delete finger barrés with one click on the fretboard diagram editor below. Barrés can also be added by holding `Shift` while clicking instead. * Multiple dots: If unchecked you can only add one finger dot per string. If checked you can add multiple dots per string. * Marker type: When you click on the fretboard diagram editor, the shape of the dot added is determined by this property. The default shape is a round black dot, which suffices for standard chord (and scale) diagrams. A cross, square and triangle are provided to enable other [notation styles](#alternative-notation-styles-1). * Show fingerings: When turned on, you can specify a number[^1] to indicate which finger should be used to fret each string. * Clear: Clears everything, leaving a blank fretboard. ### Settings (tab) * Scale: Makes the fretboard diagram larger or smaller. * Strings: The number of strings to be displayed. * Visible frets: Specifies the number of displayed frets (these are added or removed from the bottom of the diagram, or the right if oriented horizontally) * Fret number: Specifies the starting fret of the diagram, displayed next to the topmost fret (or the leftmost fret, if oriented horizontally) * Show nut: Can be turned off to hide the emboldened line at the top of diagrams. Applies to [first position](#user-content-fn-2)[^2] diagrams only. * Orientation: Vertical draws diagrams top-to-bottom; Horizontal draws them left-to-right. * Position: Positions the diagram above or below the staff. * Exclude from vertical alignment: Turn on to exclude this fretboard diagram from automatic alignment of chord symbols and fretboard diagrams on the same staff. This checkbox syncs to the same checkbox in the properties of chord symbols linked to fretboard diagrams. ### Appearance Edit a fretboard diagram's color, offset, and more by clicking on Appearance in the Properties panel. See [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel#appearance-settings) for more details. ## Fretboard diagram style Global fretboard diagram properties can be set in Format -> Style… -> Fretboard diagrams:
## Alternative notation styles Some arrangers and educators have extended the basic form of the fretboard diagram, incorporating finger dots of various shapes (see [Marker type](#general-tab)), and allowing multiple dots per string. Jazz guitarist Ted Greene and his successors are notable examples. #### Multi-dot notation style With this approach, the chord signified by round dots on the fretboard diagram is played first (see image below). Then, on successive beats marked by chord symbols, the chord fingering is modified to incorporate other shapes on the same diagram. The usual playing order is: dot -> X -> square -> delta, but this can vary.
#### Optional-note notation style Another use of multiple dots per string allows other symbols to show optional notes, rather than delayed notes:
## See also * [Customizing palette contents](/customization/palettes#Customizing_palette_contents) [^1]: 1 = Index 2 = Middle 3 = Ring 4 = Pinky [^2]: First position means Fret number is set to 1, which means the diagram is drawn starting at the first fret. # Guitar techniques ## Adding a tremolo bar symbol to your score Tremolo bar symbols are available from the Guitar palette (look for the oversized "V") and are applied and adjusted in a similar way to [bend symbols](#adding-a-bend-symbol-to-your-score) (above)—with a similar graphical interface in the "Tremolo" bar section of [Properties](/basics/properties-panel). You can choose from a range of presets in "Tremolo bar type", or create your own custom one. ## Adding a slide to your score Slides can be found in the Arpeggios and glissandi palette. They are of two types: * Glissando-type slides: these run from one note or chord to the next.\\
* In / Out slides: played before or after a note; these can be slide-up or slide down.\\
By default, slides have a playback effect on the score. You can turn this off by unchecking "Play" in the General section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. ### Add a slide Use one of the following methods: * Select one or more notes as start points, then click the desired slide icon in the palette. * Drag the desired slide from the palette onto a note. In the case of in-between slides going from one chord to the next, the program will attempt to link the correct notes where possible. If further adjustment is required, see [below](#adjust-start-and-end-points-of-a-slide). ### Edit properties For in-between slides, the following properties can be adjusted in the Glissando section of the Properties panel. * Type: Choose between Straight or Wavy. * Show text: Tick this box to display text. Note: If there isn't enough room between notes, the text is not displayed. * Text: The wording displayed above the slide (if any). ### Adjust start and end points of a slide In-between slides: To move an end handle vertically or horizontally, from one note to the next: 1. Select the slide. 2. Click on the start or end handle. 3. Hold `Shift` and press an arrow key (`Up`, `Down`, `Left` or `Right`) to move the handle to the nearest note in that direction. Slides in/out: To adjust the position of the end handle: 1. Select the slide. 2. Click on the adjustment handle. 3. Drag the handle, or use the keyboard arrows. ## Adding a barre line to your score A Barre lines is a [text-line](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines) drawn above a guitar staff to indicate that the passage requires a full or half barre. Symbols such as the following are commonly found in guitar music: Full bar (2nd fret):\\
Half barre (2nd fret):\\
The C before the roman numerals can be omitted and other variations in line style and text are possible—according to the publisher. To apply a barre: 1. Click on the start note for the barre, then shift click on the end note to establish the range. 2. Click on the "Capo Line" symbol in the Guitar palette. 3. Customize the line and text as required. See [Line properties](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines#line-properties) (Other lines). To adjust the length of a line, see [Changing range of a line](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-range-of-a-line). ## Adding hammer-on and pull-off symbols to your score Hammer-ons and pull-offs are notated by [slurs](/notation/expressive-markings/slurs-and-ties). If you need text annotations as well, create them using [staff text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text); they can be saved to a palette for future use (see [Adding elements from your score](/customization/palettes#customizing-palette-contents)). ## Notating harmonics ### Standard staff A natural harmonic can be notated in one of three ways: * At the pitch of the open string on which it is produced. For example, harmonics on the third string appear as:\\
* At the pitch of the string fret at which it is produced. The same harmonics now appear as:\\
* At concert pitch. The same harmonics now appear as:\\
An annotation, such as "Nat. Har.", "N.H.", "Har.", is usually attached, as well as string and fret numbers; the notehead may be standard or diamond-shaped, and rendered clear rather than black; fret numbers may be Arabic or Roman, and so on. Fixing Playback: If harmonics do not play back at the correct pitch, mute them and create a hidden voice containing the harmonics at concert pitch. See also, [How to Read Harmonic Notation on the Classical Guitar](https://douglasniedt.com/Tech_Tip_How_To_Read_Harmonic_Notation.html) (douglasniedt.com). ### Tablature A natural harmonic in tablature may be rendered simply as a fretmark, or may be followed by a dot, or enclosed in a diamond, or a pair of angled brackets. e.g.
To create a pair of angled brackets: 1. Select a harmonic and add staff text. 2. Enter a "single left-pointing angle quotation mark" (U2039), then a space, then a "single right-pointing angle quotation mark" (U203A). 3. Move the text so it sits over the fretmark; 4. Adjust the font size of the staff text and the space inside it to just enclose the harmonic. 5. Save it to a palette for future use. ### Staff/Tablature pairs You should ensure that the staff/tab pairs are not linked, since you need to be able to edit each staff independently of the other. ## Notating guitar fingering The types of guitar fingering and how to apply them are explained in [Fingering](/text/fingering). ## Adding a bend symbol to your score Not to be confused with [brass or woodwind instrument bends](/notation/expressive-markings/arpeggios-and-glissandos#bends).\ This section shows old instructions for using Bends in MuseScore 4.0 to Musescore 4.1. For users of MuseScore 4.2 and above versions, see the [Guitar bends](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/guitar-bends) chapter. ### Apply a bend Bends are created with the Bend Tool located in the Guitar palette. To apply one or more bends to the score, use one of the following options: * Select one or more notes and click the bend symbol in the palette. * Drag the bend symbol from the palette on to a note. A default bend is created in the score. You can modify this bend or choose from a range of alternatives using “Bend type” in the Bends section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. ### Edit a bend Bend shape and length can be edited in the graphical display in the Bends section of the Properties panel:
Each red line segment between blue nodes represents one step in the bend, and each step extends horizontally for 1 [sp.](/appendix/glossary#spatium) in the score. The slope of any line shows whether it is an up-bend, a down-bend or a hold. So the above graph describes an up bend, then a hold—total length 2sp. The vertical axis of the graph represents the amount by which the pitch is bent up or down: one unit (the side of a small square) equals a quarter-tone, 2 units a semitone, 4 units a whole-tone, and so on. To add another step to a bend * add another node by clicking on the appropriate line intersection. To delete a bend step * click on the relevant node to remove it. ### Adjust bend height The height of the bend is automatically adjusted so that any text appears just above the staff. This height can be adjusted, if necessary, with a workaround: 1. Create another note vertically above the note (shortening the height) or below the note (extending the height) at which you want the bend to start. 2. Apply the bend to the new note. 3. To adjust the height of the bend move this created note vertically so that the bend symbol gets the desired height. 4. Drag the bend symbol to the correct position (to the original note). 5. Mark the created note invisible and silent (using the Properties panel). ### Reposition bend Bends can be freely repositioned using the methods shown in [Changing position of elements](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#changing-the-position-of-elements). # Creating a tablature staff ## Overview Music for fretted, stringed instruments is commonly notated using tablature (often abbreviated as tab); this gives a visual representation of the strings and fret numbers. Tablature is frequently found in combination with traditional staff notation.
## Types of tablature staves A variety of tablature templates for common instruments are supplied. If this isn't quite what you're looking for, you can easily change the template (see [Changing tablature staff type](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff#changing-tablature-staff-type)), and/or customize the staff (see [Tablature: customization](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff)). ## Adding a tablature staff to your score There are three possibilities: * [Create tablature as part of a new score](#add-tablature-using-the-new-score-dialog). * [Add tablature to an existing score](#add-tablature-using-the-add-or-remove-instruments-dialog). * [Change an existing staff from standard to tablature](#change-an-existing-staff-from-standard-to-tablature). ### Add tablature using the New Score dialog To create tablature as part of a new score: 1. Open the [New Score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) dialog. 2. Select the required tablature from either the Choose Instruments or Create from template tabs. 3. Complete the rest of the New Score dialog. ### Add tablature using the Instruments dialog To create a tablature staff in an existing score: 1. In the Layout panel, click on the `Add` button; or press the shortcut key, `I`. This brings up the Add or remove instruments dialog. 2. Click on the Strings – Plucked family and choose the desired tablature from the Instruments column. 3. Press `OK`. ### Change an existing staff from standard to tablature 1. Make sure that the standard staff contains a plucked string instrument; 2. Use one of the methods described under [Changing tablature staff type](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff#changing-tablature-staff-type). ## Creating paired standard and tablature staves Music for the guitar (and other plucked-string instruments) is often notated using paired standard and tablature staves. In MuseScore, the staves can be either linked or unlinked. * Linked: Any change you make to the notation in one staff automatically updates the other. * Unlinked: Each staff is edited independently. To update the other staff, copy and paste the relevant music notation. Note : In both cases, the staff/tablature pair shares the same instrument. ### Create paired standard/tab staves using the New Score Wizard There are two ways to do this when creating a new score (A or B): A. For linked staves only: 1. Open the New Score Wizard. 2. In the "Create from template" tab, click on the "Solo" category and choose the "Guitar + Tablature" . 3. Complete the rest of the New Score wizard. 4. Change the instrument type, if required, in [Staff / Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). 5. Change the tablature type, if required (see [Changing tablature staff type](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff#changing-tablature-staff-type)). B. For linked or unlinked staves: 1. Open the New Score Wizard. 2. In the "Choose instruments" tab, click on the "Strings – Plucked" family, and select a staff option from the "Instruments" column. 3. Complete the rest of the wizard. 4. Add the desired staff using the [Instruments panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings). ### Create paired standard/tab staves using the Instruments dialog Use this method when you want to add to an existing score: 1. Open the Add or remove instruments dialog: press `I`; or, alternatively, the `Add` button in the Instruments sidebar 2. Click on the Strings – Plucked family and choose the desired staff from the Instruments column. 3. Press `OK`. 4. Add the desired tablature from the [Layout panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings). Note: If you already have one staff of a standard/tab pair in your score, you can simply add the missing staff from the Instruments panel. See [Adding and configuring staves](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings#adding-and-configuring-staves). # Entering and editing tablature notation ## Computer keyboard entry 1. In [normal mode](/appendix/glossary#normal-mode), select a measure, or note/rest. 2. Switch to [note input mode](/appendix/glossary#note-input-mode): the cursor appears as a small “blue rectangle” on the currently "active" string. 3. Select the [duration](#selecting-note-duration) (see below) of the note or rest to be entered. 4. Press arrow keys to navigate: * `Up` and `Down` moves the cursor between strings. * `Left` and `Right` moves through the score. 5. Type digits to enter fret numbers from 0 to the maximum set in the [Edit String Data dialog](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff#change-number-of-instrument-frets). * Fret numbers 0 to 9 can also be entered with the letter keys `A` to `K`, skipping `I`. This is useful when writing French-style [period tablature notation](#period-tablature-notation). * Values higher than 9 must be typed as numeric digits. For example, type `1` `0` for 10, which appears as l (lowercase L) in French tablature. 6. Press `;` (semicolon) to enter a rest of the selected duration. 7. To enter grace notes, see [Grace notes](/notation/expressive-markings/grace-notes). 8. You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff. See also, [Editing notes and rests](#editing-tablature-notation) (below). ## Mouse entry 1. Enter [note input mode](/appendix/glossary#note-input-mode) and select the note or rest [duration](#selecting-note-duration) (see below). 2. Click on a string and MuseScore will enter a 0 (zero), which means "open string". * For French-style [period tablature notation](#period-tablature-notation), MuseScore enters an a (lowercase A) instead of 0. 3. Type digits to replace 0 with any fret number up to the maximum set in the [Edit String Data dialog](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff#change-number-of-instrument-frets). * Fret numbers 0 to 9 can also be entered with the letter keys `A` to `K`, skipping `I`. This is useful when writing French tablature. * Values higher than 9 must be typed as numeric digits. For example, type `1` `0` for 10, which appears as l (lowercase L) in French tablature. 4. You can increase/decrease the fret mark using `Alt`+`Shift`+`Up` or `Alt`+`Shift`+`Down`. 5. You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff. See also, [Editing notes and rests"](#editing-tablature-notation) (below). ## Selecting note duration Whether you are using a keyboard or mouse, you can set note duration using one of the following: * Press `Shift`+`0` up to `Shift`+`9`: to set duration from a 128th note to a longa (availability of these shortcuts may depend on the platform and/or keyboard layout); * Press NumPad `0` to `9`: to set duration from a 128th note to a longa (if a numeric keypad exists and NumLock is on); * Click on the desired note duration icon in the Note Input toolbar above the document window; * Press `Q` to decrease the selected duration and `W` to increase it. Note: This applies to note input mode only. If you want to change the duration of a selected note in normal mode see [Changing duration in normal mode](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests#changing-duration-in-normal-mode). ## Period tablature notation MuseScore also supports tablature notation for period instruments such as the renaissance and baroque lutes, Theorbo etc. There are a number of notation systems in use (French, Italian, German, Spanish), but the most common is French. French tablature features 6 lines representing the top 6 courses. Instead of numbers, fretmarks are indicated by letters—as explained [above](#computer-keyboard-entry). Any notes on bass courses below the 6th string (fretted or unfretted) are represented by symbols in the space underneath the 6th line of tablature. To enter symbols below the 6th course: 1. In note input mode, move the cursor until it is in the space below the 6th line. Press `Down` to move the cursor to the next lowest course and so on. As you do so a "cue mark" appears at the left side of the cursor to show you which course is active: | Cue mark | Number of course | Fretmark entered automatically for unstopped course | | -------- | ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | no cue | 7 | a | | / | 8 | /a | | // | 9 | //a | | /// | 10 | ///a | | 4 | 11 | 4 | | 5 | 12 | 5 | | 6 | 13 | 6 | | 7 | 14 | 7 | Conversely you can return to a higher course by pressing `Up`, and the cue mark changes accordingly.\ 2\. If the selected course is fretted simply enter a fretmark in note input mode (as shown above). If the selected course is unstopped press any note key in note input mode and MuseScore will automatically enter the correct zero fretmark (see table above). ## Editing tablature notation ### Changing the pitch In note input mode: 1. Position the cursor over the fret mark and type the desired number. 2. Increment or decrement the fret mark using `Alt`+`Shift`+`Up`; or, `Alt`+`Shift`+`Down` (The fret mark automatically changes strings, if necessary, to achieve the lowest possible fret position). In normal mode: 1. Select one or more fret marks. 2. Use any of the following commands: * To increment or decrement, without changing the string: Press `Up`/`Down`. * To increment or decrement, changing strings, when possible, to minimize the fret number: Press `Alt`+`Shift`+`Up`/`Down`. Note: The fret mark cannot be higher than the “Number of frets” value set in the Edit String Data dialog. ### Moving the fretmark to a different string To move the fret mark to an adjacent string without changing the pitch: In note input mode: * Position the cursor over a fret mark, and press `Ctrl`+`Up`/`Down` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Up`/`Down`). In normal mode: Use one of the following methods: * Select one or more fret marks, and press `Ctrl`+`Up`/`Down` (Mac: `Cmd`+`Up`/`Down`). * Drag a fret mark up or down to an adjacent string. Note: This operation can only proceed if the relevant string is free and can produce that note. ### Changing the duration See [Changing duration in normal mode](/basics/editing-notes-and-rests#changing-duration-in-normal-mode). ### Crosshead/Ghost notes To change a fret mark to a crosshead/ghost note: 1. Select one or more fret marks (in normal mode). 2. Press `Shift`+`X` to toggles ghost noteheads on/off. # Customizing a tablature staff ## Changing tuning 1. Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties… 2. Press the `Edit String Data…` button at the bottom of the dialog box. This opens the String Data dialog:\\
3. Under Strings tuning, click on a string pitch and select `Edit String…`; Alternatively, just double-click the string pitch. 4. Select a new pitch in the Note Selection box and click `OK`. Alternatively, just double-click the new pitch. 5. Click `OK` to close the “String Data” dialog box. 6. Click `OK` to close the Staff/Part Properties dialog. Notes: (1) If the tuning is changed on a tab staff that already contains some notes, fret marks will be adjusted automatically (if possible); (2) Any change of tuning to a particular instrument applies only to the score at hand, and does not change any program default settings. ## Adding or removing strings ### Add a string 1. Right-click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties… 2. Click on `Edit String Data…` 3. Click on a string pitch and select `New String…` 4. Select the new pitch and press `OK`; alternatively, just double-click the new pitch. The new string is inserted below the selected string. You will also need to adjust the number of lines in [Staff/Part properties→Advanced style properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#advanced-style-properties). ### Delete a string 1. Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties… 2. Click on `Edit String Data…` 3. Click on a string pitch and press `Delete String`. Note: After deleting a tablature string you will also need to adjust the number of lines in [Staff/Part properties→Advanced style properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#advanced-style-properties). ## Mark unfretted string “open” For an instrument such as the Baroque lute, this feature is used to mark a bass course as unstopped—i.e. always played open like a harp string. This means that only a fret mark indicating a zero fret can be displayed. To mark a bass course as unstopped: 1. Right-click on the staff, and select Staff/Part Properties... 2. Click on `Edit String Data…` 3. Check the required boxes in the Open column. See also [Period tablature notation](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/entering-and-editing-tablature-notation#period-tablature-notation). ## Change number of instrument frets This property defines the maximum fret number which can be entered on a tablature staff. 1. Right-click on the staff, and select Staff/Part Properties… 2. Click on `Edit String Data…` 3. Select or enter a new number using the “Number of frets” spinner. ## Changing tablature staff type MuseScore provides a range of common tablature types. If you want to change the tablature type, choose one of two options: ### Change staff type from the Layout panel 1. Ensure that the Layout panel is visible (toggle `F7`).
2. Click on the arrow next to the instrument name to reveal the staves. 3. Click on the edit cog next to the desired staff and choose an option from the "Staff type" dropdown. 4. To close, press `Esc`, or click outside the dialog. ### Change staff type from Staff/Part properties 1. Right-click onto an empty area of the staff and select `Staff/Part Properties…`. 2. Click on `Advanced Style properties`, select the desired option from "Template", then press `< Reset to Template`. You can fine tune the display if necessary using the "Fret Marks" and "Note Values" tabs. 3. Click `OK` twice to exit. Note: For customization options in detail, see [Customizing appearance of tablature](#customizing-appearance-of-tablature) (below). You will find the terms "simple", "common" and "full" in the tablature type names: * Simple: Displays just fretmarks. * Common: Displays fretmarks, rests, stems and beams. * Full: Displays fretmarks; rests, stems and beams, half-note stems. ## Customizing appearance of tablature ### Tablature staff properties 1. Right click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties… 2. Click on `Advanced Style Properties…`. This gives you access to a full range of tablature customization options. See [Staff properties: Tablature options](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#advanced-style-properties-settings-for-tablature-staff-type-2). ### Tablature staff style Global settings are set in Format→Style→Tablature styles.\\
# Applying capos ## Overview A capo is a device that can be clamped onto the fretboard of a fretted stringed instrument, such as the guitar. The capo effectively shortens the strings, which makes the instrument play in a higher key than it normally would. MuseScore allows you to emulate this effect by adding a Capo marking to an instrument staff (or staves). This automatically transposes playback to the desired pitch while keeping the notes, or fretmarks, unchanged. Partial capos, where only some strings are shortened, are also possible (see [below](#specifying-partial-capo-placement)). ## Applying a capo to your score The capo element is available in the Guitar palette, which is hidden by default. To find the capo element: 1. Click the Search Palettes button at the top of the palettes, or use the shortcut `Ctrl`+`F9` (macOS: `Cmd`+`F9`). 2. Type "capo". Alternatively, to permanently reveal the Guitar palette: 1. Click Add palettes 2. Click the Add button next to Guitar Note: The Add palettes dialog is not currently accessible to screen readers, so blind users must use the first method (via search). ### To apply a capo to a staff: 1. In the score, select the note or rest where you want to add a capo marking. 2. In the Guitar palette, select the Capo element. * “Capo 1” text is added to the score, and a Capo settings popup dialog appears next to it. 3. Adjust the capo's settings in the popup dialog (see below).
## Adjusting capo settings The Capo settings popup dialog appears when you add a new capo marking or select an existing capo marking in the score. Note: Keyboard users can press `Tab` to focus the Capo settings popup after it has appeared, and then use the arrow keys to navigate the available settings. If you press `Tab` a second time the popup will disappear. To get it back, simply deselect the capo marking with `Alt`+`Left`, reselect it with `Alt`+`Right`, and then press `Tab` to focus the popup. ### Turning capo on or off * Select On at the top of the Capo settings dialog to indicate that a capo should be added to the instrument. * Select Off to indicate that the capo should be removed from the instrument and return playback to the original key. By default, if you select Off the text in the score will change to read "No capo". ### Setting capo fret position The number in the Fret spinner refers to the fret where the capo should be applied. For example, fret 1 transposes the key up by a semitone, fret 2 by a whole tone, and so on. The text label in the score will update automatically. For example, if you choose fret 4, the text in the score will say "Capo 4". Note: Keyboard focus can get stuck in the fret edit control. If this happens, press `Up` and `Down` to change the value of the spinner, then press `Right` to move to the Apply to string checkboxes below. ### Setting the transposition behavior {% hint style="warning" %} This feature is only available in MuseScore Studio 4.7 and later versions. {% endhint %} There are three options in the dropdown menu beneath the Capo On/Off buttons. By default, notation and tablature fret markings will be shown as if the player were playing in open position. For example, in the image below the capo has been applied to the second fret. When Notation/tab in open position is selected, the highest sounding note of this F major chord is stopped at the first fret from the capo (the third fret from the nut of the guitar). In playback, a G major chord will be heard, since the capo at the second fret transposes the guitar up one whole tone.
{% hint style="info" %} Use Notation/tab in open position if the capo is used simply to transpose the music to a higher pitch than notated. For ease of readability, the guitarist can continue to read either the standard stave or the tablature stave as if they were playing in open position. {% endhint %} When Notation shows sounding pitches is selected, the notes on the standard stave will show the actual sounding pitches (in the below example, a G major chord). The tablature continues to show the played pitches as if the guitarist were reading in open position. In playback, a G major chord is heard.
{% hint style="info" %} Use Notation shows sounding pitches if it's important to see the actual pitches being played by the guitarist, for example when using a guitar score as a source file for arrangements, or in pedagogical or collaborative contexts where other players or singers need to reference the sounding pitches for their own performance. {% endhint %} Finally, when No transposition is selected, the pitches on the standard stave are shown as originally inputted. The tablature fret markings, however, are adjusted to show what the player needs to play in order to sound the pitches notated on the standard stave. These fret markings are displayed relative to the nut of the guitar. In the example below, the highest sounding note of the F major chord is stopped at the fourth fret on the second string, since the first fret on the first string is behind the capo and therefore unplayable. An F major chord is heard in playback.
{% hint style="info" %} Choose No transposition if the capo is being used to simplify the fingering – for example, when the music is written in an awkward key, or to reduce finger stretch. Use this option whenever the original key of the music must be maintained. {% endhint %} When No transposition is selected, notes that are no longer playable (because they are situated behind the capo itself) will be highlighted in red.
### Specifying partial capo placement The toggle switches in the Apply to section let you specify that a capo should be applied only on certain strings. When at least one string is turned off, the text in the score will change to indicate a partial capo. For example, if you choose fret 4 and then turn off strings 1 and 2, the text in the score would say "Partial capo: Fret 4 on strings 3, 4, 5, 6". ### Customizing capo text appearance To change the wording of the Capo text: 1. Check the Manually specify instruction text box in the popup dialog. 2. Type the text you want to appear in the score. ### To place the capo text beneath the staff: * Under Position, select Below.
## Changing capo setting mid-score Using the steps above, you can, if desired, vary the capo setting at different points in the score. Each capo instance will affect the transposition of all music that follows it, up until the next capo mark. Note: It is not possible to apply more than one capo at the same time. This feature is planned for a later release. # Alternate string tunings This page describes features added in MuseScore 4.2. For string tuning in older versions of MuseScore 4, see [Customizing a tablature staff](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/customizing-a-tablature-staff). ## Applying string tuning instructions To apply a string tuning instruction to a stave: 1. Go to the Guitar palette 2. Click and drag the String tunings element to a measure A tuning fork icon will appear above your stave. Alternatively, first select a measure, then select the String tunings element in the Guitar palette. String tuning instructions are added to measures, and affect only the stave to which they have been applied (including any linked staves). You can apply multiple string tunings at different measures in your score. Each string tuning will apply from the start of the measure to which it has been added, up until the next string tuning element. ## Specifying string tunings Once you've added a string tuning element to a stave, you can specify the tuning you want for your instrument. 1. Select the tuning fork icon (outlined in the steps above) 2. In the widget that appears, choose from the many common tunings in the Preset dropdown The tuning fork icon will be replaced with the conventional tuning text instruction, comprising encircled numbers for each of the instrument's strings, and text designations showing the new pitch of each string. You can customise the string tuning text to display any number of strings, as well as any pitch you like: 1. Click on the string tuning text 2. In the widget that appears, toggle on or off the 'eye' icon to show or hide instrument strings 3. Adjust the pitch of each string using up and down arrows in the text boxes alongside each string Note that the 'eye' icons merely show or hide the text instruction on the score. The actual tuning of each string, insofar as it affects playback and tablature fret positions (see more below), is determined by the pitch indicated in the text field alongside each string – regardless of whether that string's tuning instruction is shown or hidden in the score. ## Alternate tunings affect tablature fret positions When an alternate tuning element is applied to a stave, the pitch specified for each string will be shown as an open position ("0") in the tablature stave. During playback, the pitch of all fret positions along each string remains relative to the pitch of the open string: For example, * If the sixth string is tuned to E, the open position will sound like an E during playback, and the first fret will sound like an F; * If the sixth string is tuned down to a D, the open position will sound like a D during playback, and the first fret will sound like an E-flat. The notation on any linked standard stave remains unaffected by the presence of alternate string tunings. This allows the player to continue reading the sounding pitches of each string. ## Reading transposed pitches on the standard stave Sometimes, especially in cases where every string on the instrument has been uniformly tuned down, it will be preferable for the player to read the standard notation at the ‘regular‘ (i.e. pre-tuned) pitch rather than the sounding pitch. In order to achieve this, the standard stave can be transposed. 1. Right-click on a measure in the standard stave 2. Select Stave/Part properties... 3. In the Transposition dropdown menu, select your desired transposition amount. A common example is to want to tune the guitar down a half-step without affecting the standard notation. To achieve this: 1. Apply an alternate string tuning element to your stave (see steps above) 2. Select the Tune down 1/2 step preset 3. Where required, add a key signature that corresponds to the pitch of the song/work (I.e. its concert pitch) 4. Right-click on a measure and choose Stave/Part properties... 5. From the Transposition dropdown menu, select 1 – Minor second 6. Select the Down radio button 7. Finally, if you are using a linked tablature stave and wish for the tablature fret positions to continue showing the expected standard fingering, select the Don't reflect transposition in linked tablature staves checkbox 8. When you're done, click OK. Both the standard stave and any linked tablature stave (where applicable) will show the fret positions and standard notation at the standard playing pitch (as if no alternate tuning had been specified). Playback will, however, reflect the alternate tuning. Toggling on Concert pitch will show the sounding pitches notated on the standard stave. \[Draft only: more content forthcoming] # Guitar bends & dives {% hint style="info" %} This page describes pitch bends and dives specifically for guitar performance. For other types of bends, see [brass or woodwind instrument bends](/notation/expressive-markings/arpeggios-and-glissandos#bends). {% endhint %} ## About bends & dives Bend and dive lines can be used to indicate downward or upward pitch bends. Bends are created by pulling the string upwards or downwards with the fingers stopping the strings on the fretboard. Dives are created by pressing down or pulling up a whammy/vibrato bar attached to the bridge of the guitar. Bends change the pitch of both individual notes and chords, whereas dives change the pitch uniformly across all strings. The following types of bends and dives can be added to your score: | Bends | Dives | | --------------- | ------------- | | Standard bend | Standard dive | | Pre-bend | Pre-dive | | Grace note bend | Dip | | Slight bend | Scoop | All these elements can be found in the Guitar palette. ## How they work in MuseScore Studio In most cases, bends and dives in MuseScore connect two notes together: a ‘starting note’ and an ‘arrival note’. Bends and dives are contextual, meaning if the arrival note is higher than the starting note, an upward bend/dive will be created. Conversely, if the arrival note is lower than the starting note, a release or downward dive will be drawn. Whenever a bend/dive is added to a tablature stave, both the starting and arrival notes will be entered as a fret positions. The arrival note, however, will be hidden by default. This allows you to create sequences of multiple bends or dives, including bend-release-bend combinations, using only the tablature stave, without needing to input notes in the standard stave. If you're working mainly in the standard stave, you may find it more convenient to hide these fret positions via the Invisible setting in the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. In all cases, the bend/dive amount, being the intervallic distance between the starting and arrival notes, is reflected by the notated pitches on the standard stave. This allows you to see the shape of a melodic line, including the pitches created by bending the strings. It also allows the rhythm of the melodic line, including the metrical timing of any bends and dives, to be communicated clearly to the player. On the tablature stave, the bend/dive amount is given by a numerical indicator: "1" for a whole tone, "1/2" for a half-tone (semitone), "1/4" for a quarter-tone, etc. ## Adding bends and dives You can apply all types of bends and dives to your score in any of these ways: * Select one or more notes and click the desired bend/dive symbol in the Guitar palette * Drag the desired bend/dive symbol from the Guitar palette on to a note or chord * Select one or more notes, and enter the required keyboard shortcut (see details below) Bends and dives can be added to both individual notes and chords. Simply select all the notes you want the pitch bend to apply to before adding your required bend or dive element. On the tablature stave, bend lines between chordal notes of the same intervallic value will automatically consolidate to a single intervallic number, while for dive lines connecting multiple chords, only a single line will be drawn. {% tabs %} {% tab title="Adding bends" %} ### Standard bends Windows `Alt`+`B` | macOS `Option`+`B`
A standard bend connects two notes together: a ‘starting note’ and an ‘arrival note’. Standard bends are mostly used when it is desired to clearly specify the rhythm of the bend pattern. When a bend is added to a note, it will automatically be drawn to the next note in the score (the arrival note). If a rest follows the starting note, MuseScore will replace the rest so that the bend has an arrival note to connect to. ### Grace note bends Windows `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`B` | macOS `Cmd`+`Option`+`B`
Grace note bends can be used to indicate bends that don’t have a defined rhythmic duration; they are generally played quite quickly before the beat. When you apply a grace note bend to a note, it will automatically be entered one diatonic step lower than the note it precedes. ### Pre-bends No default keyboard shortcut: set your own shortcut in [Preferences](/customization/preferences)
Pre-bends indicate a string that has been bent prior to being struck. On the standard stave, it is represented as a stemless, parenthesised grace note. On the tablature stave, it is illustrated with a straight, rather than curved arrow. ### Slight bends No default keyboard shortcut: set your own shortcut in [Preferences](/customization/preferences)
Slight bends are the only bend type in MuseScore that do not connect to an arrival note. They are always set to a pre-defined amount of a ¼ of a tone, and always bend upwards from the starting note. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Adding dives" %} ### Standard dives No default keyboard shortcut: set your own shortcut in [Preferences](/customization/preferences).
A standard dive connects two notes together: a ‘starting note’ and an ‘arrival note’. Standard dives are mostly used when it is desired to clearly specify the rhythm of the dive pattern. When a dive is added to a note, it will automatically be drawn to the next note in the score (the arrival note). If a rest follows the starting note, MuseScore will replace the rest so that the dive has an arrival note to connect to. ### w/bar text line The "w/bar" text line is a separate element that can be added where desired from the Guitar palette. Options to customise it can be found in [Styles](#customizing-the-style-of-bends-and-dives). ### Pre-dives No default keyboard shortcut: set your own shortcut in [Preferences](/customization/preferences).
A chord comprising three notes is bent down by a whole tone with the whammy/vibrato bar before being played. Once the chord is played, the whammy/vibrato bar is returned to its resting position.
Pre-dives indicate that the whammy/vibrato bar has been used to change the pitch of the strings prior to them being struck. On the standard stave, it is represented as stemless, parenthesised grace notes. On the tablature stave, it is illustrated with a dashed vertical line, rather than an unbroken diagonal line. ### Dips
A dip indicates a single pitch bend sequence over the duration of the note(s) to which it is attached. Once a note is struck, a dip can indicate either an upward or downward pitch bend to an intervallic value specified in the text label before the whammy/vibrato bar is returned to its starting position. The direction and intervallic value of dips can be specified in the Properties panel. In Properties, you can also append a tremolo line to the end of a dip: 1. Select a dip in your score 2. Go to Properties 3. Under Tremolo line, choose either a Normal or Wide line. The tremolo line will appear connected to the selected dip. It's length can be adjusted by moving its drag handles (See [Working with lines](/basics/adjusting-elements-directly#working-with-lines)). ### Scoops
Scoops are indicated by a small tick pointing towards the notehead. They are played by bending the whammy/vibrato bar downwards slightly, shortly before the moment of plucking the string. As the string is plucked, the whammy/vibrato bar is quickly returned to its resting position. {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} ### Holds Hold lines are drawn automatically wherever a note or chord containing a bend or dive is subsequently tied to one or more notes. A hold is indicated by a dashed horizontal line. It is only ever shown in the tablature stave.
A hold connecting a pre-bend and a release

A hold showing the sustained position of the whammy/vibrato bar over one-and-a-half beats
In addition, you can manually show or hide hold lines where it makes sense to do so. 1. Select a bend or dive in your score 2. Open the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel 3. Under Hold line, select either Show or Hide to force a hold line to be drawn, or to be hidden, respectively ## Modifying bends and dives Both the intervallic amount and playback speed of bends can be adjusted in MuseScore, either by modifying the pitch of bent notes on the standard stave, or adjusting the bend/dive curve in the Properties panel. ### Modifying bends and dives on the standard stave To change the bend amount of a a bend or dive on the standard stave, simply raise or lower the pitch of either the starting or arrival note in your score. The fractional indicator in any linked tablature stave will be adjusted automatically. Slight bends, dips, and scoops can only have their playback timing and intervallic values adjusted in the Properties panel. ### Modifying bends and dives in the Properties panel Both the pitch bend amount and its playback speed can be adjusted via the Properties panel. To adjust the bend amount: 1. Apply a bend to your score, using any of the methods outlined above 2. Select the bend 3. Open the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel 4. In the Customize bend/dive graph, click and drag the end point of the curve up or down {% embed url="" %} {% hint style="info" %} The bend/dive curve can also be modified using the computer keyboard alone, without requiring use of the mouse. 1. Navigate to a bend or dive in your score (See [Navigating the score](/navigation/accessibility#navigating-the-score)) 2. Press `esc` 3. Use `tab` to navigate to the Properties panel 4. Press `tab` until the Bend/dive section is reached 5. Press the `down` arrow key until the Customize bend/dive section is reached 6. Press `spacebar` to select the starting position point of the curve 7. Hold `alt` (`Option` on macOS) while using the `left` and `right` arrow keys to switch between points along the curve 8. Use the `up` and `down` arrow keys to modify the pitch of the selected point {% endhint %} The left-most point of the bend/dive curve corresponds to the starting note. The right-most point corresponds to the arrival note. Dragging the right-most (end point) of the curve upwards raises the arrival note in ¼-tone steps. In the same way, dragging the end point downwards lowers the pitch of the arrival note. The fractional indicator in the tablature stave, and the notated pitch in the standard stave, will be updated accordingly. To adjust the playback speed of a bend/dive: 1. Select a bend/dive in your score 2. Open the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel 3. In the Customize bend/dive graph, click and drag the start and end points of the curve left or right
Dragging a curve point horizontally changes only its playback speed, including the duration for which the starting and arrival notes are held (indicated with a horizontal line). It does not affect rhythmic notation in your score. ## Special cases ### Showing slackened strings A slack line indicates when the vibrato/whammy bar is depressed to the extent that the strings become slackened and no longer produce discernible pitches. To create a slack line: 1. Select a standard dive in your score 2. Go to Properties 3. Click and drag the end point of the Customize dive curve all the way to the bottom of the graph {% embed url="" %} ### Creating unison bends To create a unison bend: 1. Create a chord containing two notes in unison (Add a unison interval to an existing note using `alt`+`1` on Windows, or `option`+`1` on macOS) 2. Select the note to which you wish a bend to apply 3. Add the desired bend (see steps above)
In the case of unison bends, it can be helpful to apply the bend in the tablature stave, where it can be easier to see which string exactly is being bent. ## Customizing the style of bends & dives To customize the appearance of bends and dives across an entire score: 1. Go to Format in the menu bar 2. Select Style... 3. In the dialog that appears, choose Bends & dives from the list of categories on the left The following options are available: {% tabs %} {% tab title="Bends" %} Line thickness: the thickness of all bend lines on both standard and tablature staves Arrow width and Arrow height: the width and height of the arrow heads on bend curves in tablature staves Label for full bends: choose from displaying "1" or the word "full" to indicate a whole-tone bend in the tablature stave {% endtab %} {% tab title="Dives" %} Line thickness: the thickness of all dive lines on both standard and tablature staves The option to show dive lines: * On the stave: all dive lines will be drawn directly across the tablature stave lines * Above the stave: all dive lines will be drawn above the tablature stave {% hint style="info" %} It is also possible to move selected individual dive lines to above the stave via the Properties panel. {% endhint %} Various Whammy bar line options to modify the default text and its style ('w/bar' is used as default), as well options to customize the line element itself (including its style, thickness and dash and gap values). {% endtab %} {% tab title="Both bends & dives" %} Use cue sized fret numbers: select this checkbox to make all fret positions of grace notes cue sized (by default, fret position numbers for grace note bends are the same size as fret position numbers for other types of bends). You can align the vertical line drawn from pre-bends and pre-dives to the main note or to the grace note with the radio button toggle. The above options apply to the tablature stave only. Interval labels for fractional intervals ('1/2', '1/4', etc.) can be styled diagonally or with a level baselin using the toggle buttons at the bottom of this page. The text style itself can be modified in the Text styles page. {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} # Fretboard diagram legend ## Overview The fretboard diagram legend element is used to present a table of each unique [chord symbol](/text/chord-symbols) in a given score along with corresponding guitar [fretboard diagrams](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/fretboard-diagrams). This is useful for illustrating how to play all the chords in a score in one place without cluttering the notation itself with diagrams.
## Adding a fretboard diagram legend {% hint style="info" %} The most common place to insert a fretboard diagram legend is at the start of the score. {% endhint %} To add a fretboard diagram legend: 1. Open a score containing [chord symbols](/text/chord-symbols). 2. Add a fretboard diagram legend using one of the following methods: * In the Layout palette, drag a fretboard diagram legend onto the measure where you'd like to insert the legend (e.g. the first measure). * Select a note or rest in the measure where you'd like to insert the legend, then either: * Click the fretboard diagram legend element in the Layout palette. * Navigate to Add -> Chords and fretboard diagrams -> Fretboard diagram legend or Add -> Frames -> Insert fretboard diagram legend. * Define a keyboard [shortcut](/customization/keyboard-shortcuts#defining-a-shortcut) for Insert fretboard diagram legend and run it. The legend will be filled with one diagram for each chord symbol in the score in the order in which they appear. If the same chord symbol is used multiple times in the score, it's only represented once in the legend. {% hint style="info" %} Chord symbols within the score don't need to have fretboard diagrams in order for them to show up in the legend. {% endhint %} #### Adding a legend at the end of the score If you want to add a fretboard diagram legend after the last measure in your score, you can either: * Navigate to Add -> Frames -> Insert at end of score -> Fretboard diagram legend. * Define a keyboard [shortcut](/customization/keyboard-shortcuts#defining-a-shortcut) for Insert fretboard diagram legend at end of score and run it. ## Editing a fretboard diagram legend ### Editing individual elements in the legend Chord symbols and fretboard diagrams are individually selectable within the fretboard diagram legend. You can change the appearance and some other properties of chords symbols in the legend, but you cannot edit the chords themselves. You can customize the fretboard diagram that appears beneath each chord by selecting it and editing its properties. See [Fretboard diagrams](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/fretboard-diagrams#customizing-a-fretboard-diagram). ### Adding different diagrams for the same chord To include different diagrams for the same named chord, you can use special chord symbol [syntax](/text/chord-symbols#chord-symbol-syntax): 1. Add a fretboard diagram legend. 2. Create two chord symbols in the score, appending `type` and any number of character by which you want to distinguish them (e.g. `Atype1` and `Atype2`). 1. See that in the legend, there are now two different `A` chords. 3. Select the fretboard diagram for the chord(s) you would like to [customize](/idiomatic-notation/guitar/fretboard-diagrams#customizing-a-fretboard-diagram), and do so in Properties. ## Fretboard diagram legend properties To select the legend to edit its [properties](/basics/properties-panel), click any blank area within the legend's dotted boundary line. ### Chords tab Every unique chord symbol in the score is represented in the list of chords in this tab. Use this tab to reorder, hide, or reset chords in the legend.
#### Reordering chords in the legend Select a chord in the list in the Chords tab, then use the arrow buttons to move it up or down in the list. #### Hiding chords in the legend Turn the visibility (eye) button off for chords that you want to hide from the legend. You can also select a chord symbol or fretboard diagram in the legend in the score, and either: * Press `Delete` or `Backspace`. * Right-click it and select Hide in the context menu. #### Resetting the legend Use the Reset button to make all chords visible and reset the order to the default. ### Frame tab
Many of these properties are the same as those of [Vertical frames](/formatting/using-frames-for-additional-content#vertical-frames). * Scale with staff size: When checked on, the contents of the legend will scale in proportion to the Staff space setting in Page settings -> Scaling. * Text scale: Adjust the size of all chord symbols in the legend relative to the default. * Diagram scale: Adjust the size of all fretboard diagrams in the legend relative to the default. * Column gap: Adjust the horizontal space between each fretboard diagram. * Row gap: Adjust the vertical space between each row of fretboard diagrams. * Chords per row: Set the maximum number of chords and diagrams in each row. * Alignment: Choose whether to align the diagram contents to the left, center, or right of the legend's frame. * Gap to staff/frames: * Above: Set the amount of space above the legend to the bottom of the preceding frame or the bottom staff line of the preceding staff. * Below: Set the amount of space below the legend to the top of the following frame or the top staff line of the following staff. * Between two adjacent vertical frames or legends, both the first frame's gap below and the second frame's gap above are considered, but only the larger value is applied. * Clearance for notation: If the preceding/following staff has notation that extends beneath/above the staff, this sets the amount of space above/below the legend to that notation. * Left/right/top/bottom padding: Adjust space from the legend contents to the edges of its containing frame. * Left padding is usable when Alignment is set to Align left and Right padding is usable when it's set to Align right. # Harp ## Overview Harps typically have seven strings per octave, with one string per pitch-class from C to B. Modern harps also have seven pedals, each of which has three positions: middle (natural), highest (flattened), and lowest (sharpened). Raising the pedal from middle position loosens the tension of one pitch-class of strings in every octave, lowering the notes by a half step, and lowering the pedal results in notes a half step higher. For example, moving the C pedal to the lowest position will make all C strings play C#. In notated music for pedal harps, diagrams or text markings in the score indicate when to change pedal positions to change playable notes. ## Adding a harp pedal diagram to your score The harp pedal diagram element is available in the Harp notation palette. ### To apply a harp pedal diagram to a staff: 1. Click in the score where you want to add a harp pedal diagram. 2. Click the Harp pedal diagram element in the Harp notation palette. 3. Choose the tuning in the popup dialog.
Notes that cannot be played with the selected pedal configuration will turn red. The diagram view shows every pedal, while the text view shows only the notes that need to change since the last pedal marking. By default, diagrams appear above the staves and text markings appear between them. To change a diagram, select it in the score to reopen the popup dialog. ## Reading harp pedal diagrams ### Visual diagram The diagram corresponds visually to the seven harp pedals. The three to the left of the vertical line are the left foot pedals; the four on the right correspond to the right foot. From left to right, the notes the pedals control are: * Left foot: D, C, B * Right foot: E, F, G, A A bar on the line indicates the middle position, which plays a natural note. A bar above the line tells the player to raise the pedal, flattening the note, and a bar below indicates lowering the pedal, sharpening the note. For example, the playable notes indicated by the diagram below are C#, D, E, F#, G#, A, and B.
### Text diagram The upper line of notes refers to the pedals controlled by the right foot, and the bottom line to the left foot pedals. The first instance of a harp pedal text diagram in the score will always show the positions of all seven pedals. The text view shows only the notes that need to change since the last pedal marking. Text diagrams appear between the staves by default, but can be manually repositioned.
# Percussion # Inputting percussion notation {% hint style="info" %} This section describes note entry for unpitched percussion instruments. For pitched percussion instruments, see [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests). {% endhint %} ## Overview {% embed url="" %} In MuseScore Studio, each unpitched percussion instrument, including combination instruments like drum kits and mixed percussion, comes preconfigured for seamless notation and playback. This means that when you add an instrument – whether it be a single cow bell, or a complete drum kit – the notation for each sub-instrument in the kit (bass drum, snare drum, cymbals, etc.), as well as any techniques and variants (hits, rim shots, rim knocks, etc.) is configured automatically. MuseScore Studio takes care of the number of stave lines for the kit, as well as the shape and placement of all noteheads on the stave. What's more, the correct sound is automatically assigned in playback for MS Basic and MuseSounds libraries. If you have unique notation requirements, there are of course options to customize the mapping for each instrument (See [Percussion kit customization](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/percussion-kit-customization)). ## Adding a percussion instrument to your score You can add a percussion instrument just like any other instrument (see [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) and the [Layout panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings)). Each unpitched percussion instrument comes with a pre-configured set of sub-instruments, as well as variants and techniques that are determined by the sound library chosen in the mixer. In addition to individual orchestral percussion instruments and marching drumlines, MuseScore Studio comes with several combo kits that combine many common sub-instruments onto one stave. These include: * Drum kits (common, minimal, large) * Mixed percussion * General MIDI percussion It is possible to customize the stave of any existing unpitched instrument with a unique combination of sub-instruments, although playback support may not always be available. To learn more, see [Percussion kit customization](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/percussion-kit-customization). ## Inputting notes and rests on percussion staves There are several ways to enter notation on a percussion stave. We'll cover each one in turn. These are: * Using the percussion input panel * Input by mouse directly on the stave * Keyboard shortcuts * Input via MIDI keyboard * Input using the virtual piano ### Using the percussion input panel To open the percussion input panel: * Select the stave of an unpitched percussion instrument, or * Select a note or rest on an unpitched percussion stave The percussion panel appears at the bottom of the app window. It shows all sub-instruments and variants available on the selected stave, as determined by the sound library assigned in the mixer for that instrument:
The percussion panel in MuseScore Studio uses a drum pad style layout that makes it easy to see what sub-instruments and variants are available for your instrument.
To input notation using the percussion input panel, click on any of the drum pads. Notation will be entered at the note input cursor position, regardless of the voice to which the selected sub-instrument or variant is assigned. {% embed url="" %} Write mode will be enabled by default. This means that any click on a drum pad will input notation directly on the stave. To hear the sound of instruments assigned to a drum pad without inputting notation: 1. Click the Preview button in the percussion panel header 2. Click on a drum pad to hear its sound 3. Click the Write button again to resume notation See [Customizing the percussion panel](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/customizing-the-percussion-panel) for more. ### Input by mouse directly on the stave To input percussion notation directly on the stave with your mouse: 1. Select the stave where you want to input notation 2. Enter [note input mode](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests) 3. Hover your mouse pointer over the stave to see a preview note for the instrument or variant assigned to that stave position 4. (Optional) Hold `Shift` while hovering to see a popup that labels the instrument at each stave position. Where left/right arrows appear in the popup, click on them to scroll through the available variants at the same stave space or line. 5. Left-click the notehead to input the note The preview note shows whatever instrument or variant is available at the stave position where your mouse pointer is hovering. When you move your mouse, the preview note will change to show whatever is available at each new position. ### Keyboard shortcuts You can assign a keyboard shortcut to each pad in the percussion panel. By default, the first row of pads will take the keys `A`, `B`, `C`, `D`, `E`, `F`, `G`, `H`. Any key can be assigned to a pad, although you'll be prompted if your chosen key conflicts with another shortcut command. To assign a keyboard shortcut to a drum pad: 1. Click the bottom grey options section of a drum pad (or navigate to it using the `Tab` key) 2. Select Define keyboard shortcut ### Using a MIDI controller To add notes to an unpitched percussion stave using a [MIDI keyboard](/sound-and-playback/working-with-midi): 1. Select a note, rest, or measure 2. Select a [note duration](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-duration) 3. Press a key on your MIDI keyboard to input a note 4. (Optional) Press `0` to enter a rest of the selected duration Notation will be entered on the stave in whatever note input mode has been set as the default in Preferences. For more information on using different note input modes, see [Entering notes and rests](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests). Each drum pad on the percussion panel displays the MIDI key assigned to each available sub-instrument or variant. Note that these will change depending on the sound library assigned to that instrument in the mixer. ### Using the on-screen piano keyboard To add notes to an unpitched percussion stave using MuseScore Studio's on-screen piano keyboard: 1. Open the piano keyboard by going to View > Piano keyboard (or use the shortcut `P`) 2. Select a measure, note, or rest 3. Select a [note duration](/basics/entering-notes-and-rests#selecting-duration) 4. Click a key on the on-screen piano keyboard with your mouse 5. (Optional) To add another note to an existing one, press and hold `Shift` clicking a different key 6. (Optional) Press `0` to enter a rest of the selected duration ### Applying additional techniques and variants Many sound libraries come with additional techniques and variants that can extend the performance of your instruments. For example, snares can be set to on or off, or different implements can be used, including sticks, brushes, and hot rods. These are added using [sound flags](/sound-and-playback/sound-flags). Note that this feature is currently only available for selected MuseSounds libraries. Options will vary depending on the chosen sound library. Learn more about [sound flags.](/sound-and-playback/sound-flags) # Customizing the percussion panel You can customize the percussion panel in various ways to best suit your personal preferences and workflow requirements. ## View pad names or notation previews By default, the percussion panel shows the names of each sub-instrument and variant in your chosen instrument. To instead view a notation preview for each pad: 1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header. 2. Choose Notation preview. Hover over a pad with your mouse pointer to see a tooltip displaying the name of the instrument or variant assigned to that drum pad. To switch back to viewing pad names: 1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header. 2. Choose Pad names. Your choice of pad names or notation previews is saved to the score, so it won't affect the panel layout in other scores. Moreover, it applies to all unpitched percussion instruments in your score – not just the one you're working on. ## Move drum pads to different positions You can change the position of each drum pad to best suit your instrument setup or preferred layout. To change the position of a drum pad: 1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header. 2. Choose Edit layout. An outline appears around each pad position, indicating you can now edit the drum pad layout. 3. Click and drag a drum pad to another position. 4. Release your mouse click to drop the drum pad in its new position. 5. Click Finish editing in the percussion panel header to continue writing music. {% hint style="info" %} You can also move pads to different positions using only your computer keyboard. 1. Use `Tab` to focus on a drum pad 2. Use the arrow keys to shift focus to your desired drum pad 3. Press `Space` or `Enter` to select the pad you wish to move 4. Use the arrow keys to move the selected drum pad to a different slot position 5. Press `Space` or `Enter` to drop the drum pad in its new position {% endhint %} ## Delete drum pads You can delete drum pads you don't need in order to save on space. To delete a drum pad: 1. Click the grey panel at the bottom of a drum pad (or navigate to it by pressing `Tab` and then `Enter`). 2. Select Delete. When a drum pad is deleted, an empty space remains in its place. This can be used either as a spacer, or as the position for a different drum pad (see [Move drum pads to different positions](#move-drum-pads-to-different-positions)). ## Add and remove rows Changing the number of percussion panel rows gives you more flexibility to arrange the drum pads in a way that best suits your project and workflow requirements. To add rows in the percussion panel: 1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header. 2. Choose Edit layout. 3. Click Add row. Drum pads can be moved to empty spaces (see [move drum pads to different positions](#move-drum-pads-to-different-positions)). Rows that are manually added can be deleted by clicking the trash can button to the left of the row. ## Change the number of columns 1. Click Layout in the percussion panel header. 2. Hover over 8 columns (this might say another number if you've already customized this). 3. Choose a new number of columns (4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 24). ## Save and reuse a custom pad layout Once you customize the percussion panel for a particular instrument in your score, you can save all layout changes and keyboard shortcuts to use again when using the same instrument and sound in this score or other scores. #### To save a custom layout: 1. Make any desired customizations to the pad layout. 2. Click Customize kit in the percussion panel header. 3. Click Save as... in the dialog and save it to your computer. This creates a `.drm` file that you can load in any score. #### To load the saved layout on a different instrument: 1. Select anything on a staff belonging to the instrument you want to load the saved percussion panel layout onto. 2. Click Customize kit in the percussion panel header. 3. Click Load... and then select the `.drm` file you created above. 4. Click Apply or OK to apply the changes. ## Undock and resize the panel Like all panels, the percussion panel can be undocked and resized to create an optimal workspace for your project and setup. Learn more about [docking and undocking panels](https://musescore.gitbook.io/musescore-studio-handbook/customization/toolbars-and-windows#docking-and-undocking-panels) and saving your preferred app layout as [workspaces](https://musescore.gitbook.io/musescore-studio-handbook/customization/workspaces). ## Choose when to use the new percussion panel Depending on your screen size and the number of drum pads in the instruments you are using, you can choose to use the legacy percussion panel instead of the new one. The legacy panel will continue to be available until further features are added that will better optimize the new panel for large instruments. To use the legacy percussion panel: 1. Open [Preferences](https://musescore.gitbook.io/musescore-studio-handbook/customization/preferences). 2. Click on Percussion in the navigation panel. 3. Toggle on Use legacy percussion panel. Note that any custom keyboard shortcuts assigned to percussion instruments will apply to both the new and legacy panels. # Percussion kit customization ## Overview You can customize the name, notehead style, stave position, stem direction, keyboard shortcut, and default voice assignment for each sub-instrument and variant in an unpitched percussion instrument. To access these options, click Customize kit from the percussion panel header. ## Customizing percussion notation Using the options in the Customize kit dialog, you can: * [Rename sub-instruments and variants](#rename-sub-instruments-and-variants) * [Customize noteheads](#customize-noteheads) * [Assign a default voice](#assign-a-default-voice) * [Change stave positions](#change-stave-positions) * [Assign a keyboard shortcut](#assign-a-keyboard-shortcut) * [Choose the default stem direction](#choose-the-default-stem-direction)
The Customize Kit dialog allows you to edit the appearance of all sub-instruments and variants in your kit.
In the panel on the left, you can sort the list of sub-instruments and variants in the following ways: * Click the No. column header to sort by MIDI number * Click the Note column header to sort by pitch * Click the Shortcut column header to sort by keyboard shortcut * Click the Name column header to sort by name {% hint style="info" %} Sorting by MIDI number allows you to see the names of sub-instruments and variants in same order as they appear in the percussion panel as drum pads. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} Any customizations made in this dialog will be immediately shown in the preview panel. Changes will also be automatically shown in the score, however these will only be committed when you click OK. These changes are undoable. {% endhint %} ### Rename sub-instruments and variants To rename a sub-instrument or variant: 1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left 2. Type your desired label in the field next to Name. The corresponding drum pad label in the [percussion panel](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/customizing-the-percussion-panel) will be updated when you click either Apply or OK. ### Customize noteheads To customize the noteheads assigned to a sub-instrument or variant: 1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left 2. Click the dropdown next to Notehead group 3. Choose from the large range of noteheads in the dropdown menu Each notehead group comes with up to four possible style variants for different durations (quarter note, half note, whole note, double whole note). These come pre-defined, but can be edited if you have specific requirements. To edit noteheads for individual durations within a notehead group: 1. Click the Edit noteheads checkbox 2. Choose your required notehead for each duration in the corresponding dropdown menus ### Assign a default voice To change the default voice to which a sub-instrument or variant is assigned: 1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left 2. Choose from either voice 1, 2, 3, or 4 in the dropdown next to Default voice Changing a voice assignment affects all future notation for the selected sub-instrument or variant but does not alter existing notation. ### Change stave positions To change the stave line or space at which a sub-instrument or variant is positioned: 1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left 2. Move its notehead up or down by clicking the arrows in the spin box next to Stave line ### Assign a keyboard shortcut To assign a keyboard shortcut for a sub-instrument or variant: 1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left 2. Click the button next to Shortcut 3. Type a key to set a shortcut 4. Click Save to confirm your selection A message will appear if your chosen shortcut conflicts with another assignment. Clicking Save at this point will trigger a prompt asking you to confirm your choice. In some cases, it may be okay to assign a shortcut already in use. MuseScore Studio can recognize when a shortcut is being used for percussion notation input and when it applies to something else outside the percussion system. Should a change in shortcut render an existing function no longer possible, either choose a different shortcut, or remove the shortcut by clicking Clear in the Define percussion keyboard shortcut dialog.
This dialog allows you to define or clear a shortcut assignment for each percussion sub-instrument or variant.
### Choose the default stem direction To change the default stem direction for a sub-instrument or variant: 1. Select an instrument from the panel on the left 2. Choose from either Up, Down, or Auto in the dropdown next to Stem direction Changing the stem direction affects all future notation for the selected sub-instrument or variant but does not alter existing notation. ## Saving changes and using them in other scores When you've finished making customizations, press OK to commit your changes. These are saved to your score file. It's also possible to save all your customizations, as well as the drum pad layout in the percussion panel, for use in other scores. To save your percussion kit for use in other scores: 1. Save your setup as a drumset file (.drm) by clicking Save as... in the bottom left corner of the dialog 2. Choose a file location on your computer. By default, the file will be saved in MuseScore Studio's Styles folder 3. Click Save {% hint style="info" %} When loading your drumset file into another score, bear in mind that, while a drumset file can technically be loaded onto any unpitched percussion instrument, playback will only work correctly if the right sound library is chosen in the mixer. When setting up your score, it's safest to add an instrument that matches the one you've previously customized. {% endhint %} To load your percussion kit in another score 1. Create or open another score containing an unpitched percussion instrument 2. Select the instrument's stave 3. Click Edit kit in the percussion panel header 4. In the Customize kit dialog that appears, click the Load... button in the bottom left corner 5. Locate your saved drumset (.drm) file 6. Click Open Your customizations, including any changes made to the layout of the percussion panel, will now be ready to use in your new score. ## # Other percussion notation ## Diddles Diddles can be added by using an eighth-note tremolo:
## Pedal lines To add a vibraphone pedal line, see [Pedal](/idiomatic-notation/keyboard/pedal). ## Rolls To add a drumroll to your score, see [Tremolo](/notation/expressive-markings/tremolos-and-rolls).
## Sticking To enter sticking symbols (R, L): 1. Select a start note; 2. From the menu, select `Add`→`Text`→`Sticking` (alternatively, set up a keyboard [shortcut](/customization/preferences#shortcuts) to do the same\ thing). The cursor positions itself ready to accept your keyboard input; 3. Input the letter just as you would normal text. To move forward or backwards to the next note, see [Keyboard commands (chord symbols)](/text/chord-symbols#navigation-commands). 4. To exit, press `Esc`, or click on a blank section of the score. # Mensural notation and Mensurstrich ## Adding a mensural time signature to your score To apply mensural signs to a score you need to add a conventional [time signature](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures) first, then modify its display by substituting with the appropriate mensural symbol in the [Time signature properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/time-signatures#time-signature-properties) dialog. Note that these signs are for show only; it is not possible to modify the duration ratio between different note values, and the actual underlying time signature remains unchanged. ## Using mensural note symbols \[To be added] * add from symbols palette, hide ## Working with non-metered music Early music, such as renaissance choral music, may be written without barlines or a time signature. This can be achieved in MuseScore as follows: 1. Set up the instruments or voices of the score in the usual way (See [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score)); 2. Hide the time signature; 3. in `Format`→`Style`→`Score`, check the box titled "Display note values across measure boundaries"; 4. Right-click on a measure in the top staff and select [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties); 5. Uncheck "Show barlines"; repeat this for each applicable staff (see note); 6. Click `OK`. Note: In step 4 you can make the barlines invisible instead by selecting all and pressing `V`. Note that the score still behaves as if measures are present. [Measure properties](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-properties) can be applied if required. ## Working with Mensurstrich Mensurstrich is a form of modern notation of early music in which barlines are drawn between staves rather than across them:
### Adding barlines between staves 1. Right click on the bottom staff of the intended mensurstrich system, and select [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties#staff-properties). Uncheck "Show barlines". 2. Select the first (not the start!) barline for each of the remaining staves; 3. Check the "Span to next staff" box in the Barline section of the Properties panel; 4. Adjust "Span from" to set the position of the top of each barline; 5. Press `Set as staff default`; ## Displaying note values across measure boundaries 1. From the menu bar, select `Format`→`Style`→`Score`; 2. Check "Display note values across measure boundaries". ## See also # Slash notation In jazz and popular music, passages are often notated with slash noteheads that indicate no specific pitch. The notation can either include stems to indicate specifc rhythms, or the notation can be stemless and just indicate the beat. ## Filling a range with beat slashes Beat slashes have no stems and thus show no rhythm; just the beat itself. Depending on the content, this might indicate an improvised solo, and accompaniment pattern to be devised by the player, or a suggestion to continue in the style of previously notated passage. These slashes are often accompanied by [chord symbols](/text/chord-symbols), which can also be added in the usual way. ### To fill a range with slashes 1. [Select the desired range](/basics/selecting-elements#creating-a-range-selection) of blank measures 2. From the menu, select Tools -> Fill with slashes.
These slashes do not play, but the chord symbols do. ## Creating rhythmic slash notation To notate a specific rhythm, use rhythmic slash notation. By default, these slashes do not play, but you can override that if you wish to enter specific notes or chord voicings you want to hear even though they will be turned into pitchless slashes in the notation. ### Accompaniment rhythms on the staff 1. Add notes in the desired rhythm using standard notation on the staff. If you will wish to hear playback, enter the actual notes you wish to hear, but otherwise you can enter any pitch you want. 2. [Select the range of chords](/basics/selecting-elements#creating-a-range-selection) 3. From the menu bar, select Tools -> Toggle rhythmic slash notation.
If you wish to hear the playback of the notes you entered, select the applicable range of chords and check Play in the Properties. ### Accent rhythms above or below the staff To enter rhythms above the staff, use the same process, but enter the rhythm into voice 3. Use voice 4 for a rhythm below the staff. # Custom staff types ## Overview MuseScore has four staff types, each of them has different build-in templates, see [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties). To create a custom staff used on whole score : * Use this step common to all four staff types: find and add an instrument similar to the target staff type by [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) or in the [Layout panel](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/instruments-and-system-markings), then change its [Staff properties and Advanced style properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties), notehead scheme is also customized there. * For percussion staff (type 3, see [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties)), in addition to the above, use Edit drumset window for [notehead](/notation/pitch/noteheads) related settings, see [Drumset customization](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/percussion-kit-customization). To create a custom staff to be used on one section of score: * Use the [Staff type change](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-type-change) element. * The Change Instrument text element also change staff type by changing the instrument, see [Mid-score instrument changes](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/mid-score-instrument-changes). Modified Stave Notation (MSN) is a formatting common used in large print. To use MSN see MuseScore 3 tutorial page [Creating Modified Stave Notation in MuseScore](https://musescore.org/en/tutorials/modified-stave-notation), it works similarly inside Musescore 4. ## Customizing appearance of staff lines \[this section is a work in progress, please add missing info] * Number * Color * Visibility * Line distance ## Customizing appearance of generated elements \[this section is a work in progress, please add missing info] * Clef * Key signature * Time signature * Barlines ## Customizing appearance of notes * Ledger lines \[ a work in progress, please add missing info] * Stems \[ a work in progress, please add missing info] ### Notehead schemes
\ \_Download this testing score file \[MS4 Noteheadschemes.mscz]\(\_ ['Notehead schemes'](/notation/pitch/noteheads) are used by musicians to designate notehead shape meaning. In Musescore 4.1.1, schemes for a staff is named "Notehead Scheme", same options for a note is named "Notehead System", see [Noteheads](/notation/pitch/noteheads). Musescore has nine of them. Five of them are directly fully supported, notes written create correct playback. Four "shape note notations" are supported in terms of notehead engraving, users need to take advantage of ['Transposing instruments' feature](/notation/pitch/transposition#working-with-transposing-instruments) to create desired playback, see [Noteheads](/notation/pitch/noteheads). To create custom "shape note notations", see [Noteheads](/notation/pitch/noteheads). The nine supported by Musescore are: * Normal: The default scheme used by vast majority of musicians. 4 solfege related notations: * Pitch name: Noteheads automatically and dynamically change to include the English pitch name in the notehead. * German pitch name: similar to Pitch name but B replaced with H, and B♭ with B. * Solfège Movable Do (also called Tonic Solfa): Noteheads with solfege literally written. It uses Ti and not Si. * Solfège Fixed Do: Noteheads with solfege literally written. Used in France, Italy, Spain, etc. It uses Si and not Ti. 4 shape note notations, need further config if you wish to create desired playback: * 4 Shape (Walker): used in books such as William Walker’s Southern Harmony (1835). * 7 Shape (Aikin): used in books such as Jesse B. Aikin’s The Christian Minstrel (1846), and books by the Ruebush & Kieffer Publishing Company. It's the most used 7-shape system. * 7 Shape (Funk): used in books such as Joseph Funk’s Harmonia Sacra (1851). * 7 Shape (Walker): used in books such as William Walker’s Christian Harmony (1867). ## Changing staff type mid-score See [Overview](#overview) \[this section is a work in progress, please add missing info] * Most of the above plus line & step offset ## External links For Notehead scheme: * [The Music Notation Project Wiki > Shape Note Notation](https://musicnotation.org/wiki/notation-systems/shape-note-notation/) * [IMSLP.org Wiki > 4-shape notation](https://imslp.org/wiki/Category:4-shape_notation) * [IMSLP.org Wiki > 7-shape notation](https://imslp.org/wiki/Category:7-shape_notation) * staff/part properties preview window score [https://github.com/musescore/MuseScore/tree/master/src/notation/view/re…](https://github.com/musescore/MuseScore/tree/master/src/notation/view/resources/data) * [shape note SMuFL specification](https://w3c.github.io/smufl/latest/tables/shape-note-noteheads.html) # Entering and editing text ## Overview Musescore has different text editing functionalities. This chapter and other chapters under handbook Text section focus on the [Musescore Text objects](#musescore-text-object), individual objects that can be placed on a score, and objects containing it. There are also [score settings](#score-settings) that add text onto pages automatically. ## Types of text ### MuseScore Text object A MuseScore Text object is an object on a score that contains individual characters that can be entered and removed by using (typing on) a computer keyboard. It is usually attached to a note or a rest, some of them attach to another object. * Staff Text can be attached to a staff; * Jumps and Markers are attached to measures; * Some types (Title, Subtitle etc.) must be attached to a frame, see [Frame](/formatting/using-frames-for-additional-content), and [Text blocks](/text/text-blocks) chapters. Different types of Text object are not interchangeable. They have distinct property fields that affect how Musescore functions. For example, a Staff Text object styled as a metronome mark can never be configured to change playback tempo inside Musescore. The Tempo object should be used to change playback tempo inside Musescore. To check the object type, select an object on a score, its type is displayed on the status bar.\\
| Text object type | Uses | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Staff Text | General purpose text for one MuseScore instrument. Can be configured to apply swing playback or [sound flags](/sound-and-playback/sound-flags). See [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) and [Staff Text, System Text and Expression Text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text) chapter. | | System Text | Similar to Staff Text, but for all instruments in the system (page layout concept). See [Page layout concepts](/formatting/page-layout-concepts) and [Staff Text, System Text and Expression Text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text) chapter. | | Expression Text | The expression item in the Text [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). A new type introduced in Musescore 4. Does not affect Musescore playback as of Musescore 4.2. See [Staff Text, System Text and Expression Text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text) chapter. | | Instrument change | The Change instr. item in the Text [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). Change the Musescore Instrument after the anchored note or rest. See [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) and [Mid-score instrument changes](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/mid-score-instrument-changes) chapters. | | Dynamic | Such as p and mf, are Text that affects Musescore playback dynamics. See [Dynamics](/notation/expressive-markings/dynamics-and-hairpins) chapter. | | Hairpin | Such as crese. and dim., are Text line that affects Musescore playback dynamics. See [Hairpins](https://github.com/shoogle/Handbook/blob/main/docs/text/broken-reference/README.md) chapter. | | Playing technique annotation | The legato. pizz. etc items in the Text [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). \[This info is a work in progress, the software function is under active dev, pls see and update [Staff Text, System Text and Expression Text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text), and [Dynamics](/notation/expressive-markings/dynamics-and-hairpins), and [Mixer](/sound-and-playback/mixer), and [Glossary](/appendix/glossary) and [Articulations](/notation/expressive-markings/articulations) chapters] | | Tempo | Numerical metronome mark, verbal direction. A Text type that specifies Musescore playback tempo. See [Tempo marks](/text/tempo-markings) chapter. | | Gradual Tempo Change | Such as accel.. A new Text line type introduced in Musescore 4 that affects Musescore playback tempo. See [Tempo marks](/text/tempo-markings) chapter. | | Swing and Straight item in the Tempo [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) | A pre-configured System Text. See [Swing playback](/sound-and-playback/swing-playback) and [Staff Text, System Text and Expression Text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text) chapters. | | Lyrics | Ctrl+V keyboard shortcut breaks up words stored in clipboard, paste and then jump to next anchor conveniently. See [Lyrics](/text/lyrics) chapter. | | Jump | Such as "D.C."(Da Capo), "D.S. al Coda" etc found in the Repeats & Jumps [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). See [Jumps and markers](/notation/repeats/jumps-and-markers) chapter. | | Marker | The Capo symbol, Segno symbol, "Fine", "To Coda" etc found in the Repeats & Jumps [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). See [Jumps and markers](/notation/repeats/jumps-and-markers) chapter. | | Rehearsal mark | The boxed B1 item in the Text [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). Facilitate rehearsals, divide score into sections, bookmark passages etc. See [Rehearsal marks](/text/rehearsal-marks) chapter. | | Chord symbol | Has playback, notes automatically decided. See [Chord symbol](/text/chord-symbols) chapter. | | Nashville number | Has playback, similar to Chord symbol. See [Chord symbol:NNS](/text/chord-symbols#entering-a-nashville-number) chapter. | | Roman Numeral | No playback. See [Chord symbol:RNA](/text/chord-symbols#rna) chapter. | | Figured bass | A period keyboard notation. No playback. See [Figured bass](/text/figured-bass) chapter. | | Sticking | Letters (L and R) attached to (drum) notes showing which hand or foot to use. See [Sticking](/idiomatic-notation/percussion/other-percussion-notation#sticking) chapter. | | Fingering | Numbers or letters attached to notes showing which fingers to use. See [Fingering](/text/fingering) chapter. | | Title, Subtitle, Composer, Lyricist, and Text (text block type) | They are Text types designed to be added into a frame. See [Text blocks](/text/text-blocks) and [Frame](/formatting/using-frames-for-additional-content) chapters. They are not the placeholder text used in the header and footer, see ["Score setting"](#score-settings) section. | | Text line, including Volta, Pedal etc types | Volta etc found in Repeats & Jumps [Palette](/basics/using-the-palettes). Pedal found in Keyboard Palette. Ottava (8--, 8ve, 8va, 15--) etc found in Pitch Palette. Guitar Barre lines etc. See [Other lines](/notation/expressive-markings/other-lines) chapter. | ### Score settings Long and short name of Musescore Instrument (see [Setting up your score](/basics/setting-up-your-score) chapter) is automatically added to the left of staff in each system (page layout concept, see [Page layout concepts](/formatting/page-layout-concepts) chapter). Names can be changed direcly on a score using text edit mode, or using Staff/Part property window, see [Staff/Part properties](/notation/instruments-staves-and-systems/staff-part-properties) chapter. They are, by default, only added when there are more than one instrument. To change this default behavior, change the setting under Format -> Style -> Score. Measure numbers can be added automatically. Configure it at Format -> Style -> Measure nubmers, see [Measure numbering](/notation/rhythm-meter-and-measures/measure-numbering) chapter. Musescore's header and footer functionality adds text to every pages automatically. Configure it at Format -> Style -> Header & footer. Placeholder text (special symbols) can be used to add information like the current page number, copyright claim etc. Placeholder text is also used to add metadata tags, the digital data of a score file, onto the score dynamically. See [Header and footer](/text/header-and-footer) chapter. ## Adding text object to a score Different types of Text object are not interchangeable, decide on the suitable object type before adding it. Use the chart under ["Musescore Text object"](#musescore-text-object) section. For general engraving or visual display purpose, it is recommended to use a [Staff text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text) or [System text](/text/staff-system-and-expression-text). The following explains how to add text to a note or a rest or a valid anchor outside frames. Adding text to a [frame](/formatting/using-frames-for-additional-content) is covered in the [Text blocks](/text/text-blocks) chapter. ### From a palette To add a text element to your score from a [Palette](/customization/palettes), either select one or more notes/rests and click on the desired palette item; or drag the text from the palette onto a note/rest. e.g.
### From the menu If the text object is associated with a staff you can add it by selecting a note, then choosing a text option from Add -> Text. ### Using a keyboard shortcut Many text types can be entered using keyboard shortcuts. Shortcuts are shown to the right of items in Add -> Text. To create a text object, select a note, then enter the required shortcut. ## Deleting text object on a score To edit \text automatically added by score settings\, see ["Score setting"](#score-settings) section. To delete object(s) on a score, [select](/basics/selecting-elements) the objects then press `Backspace` or `Del`. ## Editing text object content To edit \text automatically added by score settings\, see ["Score setting"](#score-settings) section. Text and text line objects are edited with two different methods, depending on the object type: * edit directly in text edit mode, as explained below; or * edit properties in the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel), see the text object's specific chapter. To enter text edit mode use one of the following methods: * Double click on the text object, or * Select the text object and press `Return`, or * Select the text object and press `F2` or `Alt`+`Shift`+`E`, or * Right-click on the text object and select "Edit element." To leave text edit mode either press `Esc` or click on a part of the score outside the edit area. ### Keyboard shortcuts available inside text edit mode The following keyboard shortcuts are available in text edit mode: | Function | Windows & Linux | Mac | | ------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Bold (toggle) | `Ctrl`+`B` | `Cmd`+`B` | | Italic (toggle) | `Ctrl`+`I` | `Cmd`+`I` | | Underline (toggle) | `Ctrl`+`U` | `Cmd`+`U` | | Move cursor | (`Ctrl`+) `Left`, `Right`, `Up`, `Down`, `Home`, `End` | (`Alt`+) `Left`, `Right`, `Up`, `Down` | | Remove character to the left of the cursor | `Backspace` | `Backspace` | | Remove character to the right of the cursor | `Del` | `Del` or `Fn`+`Backspace` | | Start new line | `Return` | `Return` | | Insert special characters (see below) | `Shift`+`F2` | `Shift`+`F2` | ### Special characters Characters not available from the standard keyboard may be accessed using the Special Characters window.
To open Special Characters, in text edit mode (see ["Editing text object content"](#editing-text-object-content) section), press `Shift`+`F2`; or click on `Insert special characters` in the Text section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. The dialog is divided into 3 tabs: Common symbols, musical symbols and unicode symbols. The musical and unicode tabs are further subdivided into alphabetically-arranged categories. It is preferable to use items in Common symbols tab as they are functional, see Musescore 3 handbook [Fonts](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/fonts) chapter. Clicking an item in the Special Characters dialog immediately adds it to the text where the cursor is positioned. Multiple items can be applied without closing the dialog box, and the user can even continue to type normally, delete characters, enter numerical character codes etc., with it open. In text edit mode, the following keyboard shortcuts add a functional version of special characters (whenever possible) into the current Text object, see Musescore 3 handbook [Fonts](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/fonts) chapter. | Character | Windows & Linux | Mac | Note | | ---------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | Sharp ♯ | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`#` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`#` | May not work on some keyboard layouts | | Flat ♭ | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`B` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`B` | | | Natural ♮ | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`H` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`H` | | | Piano p | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`P` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`P` | | | Forte f | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`F` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`F` | | | Mezzo m | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`M` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`M` | | | Rinforzando r | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`R` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`R` | | | Sforzando s | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`S` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`S` | | | Niente n | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`N` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`N` | | | Z z | `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`Z` | `Cmd`+`Shift`+`Z` | | | Elision ‿ | `Ctrl`+`Alt`+`-` | `Cmd`+`Alt`+`-` | | ### Quotation marks Quotation marks use the curly variants by default. Straight quotation marks may be restored with an Undo right after typing the quotation mark, similarly to many word processors. # Formatting text ## Overview ### Levels of formatting Layout and formatting in Musescore Studio has 2 main levels. Read [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles) first. Text objects have finer levels: * Level 1: Properties of each individual text object in a score file: * Formatting of individual characters within a text object; * Formatting of the object that contains all the characters. * Level 2 * "style for certain type of object": you can change their values in ['Style' window: left pane](/customization/templates-and-styles) * "style for text inside certain type of object": you can change their values inside [items under 'Style' window: left pane 'Text style'](/customization/templates-and-styles) ### Appearance and function of Text objects \ The final visual and function of most object in a score file is determined by: * Characters do not have any specific formatting. When formatting are added to them, they will always be used. See [Changing characters](#changing-formatting-of-characters) below. * Text objects do not have any specific properties. When properties are [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel), they will always be used except for characters that already have their own formatting. see details in ["Text properties"](#changing-formatting-of-a-text-object) below. * functional settings: all object on a score uses values in "style for certain type of object", this behavior cannot be changed, but you can edit values in them. * visual settings: * an object on a score uses values in appropriate "style for text inside certain type of object", such as "Style for text inside Chord symbols", "Style for text inside Lyrics Odd Lines" automatically. This behavior can be changed with the More... > Text Style property in [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel). You can also [utilize the 12 custom style](#changing-the-values-inside-a-user-1-to-user-12-style). * "Style for text inside Staff Text" is special. Every Text-related object on a score uses its values unless overridden, this behavior cannot be changed, but you can edit values inside. * A subset of characters always use font settings in ['Style' window](/customization/templates-and-styles) > Score : "Musical symbol font" (8 options): musical glyphs such as Segno, Coda, ottavas, dynamics glyphs such as mf and some [Special characters](/text/entering-and-editing-text#special-characters). See Musescore 3 handbook [Fonts](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/fonts) (mostly the same as in musescore 4.1.1 but upgraded and added 2 options). Options in [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel) behave differently depending on the current selection. "Font", "Style", "Size", "Subscript and superscript" are both object properties, and individual character formatting options. When you change an object using the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel), incompatible formatting on individual characters are removed. "Alignment", "Frame", "Text style" are object properties. When you select individual characters and change these options in the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel), the object properties are changed instead. ## Changing formatting of characters To edit text content, see [Entering and editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text) instead. Use the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel to change formatting of individual characters. Musescore 4 updated the Inspector present in Musescore 2 and Musescore 3 and integrated the function of [Text Toolbar (Text editing)](https://musescore.org/en/handbook/3/text-editing) into the Properties panel. 1. enter text edit mode using one of the following methods: * Double-click on the text object. * Select the object and press `F2` or `Alt`+`Shift`+`E` * Right-click on the element and select `Edit element` 2. highlighted characters 3. apply formatting in Text section of the Properties panel, and/or use keyboard shortcuts (see [Editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text#editing-text-object-content)). ## Changing formatting of a text object
Click See more to see:
{% hint style="info" %} To edit text content, see [Entering and editing text](/text/entering-and-editing-text) instead. {% endhint %} Use the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel to change formatting of the Text object, which may change all of the characters inside: 1. Select text object(s) in a score 2. Edit settings in the Text section of the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel. Many properties will be similar to most word processors, but some special settings are shown after clicking See more: * Scale or Symbol size: Scaling of musical symbols within text. Either Scale (in percentage) or Symbol size (in points) is shown, depending on what type of text object is selected. * Scale with staff size: Whether text size changes proportionally with its staff, see [Page layout concepts](/formatting/page-layout-concepts). * Text style: Changes which style a text object on a score uses, see [below](#changing-which-style-a-text-object-on-a-score-uses). * Position: Above or below the staff, see [below](#position). ### Changing which style a text object on a score uses In the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel, use Text style property under `More`. [Concept of formatting is explained in the overview](#overview). Only the "style for text inside certain type of object" a text object on a score uses can be changed, they includes the "User-1" ... "User-12", see [below](#changing-the-values-inside-a-user-1-to-user-12-style). See [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). ### Position The Properties panel is used for assigning formatting to the Text object(s). When a Text object is changed, all of the characters inside it may change. The [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel also is used for assigning formatting to individual characters inside a Text object, when characters are selected. It is important to know that, even when characters inside a Text object are selected, some properties shown on the Properties panel are still the Text object's setting, but not the character property. They includes the Position property. In the [Properties](/basics/properties-panel) panel, Use Position property under `More` to change layout of the Text object. If a overriding option exists for this type of object, is in "style for certain type of object", but not in "style for text inside certain type of object", see ["Changing the values inside a style"](#changing-the-values-inside-a-style) section below. See also the main chapter [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). ## Changing the values inside a style [Concept of formatting is explained in the overview](#overview). Understand [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles) first. To change values inside a style, use the "Style" window: `Format`→`Style`. * "style for certain type of object": you can change their values in 'Style' window: left pane" * "style for text inside certain type of object": you can change their values inside items under 'Style' window: left pane 'Text style', or * Use the more efficient way from the Properties panel: 1. Select a score object that use the style; 2. Edit a property; 3. Click on the ellipsis (…) above the property and select "Save as default style for this score". 4. Repeat for other properties as required. ### Changing the values inside a User-1 to User-12 style To assign visual settings values to a custom style: "User-1" to "User-12", use the "Style" window: `Format`→`Style` > Text Style > User-1 ... User-12 # Staff, system, and expression text ## Overview Staff Text objects and System Text objects are for indicative purposes listed right below. They can optionally affect Musescore playback, only the section after the attached note or rest is affected. * Applying [swing](#swing-playback) and straight time (staff text and system text only) * Applying score and movement titles * Other general purpose not covered by other text types only. Different types of text-based objects are not interchangeable, see [Text types](/text/entering-and-editing-text#types-of-text). Expression text objects indicate musical expressions and performance indications. They do not affect Musescore playback. To indicate dynamics and create playback at the same time, use [Dynamics symbol object](/notation/expressive-markings/dynamics-and-hairpins). To indicate and affect tempo at the same time, use [Tempo markings](/text/tempo-markings). ### Similarity and difference between Staff Text and System Text Staff Text and System Text are similar in behavior and function. * Both of them attaches to a note or rest. * Both of them can be set-up to have effect on audio created by Musescore's Synthesizer, a Staff Text only affects the [Musescore Instrument](/basics/setting-up-your-score) that that note belongs to, a System Text affects all Musescore Instruments on a score. * Staff Texts are hidden along with "Hide empty staves within systems" option (and the sub-option "Don't hide empty staves in first system") under "Style" window : "Score", see [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). * A Staff Text only appears in the [Musescore Part(s)](/basics/parts) that features the Musescore Instrument. A System Text appears on all Musescore Parts. * New System Text is positioned above the top staff of each [system (layout concept)](/formatting/page-layout-concepts). ## Adding Staff Text to your score 1. Select a note 2. Use one of the following methods: * Press `Ctrl`+`T`. * From the menu, select `Add`→`Text`→`Staff Text`. * Click on the "Staff Text" icon in the Text [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) 3. Enter the desired text in the bounding box. Alternatively, drag the "Staff Text" icon onto a note in the score before entering the desired text. ## Adding expression text to your score 1. Select a note 2. Use one of the following methods: * Press `Ctrl`+`E`. * From the menu, select `Add`→`Text`→`Expression text`. * Click on the "Expression text" icon in the Text [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) 3. Enter the desired text in the bounding box. Alternatively, drag the "Expression text" icon onto a note in the score before entering the desired text. ## Adding System Text to your score 1. Select a note 2. Use one of the following methods: * Press `Ctrl`+`Shift`+`T`. * From the menu, select `Add`→`Text`→`System Text`. * Click on the "System Text" icon in the Text [palette](/basics/using-the-palettes) 3. Enter the desired text in the bounding box. Alternatively, drag the "System Text" icon onto a note in the score before entering the desired text. ## Repeating System Text on other staves New System Text is positioned above the top staff of each [system (layout concept)](/formatting/page-layout-concepts). If you need a similar indication on a lower staff, add it to that staff using [Staff Text](#adding-staff-text-to-your-score). [Some templates](/introduction/create-your-first-score) have an additional feature. When you create a System Text, it is automatically duplicated and shown just above another lower staff. If either instance of the object is edited the content of both is updated. If either one is removed, both are removed. These templates includes: * Symphony Orchestra : duplicated and shown above violin. * Classical Orchestra : duplicated and shown above violin. * SATB + Piano : duplicated and shown above piano. * SATB + Organ : duplicated and shown above organ. * SATB Closed Score + Piano : duplicated and shown above piano. * SATB Closed Score + Organ : duplicated and shown above organ. ## Properties Edit properties of selected Staff Text, System Text, and Expression Text object(s) in the [Properties panel](/basics/properties-panel). Text related settings are covered in [Formatting text](/text/formatting-text) chapter. An Expression Text can be added to a note that already has a Dynamics symbol attached. Doing so snaps it to the dynamics symbols, this behavior and the Properties : Expression: Snap to dynamic property is explained in [Dynamics](/notation/expressive-markings/dynamics-and-hairpins) chapter. ### Swing playback Staff and system text can optionally be used to introduce [Swing playback](#swing-playback). To apply swing: 1. Right-click on a text object (staff text or system text only) 2. Select Staff text properties or System text properties 3. This opens a dialog where you can [adjust swing settings](/sound-and-playback/swing-playback#adjust-the-type-and-degree-of-swing). ## Style See main chapter [Templates and styles](/customization/templates-and-styles). "Style for text inside Staff Text" is special, see [Formatting text](/text/formatting-text). * Values of the "Style for Staff Text" can be edited in Format→Style→Staff Text. * Values of the "Style for Expression text" can be edited in Format→Style→Expression text * Values of the "Style for text inside Staff Text" can be edited in Format→Style→Text styles→Staff * Values of the "Style for text inside System Text" can be edited in Format→Style→Text styles→System * Values of the "Style for text inside Expression" can be edited in Format→Style→Text styles→Expression
--- [Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)


D.C.	Repeat from the beginning (stands for for da capo).
D.S.	Repeat from the segno marker (stands for dal segno).
D.C. al Fine	Repeat from the beginning until 'Fine'.
D.S. al Fine	Repeat from the segno marker until 'Fine'.
D.C. al Coda	Repeat from the beginning until 'To Coda', then jump to the coda.
D.S. al Coda	Repeat from the segno marker until 'To Coda', then jump to the coda.


Fine	End the piece or section. This must be used together with a 'D.C. al Fine' or 'D.S. al Fine'.
To Coda	Jump to the coda. This must be used together with a 'D.C. al Coda' or 'D.S. al Coda'.